Govt.

of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education

Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Scheme of Study and Examination

(With effect from 2010-2011)

Sl. Contact Hours Exam.

Subjects Q P CODE
No. Duration Scheme of Examination
Theory Pract. Total End Exam.
Total Min
Max. Marks
Min.
Max. I. A. Marks for
passing
Marks Marks passing
Marks
(with
IA)
Theory
1 Computer Organisation 9CS31 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
2 Data Structures Using C 9CS32 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
3 Computer Networks 9CS33 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
Practical
4 Data Structures lab 9CS34P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
5 PC Hardware and 9CS35P
6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
Networking lab
6 Graphical User Interface 9CS36P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125
lab 60
7 Web Design lab 9CS37P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
12 24 36 700 340 175 875 375
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Scheme of Study and Examination

(With effect from 2010-2011)

Sl. Contact Hours Exam.

Subjects Q P CODE
No. Duration Scheme of Examination
Theory Pract. Total End Exam.
Total Min
Max. Marks
Min.
Max. I. A. Marks for
passing
Marks Marks passing
Marks
(with
IA)
Theory
1 OOP with C++ 9CS41 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
2 Database Management 9CS42
4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
Systems
3 Operating System 9CS43 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
4 Software Engineering 9CS44 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
Practical
5 OOP with C++ lab 9CS45P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
6 DBMS lab 9CS46P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
7 Linux lab 9CS47P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
16 18 34 700 290 175 875 360
 DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION
DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING
FIFTH SEMESTER
SCHEME OF STUDY AND EXAMINATION
W.E.F : 2011-12
CONTACT HOURS SCHEME OF EXAMINATION MIN.
END EXAM TOTAL PASS
SL. Q. P EXAM
SUBJECT MAX.MARKS MIN. I.A. MAX MARKS
NO. CODE THEORY PRACT TOTAL DURATION
PASS MARKS MARKS ( WITH I A
MARKS MARKS)

Basic Management
1 Skills and Indian 9CS51 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
Constitution.
Programming with
2 9CS52 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
Java
3 Web Programming 9CS53 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

PRACTICALS
Programming with
4 9CS54P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
Java Lab
Web Programming
5 9CS55P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
Lab
6 CASP 9CS56P 6 6 3 50 25 75 125 60
7 Project Work – I* 9CS57P 3 3 --- ---- 25 25 ---
TOTAL 12 21 33 550 230 225 775 315
*
 PROJECT WORK-I TO BE CONTINUED IN THE VI TH SEMESTER.
 PROJECT WORK EXAM WILL BE AT THE END OF VI TH SEMESTER

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

 DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING
SIXTH SEMESTER
SCHEME OF STUDY AND EXAMINATION
W.E.F : 2011-12
CONTACT HOURS SCHEME OF EXAMINATION MIN.
EXAM END EXAM TOTAL PASS
SL.
SUBJECT Q. P CODE THEOR DURA MAX. MIN. I.A. MAX MARKS
NO. PRACT TOTAL TION
Y MARKS PASS MARKS MARKS ( WITH I A
MARKS MARKS

1 Software Testing 9CS61 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

Network Security
2 9CS62 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45
and Management
Elective (Opt Any One)
1) Information Storage
and Management 9CS63EA

3 2) Mobile Computing 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

9CS63EB
3) Embedded and
Real-Time Systems 9CS63EC

PRACTICALS
Software Testing
4 9CS64P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
Lab
Network Security
5 9CS65P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60
Lab

6 Project Work-II 9CS66P 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

TOTAL 12 18 30 600 255 150 750 315

 GOVERNMENT OF KARNATAKA
BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATIONS
Second SemesterDiploma
APPLIED SCIENCE (COMMON TO ALL COURSES) SUBJECT CODE:

CURRICULAUM contact Hours -5Hrs/week

Unit No Name of the chapter No of Hr
01 Units, Dimensions & Measurements 06 Hrs
02 Basics of Dynamics 06 Hrs
03 Basics of Statics 06 Hrs
04 Properties of solids & liquids 10 Hrs
05 Heat & Properties of gases 05Hrs
06 Wave Motion 12 Hrs
07 Physical Optics 12 Hrs
08 Modern Physics 09 Hrs
09 Engg. Chemistry 08 Hrs
Test & Assignments 06 Hrs
TOTAL 80 Hrs

Note: For setting of question paper,

Unit No. 01, 02 and 03 ------------- Section A

Unit No.04, 05 and 06 --------------- Section B

Unit No.07, 08 and 09 ---------------- Section C

Also refer table of specification

 APPLIED SCIENCE (COMMON TO ALL COURSES) SUBJECT CODE:

CONTENTS
Unit No 01

Units, Dimensions & Measurements : ( 6 Hrs)

Physical quantity, Fundamental & derived Physical quantities, Unit of physical quantity, systems
of units, fundamental & derived units, S.I units, Basic quantities , their S.I units, & symbols,
supplementary quantities, their S.I units & symbols, Prefixes for multiples & sub multiples with
their symbols, Advantages of S.I units.

Dimensions of a physical quantity examples:- Steps to write dimensions, Dimensional formula

Dimensional equation, Applications of dimensional equation, Limitations
( Disadvantages) of dimensional equations ( analysis).

Measurement:- Principle of vernier, Neat diagram of slide calipers & its parts, Zero error & its
correction, Least count, Reading MSR & VSR (CVD), use of vernier calipers for measurements,
problems on vernier calipers.
Principle of screw & nut ( Micrometer principle ), Neat diagram of screw gauge & its parts,
Zero error, zero correction, Pitch, least count, reading PSR & HSR, use of screw gauge for
measurements, problems on screw gauge.

Unit No 02

Basics of Dynamics ( 6 Hrs)

Recapitulation of equations of motion, Newton’s Ist law of motion, Force, basic forces in motion,
gravitational force, electrostatic force, electromagnetic force, nuclear force, Difference between
strong interaction & weak interaction, Inertia, types of inertia ( inertia of rest, inertia of motion,
inertial of direction ), Momentum, Newton’s IInd law of motion, measurement of force using
second law, simple problems on F = ma and equations of motion, Impulse of force, Impulse as the
product of force and time, also impulse as the difference of momentum, examples of impulse,
simple problems on impulse, Newtons IIIrd law of motion and its examples. Law of conservation
of momentum, Statement, proof of this law using Newton’s laws, simple problems

Friction:- Cause of friction, types of friction, static friction, limiting friction, kinetic friction,
rolling friction, sliding friction,, laws of limiting friction ,coefficient of friction advantages and
disadvantages of friction, preventive methods of friction,
Unit No 03

Basics of Statics ( 6 Hrs):-

Scalar & Vector quantities with examples, geometrical representation of a vector, concurrent &
parallel vectors, Resultant, equilibrium & equilibrant of vectors,
Law of parallelogram of vectors:- Statement, explanation, expressions for magnitude & direction
of the resultant of two concurrent vectors, simple problems, resolution of vectors, explanation,
simple problems, Law of triangle of vectors, explanation, converse of law of triangle of vectors,
law of polygon of vectors, explanation.
Lami,s theorem -Explanation, Experiments to verify law of parallelogram of forces, converse of
law of triangle of forces, & Lami’s theorem. Problems on above laws.
Moment of a force, positive & negative moments, parallel forces, Like & unlike parallel
forces, couple, moment of a couple, practical examples of couple, work done by a couple
( equation only), Resultant of two like & unlike parallel forces, condition of equilibrium of
coplanar parallel forces, Experiment to verify the conditions of equilibrium of co-planar parallel
forces. Problems

Unit No 04

Properties of Solids and Liquids ( 10 Hrs):-

Plasticity and Elasticity, examples, Deformation in bodies by the action of external forces,
Stress, Types of stress, Tensile stress, example, Compressive stress, example, Shear stress,
example, Strain, Types of strain, Tensile strain-examples, Volume strain-examples, Shear strain-
examples, Hooke’s Law, Stress-strain graph with explanation.., Elastic co-efficient Modulus of
elasticity, Young’s modulus of elasticity-formula, Bulk modulus of elasticity-Formula, Rigidity
modulus of elasticity-formula, Explanation of factor of safety Compressibility, Poisson’s ratio
,Experiment to determine Young’s modulus of elasticity by Searle’s method, problems.
Properties of Liquids: Liquid thrust, Pressure, Expression for pressure at a point inside a liquid,
simple problems, Cohesion, Adhesion, nature of meniscus and angle of contact – examples,.
Surface Tension-Explanation, formula unit and dimension, practical examples of surface tension,
applications of surface tension,
Factors affecting surface tension, capillarity and its applications, expression for surface tension in
case of capillary rise, Determination of surface tension by capillary rise method, simple problems.
Viscosity- Explanation with example, viscous force, factors affecting viscosity of gasses and
liquids, co-efficient of viscosity , SI unit and dimensions, Experiment to determine co-efficient of
viscosity by Poisulle’s method, Applications of viscosity, simple problems.
Unit No 05

Heat and properties of gases (5 Hrs):-

Heat, temperature, S.I units, difference between heat and temperature, calorie.
Modes of transform of heat:- Conduction, Convection, Radiation examples, good conductors of
heat & insulators, examples, Applications of conduction, convection & radiation.
Specific heat of a substance S.I unit, Heat capacity ( thermal capacity or specific heat capacity
of body)

Boyle’s law, statement & mathematical form, Gay-Lussac’s law Statement and expression,
Charles law, Statement and expression, Absolute (Kelvin) scale of temperature, conversion
formula to Celsius scale from absolute scale,
Perfect gas equation (combined gas equation), Specific heat of gas at constant volume
(Cv ) Specific heat of gas at constant pressure (Cp ), relation between Cp & Cv
[ (i) ratio of specific heat (ii) Meyer’s relation ( no derivation) ]
Thermodynamics Isothermal process, Adiabatic process. Laws of thermodynamics. Problems on
gas laws.

Unit No 06

Wave motion (12 Hrs)

Vibratory motion, periodic motion, definitions of period, frequency, and amplitude for a vibrating
particle, Simple Harmonic Motion, Explanation of SHM(motion of the foot of the
perpendicular),Obtaining expression for displacement, velocity and acceleration of a body
executing SHM,

Wave Motion- Explanation of a wave and wave motion with examples, definitions of wave
velocity, wave period, wave frequency, and wave length, derivation of V = nλ problems. Types of
waves transverse and longitudinal waves with examples, mechanical and non mechanical waves
with examples. Mode of transfer of longitudinal waves
( sound wave) in air. Velocity sound in a gas, Newton’s assumptions and formula Laplace’s
assumptions and corrected formula. Effect of temperature, pressure and humidity on the velocity of
sound, problems. Stationary waves with examples, characteristics of stationary waves.
Resonance. Explanation of free, forced vibrations with examples. Explanation of resonance,
practical examples of resonance. Experiment to determine velocity of sound in air by resonance air
column method. Problems.

Beats, Beat frequency, applications of beats, problems.

Laws of transverse vibrations of stretched strings statements of the laws with relevant formula.
Experiments to determine frequency of the tuning fork using sonometer by
(i)Absolute method and (ii) Comparison method. Problems

Musical note and Noise:- examples , characteristics of musical note.

Acoustics of buildings Echo, Reverberation, Interference, resonance. Reverberation time.

Sabine’s formula and explanation, absorption coefficient of materials. Remedies for defects.
Unit No 07

Physical Optics (12 Hrs)

Introduction to theories of light, Newton’s corpuscular theory, Huygens wave theory,

Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory, Planck’s quantum theory, Dual nature of radiation.

Interference, theory of interference, Amplitude of resultant wave, condition for constructive

interference, condition for destructive interference, condition for sustained interference, Young’s
double slit experiment, expressions for path difference and fringe width, intensity distribution in
interference fringe, simple problem on fringe width & path difference.

Diffraction, classification diffraction, Fresenel’s diffraction, Fraunhoffer diffraction, difference

between them, Huygen’s principal, wave front, diffraction with white light, difference between
Interference and Diffraction, Concept of resolving power of an optical instrument, Rayleigh
criteria, Resolving power of a microscope, and its expressions in terms of wave length, resolving
power of telescope, expression for resolving power of in terms of wave length, simple problems.

Polarisation:-Introduction, experiment to demonstrate the transverse nature of light.

Representation of polarized and un-polarized light. Plane of vibration and plane of polarization.
Methods of producing plane polarized light. Polarization by reflection, Brewster’s law, Brewster’s
angle, formula for refractive index in terms of Brewster’s angle. Polarization by refraction.
Polaroids, uses of polaroids .

Unit No 08

Modern physics (9Hrs)

Methods of electronic emission

Thermo ionic emission, photoelectric emission, field emission, and secondary emission.
Experiment to study photoelectric effect, Experimental results ( four results). Four laws of
photoelectric emission, Einstein’s photoelectric equation.
Photoelectric cells, Photo emissive cells, Photo voltaic cells, Photo conductive cells. Applications
of photo electric cells. Electron microscope Principal of electron microscope, focusing by
magnetic lens, construction and working, uses of electron microscope, Atomic forced microscope
simple working of atomic forced microscope, advantages of atomic forced microscope over
electron microscope

Scattering of light:- Coherent scattering and incoherent scattering. Explanation of scattering.

Blue color of the sky. Blue color of water. Red color of sun during sun rise and sun set. White
color of clouds. Raman effect. Applications of Raman effect .
Lasers:- Induced absorption, spontaneous emission, stimulated emission. Principal of laser,
population inversion, optical pumping. Properties of lasers. Applications of lasers.
Radio activity:- Introduction, experiment to demonstrate three types of radiations. Properties
of three types of radiations. Applications of radio activity in the field of agriculture, medicine,
biology and geology.
Unit No 09

Engineering chemistry (8 Hrs)

Pollution:- Air pollution, air pollutants ( SO2 , H2S,HF,NO2, CO, dust), harmful effects. Acid
rain and its effects ( basic ideas). Other effects of air pollution, Green house effect, global
warming, effects of global warming, basic ideas, ozone layer, importance , causes of depletion of
ozone layers (no equation). Effects of ozone layer depletion control of air pollution
Water pollution, causes ( sewage, effluents, algae, micro organisms), their harmful effects. Their
control. Sewage problem and disposals
Corrosion, electrochemical theory of corrosion, formation of galvanic cells, concentration cells.
Methods of prevention of corrosion-Alloying, surfaced coating, galvanizing , electroplating,
anodizing, cathodic protection.

PH of a solution, water as weak electrolyte, Hydrogen ions, hydroxyl ions. Acidic solution, basic
solution and neutral solution, concentration of H+ ions. Ionic product of pure of water, ionic
product of acidic, basic and neutral solution. PH scale. PH for neutral acidic and basic solution, PH
values of some important solutions. Applications of PH
 Second Semester
Subject: APPLIED SCIENCE
code no:
Contact Hours:05Hrs/week Contact Hrs/Semister:80

Unit No.01 UNITS,DIMENSIONS AND MEASUREMENTS (6 Hrs)

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

1.1 To understand the concept of Physical Quantities and their units.

1.2 To understand the characteristics of different physical quantities.
1.3 To use appropriate measuring instruments

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVESS

1.1.1 Define a physical quantity

1.1.2 Distinguish between fundamental and derived physical quantity.
1.1.3 Define unit of a physical quantity.
1.1.4 List different system of units.
1.1.5 List the fundamental units .
1.1.6 List the derived units.
1.1.7 Define S.I units.
1.1.8 List the basic quantities.
1.1.9 Write the basic units and symbols for them.
1.1.10 List the supplementary units and symbols for them.
1.1.11 Write the supplementary units and symbols for them.
1.1.12 Write the prefix for multiples and submultiples in S.I system.
1.1.13 State the advantages of S.I units.
1.2.1 Define dimensions of physical quantity.
1.2.2 Write the examples of dimensions of physical quantities.
1.2.3 State the steps used for writing the dimension of a physical quantity.
1.2.4 Define dimensional equation (dimensional formula) for a physical quantity.
1.2.5 State the advantages of dimensional equation.
1.2.6 State the disadvantages (limitations) of dimensional equation.
1.3.1 Define measurement
1.3.2 List the instruments used to measure accurately.
1.3.3 Define the Least Count of measuring instruments.
1.3.4 Define principle of vernier.
1.3.5 Identify the parts of a slide calipers.
1.3.6 Explain about zero error and its correction in the case of slide calipers.
1.3.7 Define least count of vernier calipers.
1.3.8 Describe the measurement of MSR and VSR (CVD).
1.3.9 State the uses of vernier calipers
1.3.10 Solve measurement problems on vernier calipers.
1.3.11 Define principle of screw and nut (micrometer principle). .

1.3.12 Identify the parts of screw gauge and label its parts.
1.3.13 Explain for writing zero error and zero correction
1.3.14 Define pitch of a screw
1.3.15 Define least count of a screw gauge
1.3.16 Explain measurement of PSR and HSR for screw gauge.
1.3.17 Solve measurement problems on screw gauge..

Unit No.02 BASICS OF DYNAMICS 06 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

2.1 To revise equation of motion learnt in high school classes and to apply them to
Solve problems.
2.2 To comprehend Newton’s laws of motion.
2.3 To understand friction.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

2.1.1 Review four equations of motion

2.1.2 State the meaning of the quantities involved in equations
2.1.3 Solve problems on equations of motion
2.2.1 State Newton’s First law
2.2.2 Define force
2.2.3 Define gravitational force.
2.2.4 Define electrostatic force.
2.2.5 Define electromagnetic force.
2.2.6 Define nuclear force.
2.2.7 Differentiate between strong and weak interaction.
2.2.8 Define inertia.
2.2.9 Define intertia of rest.
2.2.10 Give examples for inertia of rest.
2.2.11 Define inertia of motion.
2.2.12 Give examples of inertia of motion.
2.2.13 Define inertia of direction.
2.2.14 Give examples of inertia of direction.
2.2.15 Define momentum.
2.2.16 State Newton’s Second law of motion.
2.2.17 Review F= ma
2.2.18 Solve problems on F= ma
2.2.19 Define impulse as a product of force and time.
2.2.20 Write S.I unit and dimensions of impulse.
2.2.21 Obtain impulse as a difference of momentum.
2.2.22 Write examples for impulse.
2.2.23 Solve problems on impulse.
2.2.24 State Newton’s Third law
2.2.25 Give examples for Third law.
2.2.26 State law of conservation of momentum.
2.2.27 Prove the law of conservation of momentum using Newton’s laws.
2.2.28 Solve simple problems.
2.3.1 Define friction.
2.3.2 Point out the causes of friction.
2.3.3 List the types of friction.
2.3.4 Define static friction.
2.3.5 Define limiting friction.
2.3.6 Define kinetic friction.
2.3.7 Define rolling friction.
2.3.8 Define sliding friction.
2.3.9 State four laws of limiting friction.
2.3.10 Define coefficient of friction.
2.3.11 Write the advantages of friction.
2.3.12 Write the disadvantages of friction.
2.3.13 Discuss the preventive method of friction.

Unit No. 03 BASICS OF STATICS 06 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

3.1 To understand the composition, resolution and equilibrium of vectors.

3.2 To understand moment of a force , couple and parallel coplanar forces.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

3.1.1 Define a scalar quantity with examples.

3.1.2 Define a vector quantity with examples.
3.1.3 Represent a vector quantity geometrically.
3.1.4 Define concurrent and non concurrent vectors.
3.1.5 Define resultant of a two or more concurrent vectors (forces).
3.1.6 Define equilibrium of vectors.
3.1.7 Define equilibrant.
3.1.8 Write the relation between resultant and equilibrant .
3.1.9 State and explain the law of parallelogram of vectors.
3.1.10 Obtain expressions for the magnitude and direction of the resultant of two vectors acting at
a point.
3.1.11 Explain resolution of vectors.
3.1.12 Solve problems on parallelogram law and resolution of vectors.
3.1.13 State and explain the converse of the law of triangle of vectors.
3.1.14 State and explain the law of polygon of vectors.
3.1.15 State and explain Lami’s theorem .
3.1.16 Describe experiments to verify the law of parallelogram of vectors and the converse of the
law of triangle of vectors and Lami’s theorem.
3.1.17 Solve problems on law of triangle of vectors, Lami’s theorem.
3.2.1 Define moment of force.
3.2.2 Write S I unit and dimensions of it.
3.2.3 Define positive and negative moment of force.
3.2.4 Define couple and moment of a couple.
3.2.5 Write practical applications of couple.
3.2.6 Define like and unlike parallel forces.
3.2.7 Explain the resultant of like parallel forces.
3.2.8 Explain the resultant of unlike parallel forces.
3.2.9 Explain the condition of equilibrium of number of coplanar parallel forces.
3.2.10 Describe an experiment to verify the conditions of equilibrium of parallel coplanar forces.
3.2.11 Solve problems on parallel forces.

Unit No.04 PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS AND LIQUIDS 10 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

4.1 To understand the properties of solids.

4.2 To understand the properties of liquids.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

4.1.1 Explain solid as a state of matter.

4.1.2 Explain meaning of “deformation “ with examples.
4.1.3 Define elasticity with examples.
4.1.4 Explain the meaning of elastic limit.
4.1.5 Define plasticity with examples.
4.1.6 Define stress.
4.1.7 Write S.I unit and dimensions of stress.
4.1.8 Define Tensile stress with examples.
4.1.9 Define Volume stress with examples.
4.1.10 Define Shear stress with examples.
4.1.11 Define strain.
4.1.12 Define Tensile strain with examples.
4.1.13 Define Volume strain with examples.
4.1.14 Define Shear strain with examples.
4.1.15 State Hooke’s law.
4.1.16 Explain limitations of Hooke’s law.
4.1.17 Draw stress versus strain graph.
4.1.18 Explain the features of the graph.
4.1.19 Define coefficient of elasticity,(Modulus of elasticity)
4.1.20 Write formula of modulus of elasticity.
4.1.21 Define Young’s modulus and write its formula.
4.1.22 Write its S.I unit and dimensions.
4.1.23 Define Bulk modulus and write its formula .Write its SI unit and dimensions.
4.1.24 Define Rigidity modulus and write its formula.
4.1.25 Write its SI unit and dimensions.
4.1.26 Define factor of safety.
4.1.27 Write its formula.
4.1.28 Describe an experiment to determine Young’s modulus of a material using Searle’s
apparatus.
4.1.29 Solve problems.
4.2.1 Explain liquid as a state of matter.
4.2.2 Define Thrust and write its SI unit.
4.2.3 Define pressure and write its SI unit.
4.2.4 Derive an expression for the pressure at a point inside a liquid at rest.
4.2.5 Solve problems.
4.2.6 Define adhesive forces with example.
4.2.7 Define cohesive forces with an example.
4.2.8 Explain the nature of meniscus with examples.
4.2.9 Define angle of contact with examples.
4.2.10 Explain surface tension on the basis of molecular theory.
4.2.11 Define surface tension.
4.2.12 Write the formula,SI unit and dimensions of it.
4.2.13 Give examples for the existence of surface tension.
4.2.14 Explain the factors affecting the surface tension.
4.2.15 Write the applications of surface tension.
4.2.16 Define capillary rise and capillarity.
4.2.17 Obtain an equation for surface tension in case of capillary rise.
4.2.18 Describe an experiment to determine surface tension of water by capillary rise method.
4.2.19 Solve problems.
4.2.20 Explain the concept of friction in a liquid flow
4.2.21 Explain viscous force.
4.2.22 Define viscosity.
4.2.23 Explain the factors affecting viscous force.
4.2.24 Define coefficient of viscosity.
4.2.25 Write SI unit and dimensions of coefficient of viscosity.
4.2.26 Discuss the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
4.2.27 List the applications of viscosity.
4.2.28 Describe an experiment to determine viscosity of water by poissulle’s method.

Unit No.05 HEAT AND PROPERTIES OF GASES 05Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

5.1 To understand Heat and Temperature.

5.2 To study modes and Transmission of heat and their applications.
5.3 To study the specific heat of a substances.
5.4 To study gas laws and specific heat of gas.
5.5 To understand laws of Thermodynamics.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

5.1.1 Define heat.

5.1.2 List the sources of heat.
5.1.3 Define temperature.
5.1.4 Explain different scales of temperature.
5.1.5 Write the differences between heat and temperature.
5.1.6 Define calorie.
5.1.7 Define SI unit of heat - joule.
5.2.1 List the different modes of transmission of heat.
5.2.2 Define conduction.
5.2.3 List the applications of conduction.
5.2.4 Define good conductors of heat and insulators.
5.2.5 List the uses of good conductors and insulators,
5.2.6 Define convection.
5.2.7 Explain two types of convection.
5.2.8 List the applications of convection.
5.2.9 Define radiation.
5.2.10 List the applications of radiation.
5.3.1 Define and explain specific heat of substance.
5.3.2 Obtain the equation for specific heat of substance and write its SI unit.
5.3.3 List the values for specific heats of few materials commonly used.
5.3.4 Solve simple numerical problems on equation for specific heat.
5.4.1 State Boyle’s law.
5.4.2 Write the expressions of Boyle’s law.
5.4.3 State Charle’s law and write its mathematical expression.
5.4.4 State Gay-Lussac’s law and write its mathematical expression.
5.4.5 Explain the Absolute scale of temperature on the basis of Charle’s law ,give its graphical
representation.
5.4.6 Obtain combined gas equation and perfect gas equation.
5.4.7 Solve problems
5.4.8 Define specific heat of a gas at constant volume( Cv).
5.4.9 Define specific heat of a gas at constant pressure (Cp).
5.4.10 Write the relation between Cp and Cv ( i)ratio of specific heat. (ii) Meyer’s relation ( no
derivation.)
5.5.1 Define Isothermal process and Adiabatic process with reference to gas.
5.5.2 State First law of thermodynamics.
5.5.3 Write the mathematical expression of First law of thermodynamics.
5.5.4 State the Second law of thermodynamics.
5.5.5 List the application of Second law of thermodynamics.

Unit No.06 WAVE MOTION 12 Hrs

GNERAL OBJECTIVES

6.1 To understand Simple Hormonic Motion.

6.2 To understand wave motion.
6.3 To understand stationary waves ,resonance and beats.
6.4 To study transverse vibrations of stretched strings.
6.5 To know musical note and noise.
6.6 To study acoustics of buildings.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

6.1.1 Define vibratory motion with examples.

6.1.2 Define periodic motion with examples.
6.1.3 Explain and define Simple Hormonic Motion.
6.1.4 Obtain an expression for displacement, velocity and acceleration or a particle executing
SHM
6.1.5 Define period, frequency, amplitude in the case of vibrating particle.
6.2.1 Explain wave and wave motion with example.
6.2.2 Explain mechanical waves and electromagnetic waves with examples.
6.2.3 Define transverse waves with example.
6.2.4 Define longitudinal waves with example.
6.2.5 List the differences between transverse waves and longitudinal waves.
6.2.6 Define wave frequency, wave period, wave length, wave velocity, wave amplitude for a
wave.
6.2.7 Derive the relation V=nλ
6.2.8 Solve problems on the relation.
6.2.9 Explain propagation of sound in air.
6.2.10 Explain Newton’s assumptions for the velocity of sound in air (gas) and write formula.
6.2.11 Explain Laplace’s assumption for velocity of sound in air.
6.2.12 Write Newton - Laplace formula for the velocity of sound in a gas.
6.2.13 Discuss the effect of pressure ,temperature, humidity on the velocity of sound.
6.2.14 Solve problems on Newton - Laplace formula.
6.3.1 Define stationary waves.
6.3.2 List the characteristics of stationary waves.
6.3.3 Define free vibrations with examples.
6.3.4 Define forced vibrations with examples.
6.3.5 Define resonance with examples.
6.3.6 Describe an experiment to determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and
zero degree Celsius by resonance air column method.
6.3.7 Solve problems.
6.3.8 Define beats, beat frequency.
6.3.9 State applications of beats. Solve problems.
6.4.1 Explain the transverse vibrations of stretched strings.
6.4.2 State the three laws of transverse vibration of stretched strings with relevant formula.
6.4.3 Describe an experiment to determine the frequency of tuning fork by comparison method
using sonometer.
6.4.4 Describe an experiment to determine the frequency of tuning fork by absolute method
using sonometer.
6.4.5 Solve problems.
6.5.1 Define musical note, noise.
6.5.2 List the differences between musical note and noise.
6.5.3 List the characteristics of musical note.
6.6.1 Explain acoustics with regards to buildings.
6.6,2 List the different types of defects of acoustics in buildings.
6.6.3 Define Echo, Reverberation, Interference, Resonance.
6.6.4 Define Reverberation time.
6.6.5 Define absorptive coefficients of materials.
6.6.6 Write Sabine’s formula and explain the notations.
6.6.7 List the different remedies for defects.
6.6.8 Solve problems on Sabine’s formula.

Unit No.07 PHYSICAL OPTICS 12Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

7.1 To understand various theories of light.

7.2 To understand the concept of Interference.
7.3 To understand the concept of Diffraction .
7.4 To understand the concept of Polarisation.
 SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

7.1.1 Explain Newton’s corpuscular theory.

7.1.2 Explain Huygen’s wave theory.
7.1.3 Explain Maxwell’s Electromagnetic theory.
7.1.4 Explain Planck’s quantum theory.
7.1.5 Explain dual nature of radiation (light).
7.2.1 Define interference.
7.2.2 Obtain the equation for resultant displacement.
7.2.3 Derive the equation for amplitude of the resultant wave.
7.2.4 Discuss the conditions for constructive interference.
7.2.5 Discuss the conditions for destructive interference.
7.2.6 List the conditions of sustained interference.
7.2.7 Explain Young’s double slit experiment.
7.2.8 Obtain expression for path difference.
7.2.9 Obtain expression for fringe width.
7.2.10 Explain the intensity distribution in interference fringe.
7.2.11 Solve simple problems on fringe width and path difference.
7.3.1 Define diffraction.
7.3.2 Define Fresenel diffraction and Fraunhoffer diffraction.
7.3.3 Differentiate Fresenel diffraction and Fraunhoffer diffraction.
7.3.4 Explain Huygen’s principle related to wavefront.
7.3.5 Explain diffraction with white light.
7.3.6 Differentiate between interference and diffraction.
7.3.7 Explain the concept of resolving power of an optical instrument.
7.3.8 Explain Rayleigh’s criteria on resolving power.
7.3.9 Define limit of resolution and resolving power of a microscope.
in terms of wave length.
7.3.10 Define resolving power of a Telescope.
7.3.11 Write the formula for resolving power of Telescope interms of wavelength.
7.3.12 Solve simple problems.
7.4.1 Define Polarisation.
7.4.2 Describe an experiment to demonstrate the transverse nature of light.
7.4.3 Represent unpolarised and polarized light geometrically.
7.4.4 Define plane of vibration.
7.4.5 Define plane of polarization,..
7.4.6 Explain the method of polarization by reflection.
7.4.7 State Brewster’s law. Define Brewster’s angle.
7.4.8 Obtain equation for refractive index interms of Brewster’s angle.
7.4.9 Explain the method of polarization by refraction.
7.4.10 Explain the method of polarization by double refraction.
7.4.11 Explain polaroids.
7.4.12 List the use of polaroids.
Unit No.08 MODERN PHYSICS 09 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

8.1 To understand the emission of electrons.

8.2 To know the scattering of light.
8.3 To understand Lasers.
8.4 To understand radio-activity.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

8.1.1 Explain thermionic emission.

8.1.2 Explain photoelectric emission.
8.1.3 Explain Field emission.
8.1.4 Explain secondary emission.
8.1.5 Define photoelectric effect.
8.1.6 Describe an experiment to study photoelectric effect. Explain experimental results.
8.1.7 State four laws of photoelectric emission.
8.1.8 Write photoelectric equation.
8.1.9 Explain the quantities involved in it.
8.1.10 Explain photo emissive cell.
8.1.11 Explain photovoltaic cell.
8.1.12 Explain photoconductive cell.
8.1.13 List the applications of photoelectric cells.
8.1.14 Explain the principle of electrons microscope.
8.1.15 Explain the method of focusing by magnetic lens.
8.1.16 Explain the construction and working.
8.1.17 List the uses of electron microscope.
8.1.18 Explain the working of Atomic Focus Microscope.
8.1.19 Write the advantages of Atomic Focus Microscope.
8.2.1 Explain coherent scattering.
8.2.2 Explain incoherent scattering.
8.2.3 Explain the blue colour of the sky and blue colour of water.
8.2.4 Explain the red colour of sun during sunrise and sunset.
8.2.5 Explain the white colour of cloud.
8.2.6 Explain Raman Effect.
8.2.7 Write the applications of Raman Effect
8.3.1 Define laser .
8.3.2 Explain Induced absorption.
8.3.3 Explain spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
8.3.4 State the principle of Laser.
8.3.5 Explain population inversion and optical pumping.
8.3.6 List the properties of laser.
8.3.7 Write the applications of laser.
8.4.1 Explain radioactivity with examples.
8.4.2 Describe an experiment to demonstrate three types of radiations.
8.4.3 Write the properties of alpha,beta and gamma rays.
8.4.4 List the agricultural ,medical, biological and geological applications of lasers.
Unit No.09 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 08 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

9.1 To understand pollution, its harm full effects and preventive measures.
9.2 To comprehend water pollution, its harm full effects and preventive measures.
9.3 To understand different types of corrosion and preventive measures.
9.4 To comprehend pH of solution , pH scale and applications of pH.
.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

9.1.1 Define pollution.

9.1.2 List air pollutants.
9.1.3 Write the harmful effects of air pollution.
9.1.4 Explain acid rain and its effects.
9.1.5 Explain green house effect.
9.1.6 Explain global warming.
9.1.7 List the effects of global warming.
9.1.8 Explain ozone layer and its importance.
9.1.9 List the cause of depletion of ozone layer(without any equation).
9.1.10 List the effects of ozone layer.
9.1.11 Discuss the control of air pollution.
9.2.1 Explain water pollution,
9.2.2 Discuss the causes of water pollution.(sewerage, effluents, algae, micro-organisms).
9.2.3 Explain methods of control of sewage problems and disposals.
9.3.1 Define corrosion.
9.3.2 Explain the causes of corrosion.
9.3.3 Describe different types of corrosion.(i)electrochemical theory of corrosion.
(ii) Formation of galvanic cells.(iii)concentration cells
9.3.4 Explain the preventive measures of corrosion.
i. by alloying ii. by surface coating iii. by galvanizing iv. by electroplating
v. by anodizing vi. by cathodic protection.

9.4.1 Explain water as a weak electrolyte.

9.4.2 Explain nature of solution on the basis of (H+) ion and (OH¯) ion concentrations.
9.4.3 Explain ionic product of pure water.
9.4.4 Define neutral, basic and acidic solutions.
9.4.5 Define pH of a solution.
9.4.6 Define neutral basic and acidic solution by using pH.
9.4.7 Give the pH values some solutions
9.4.8 Write the applications of pH solution.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Applied Science –By W.R. Neelakanta , Sapna Publications

2. Applied Science –By N N Banavasi, S Chand Publications
3. First PUC and Second PUC Physics Text Books – by different authors..
4. Text book of physical chemistry by P.L.Soni publisher S.Chand and Co.
 5. Essentials of physical chemistry by B.S.Bhal and G.B.Tuli,
6. Text bookof physical chemistry by K.K.Sharma and L.K.Sharma, Vikas publication house.
7. Applied Science for polytechnics- by different authors.

APPLIED SCIENCE

TABLE OF SPECIFICATION FOR QUESTION PAPER SETTING

Unit No No Hrs in No of Total No of Total

curriculum subdivisions marks to subdivisions marks
of 5 marks be of 5 marks to be set
each to be answered to be set
answered
Section 01 06
A 02 06 05 25 07 35
03 06
Section 04 10
B 05 05 07 35 11 55
06 12
07 12
Section
08 09 08 40 12 60
C
09 08
Total 20 100 30 150

BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION- KARNATAKA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APPLIED SCIENCE
Time:3Hrs Max Marks:100

Note: 1) Answer any 05 subdivisions from Section A, any 07 sub divisions

from Section B and any 08 subdivisions from Section C
2) Each subdivision carries 5 marks.

Section A (Answer any 05 subdivisions)

1. a) What is meant by Least count of a measuring instrument
Write dimensions of density
Write the S.I. unit of a acceleration 2+2+1

b) State and prove the law of conservation of momentum 2+3

 c) State Newton’s Second law of motion.
A body of mass 2kg is moving with a velocity of 2m/s. If its velocity changes to
5m/s in 10 seconds on application of a constant force, calculate the acceleration of
the body & Impulse on it. 2+3

2. a) Write a neat diagram of screw gauge & name its parts 3+2

b) State the law of parallelogram of vectors.

Obtain an expression for the magnitude of the resultant of two
Vectors acting at a point. 2+3

3. a) Describe an experiment to verify Lami’s theorem 5

b) Define Moment of a force.

Three forces 3kgwt, 7kgwt & 15kgwt, acting at a point are in equilibrium.
Calculate the angle between first two forces. 2+3

Section B (Answer any 07 subdivisions)

4. a) Define stress.
Differentiate between plasticity and elasticity with examples. 2+3

b) Define Young’s Modulus

Write 3 applications of capillarity 2+3
c) Describe an experiment to determine surface tension of water by
capillary rise method 5

5. a) Distinguish between specific heat of a substance & heat capacity of a body.

Write two applications of convection. 2+3

b) Define surface tension and angle of contact.

Write 3 applications of viscosity. 2+3

c) Derive PV = mRT with usual notations 5

6. a) Define SHM
Obtain an expression for the velocity of a vibrating body executing SHM 2 + 3

b) Describe an experiment to determine velocity of sound in air at room temperature,

using Resonance Air Column apparatus. 5

c) What is resonance?
Write 3 practical examples of resonance. 2+3

7. a) Describe an experiment to determine the frequency of the tuning fork

using sonometer by comparison method. 5
 b) The frequency of a sonometer wire is doubled when the tension is increased
by 12 kgwt. Calculate the original tension of the wire. 5

Section C (Answer any 08 subdivisions)

8. a) What is interference of light?

Write three differences between Interference & diffraction. 2+3
b) Obtain an expression for the path difference in Young’s double slit experiment.
5
c) In a double slit experiment light of wave length 5500 Å is used. Find the
path difference & phase difference for the fourth dark fringe from the
centre of the pattern. 5

9. a) State Brewster’s law.

Obtain an expression for the refractive index of a material in terms of
Brewster’s angle. 2+3

b) What is polarization?
Explain the method of polarization by refraction 2+3

c) What is photoelectric emission?

Write any three experimental results on the study of photoelectric effect.
2+3

10. a) Explain the focusing the magnetic lens in an Electron microscope

Write 3 uses of Electron microscope. 2+3

b) What is Raman effect.

Explain stimulated emission in Laser. 2+3

c) What is radio activity?

Describe an experiment to demonstrate 3 types of radiations. 2+3

11. a) What is an acid rain? Write 3 harmful effects of it. 2+3

b) What are the causes of water pollution?

Explain any one method of controlling sewage problem. 2+3

c) How does a “ Concentration cell” work?

Write three applications of PH. 2+3

0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0
 GOVERNMENT OF KARNATAKA
BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATIONS
Second SemesterDiploma
APPLIED SCIENCE LAB (COMMON TO ALL COURSES) SUBJECT CODE:

Group A
Experiment No Aim of the experiment
01 To determine the volume of the given solid cylinder using Slide calipers
02 To determine the volume of the given Hollow cylinder using Slide calipers
03 To determine the thickness of the glass and metal plate using Screw gauge
04 To determine the volume of thin wire using Screw gauge & sample wire
05 To determine the volume of small rigid ball using Screw gauge
06 To verify the law of Parallelogram of vectors
07 To verify the converse of law of triangle of vectors
08 To verify the Lami’s theorem
09 To verify two conditions of equilibrium of coplanar parallel forces
Group B
10 To determine Young’s Modulus of the material of the wire using Searle’s App
11 To determine Surface Tension of water by capillary rise method
To determine the frequency of the given tuning fork using sonometer by
12
comparison method
To determine the frequency of the given tuning fork using sonometer by
13
absolute method
To determine velocity of sound in air at room temperature & at 0°C a by
14
Resonance Air Column method
15 To determine coefficient of Viscosity of water by Poisulle’s method

Most Important instructions to examiners

i) While setting two experiments in the examination for each candidate, one experiment
should be chosen from group A and another must be from group B
ii) While setting two experiments, large number of combinations to be made covering
most of the experiments
iii) The scheme of valuation given below must be strictly followed.
 Scheme of valuation

Record 05 Marks
Oral 15 Marks
Planning ( Includes observation, Tabular column, Formula) 20 Marks ( 10 marks x 2 expt)
Conducting ( Includes skill in arrangement, handling of app, 40 Marks ( 20 marks x 2 expt)
& readings)
Calculation and result 20 Marks ( 10 marks x 2 expt)
Total 100 Marks
 BE lab

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Computer Science & Engineering/IS&E
First Semester
Subject: Basic Electronics Lab

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: No. of Hrs

On completion of the lab course, the student will be able to 96
1 Comprehend the art of Soldering
2 Understand the behavioral characteristics of passive components

GRADED EXERCISES:

SECTION -- A
STUDY EXERCISES
Note: In Study Exercises the student should become familiar with specification of equipments & components
& should draw a neat diagram of the control panel of equipment & actual appearance in case of
components.Symbols should also be indicated wherever applicable
1 Familiarization and precautionary measures to be taken while using the 6
following Equipments --
Analog mulltimeter
Digital Multimeter
Regulated power supply
LCR Meter
Ammeters voltmeter and Galvanometer
2 Identification of components ----- Passive and Active components with Symbol 6
3 Colour code--- Calculation of Resistance & capacitance value 6
by colour code method
4 Measurement of Resistance & Capacitance value by 6
colour codes
5 Soldering Practice 6
Tool, Bending of Wires, Soldering of Passive and Active components
6 Testing of Passive Components 6
7 Familiarization, Study and Application of following Hardware materials and symbol 6
FUSES --- Rewirable, cartridge,High rupturing capacity Fuse,
KEYS--- Rectangular Buttons,Spring loaded,Mechanical , Electronic feather touch
PLUGS AND SOCKETS--- 2 pin, 3 pin, Multiple, round type
CONNECTORS : IC and relay connector, PCB connector,BNC, threaded neutral
modular
TERMINALS ---Different sizes
CABLES --- twistedpair,co-axial cable, optical cable
CLIPS --- Crocodile , Banana
Crimping tools
9 Study the block diagram of UPS & SMPS & state their merits and demrites 6
48
Part B
Conduction Exercises:
11 Verification of Ohm's law, 3
12 Verification of Kirchoff's Current law for D.C Circuits 3
13 Verification of Kirchoff's Voltage law for D.C Circuits 3
14 Characteristics of junction diode (Forward & Reverse Bias) 6
15 Characteristics of Zener diode (Forward & Reverse bias) 6
16 Inverting amplifier using OP-AMP 3
17 Non-inverting amplifier using OP-AM 3
Half wave - construction, calculation of ripple factor with and without pie
18 filter 6
Full wave bridge rectifier - construction, calculation of ripple factor with and
19 without pie filter 9

48
Total 96

SCHEME OF VALUATION
1 Record 5
2 Part A - Study Excersise 25
Part B - Write up any One Experiment (Circuit Diagram, Tabular column,
3 Formula ) 20
3 Construction using soldering and Conduction of Experiment 20
4 Result 10
5 Viva-Voce 20
Total 100

Page 1 of 1
 Government of Karnataka
Department of Technical Education
Board of Technical Examination

Basic Computer Skills Lab

(Common to all Branches)

Section – I : Computer Basics & Internet Basics

1. Identify and understand the models of Computers.

2. Identify and understand front panel switches and back panel connections of a
Computer system.
3. Identify and understand the physical components of computer.
4. Study and understand the operating system overview.
5. Conduct computer system connection and understand the booting process.
6. Study and understand the file system overview.
7. Study and understand the Basic Dos Commands.
8. Study and understand the windows operating system Basics.
9. Exposure to windows operating system.
10. Practice windows explorer – through My computer Icon & shortcut entry.
11. Practice Creating/Opening, Editing and saving the document using Notepad.
12. Study and understand the clipboard concept for Copy, Cut and Paste
operation.
13. Study and understand the Windows utilities – word pad, paint, calculator..
14. Study and understand the windows system tools – Scandisk, Backup, System
Info, WinZip.
15. Practice browsing of different sites using search engine.
16. practice and understand different E-Mail services – Outlook, Yahoo mail,
rediffmail etc
17. Practice Creating E-Mail accounts, Sending, Receiving & Storing of mails.
18. Study and understand the BARAHA Software.

Section – II : Word Processing & Presentation

Using Word Processor, write a procedure & execute the following.

19. Create a Business or Personal Letter.

20. Create a Company Letterhead.
21. Create a Simple Newsletter.
22. Create a Memo.
23. Create a Resume or Curriculum Vitae.
24. Create an Invitation/Greeting card.
25. Create the cover page of a Project Report.
26. Create a mail merged letter/invitation.
27. Create a Macro which inserts a picture and formats the text.
Presentation
28. Using presentation tool, Create a simple Presentation to list simple Dos
Commands, Hardware, Software etc.
 Section III

Using Spreadsheet, write a procedure & execute the following.

29. Create a worksheet with 4 columns. Enter 10 records and find the sum of all
columns.
30. Create a report containing the pay details of the employees.
31. Create a results sheet containing Candidate's Register No., Name, Marks
for all subjects, Total and results Total and result must be calculated as below:
Result is Distinction if Total >= 70 %
First Class if Total > = 60 % and < 70 %
Second Class if Total >= 50 % and < 60 %
Pass if Total >= 35 % and < 50 %
provided the candidate has secured atleast 35 marks in each
subject. Fail otherwise
32. Create a Simple Bar Chart to highlight the sales of a company for 3 different
periods.
33. Create a Pie Chart for a sample data and give legends.
34. Create a worksheet importing data from database and calculate sum of all the
columns.
35. Create a Macro which creates a Line Chart using the data in the worksheet

Database

Using Database, write a procedure & execute the following.

36. Create a simple table for result processing.

37. Create a query table for the result processing table.
38. Create a form to update/Modify the result processing table contents,
39. Design a report to print the result sheet and Marks card for the result
processing table.

Note : Open source softwares (OSS) such as Open office Org, Star office etc may
be use. Other softwares like MS-office, Lotus smart suite etc. may also be used.

SCHEME OF VALUATION

SI.NO Content Max.

Marks
1 Lab Record 05
2 Answer one question from Computer Basics & Internet 10
3 Writing steps on any two (one each from Section – II, III) 15
4 Executing of two exercises 40
5 Result /Printout 10
6 Viva voce 20
Total 100

Reference Books:

1. Basic Computer Skills By Dr. M A Jayaram & D S Rajendra Prasad.

Sapna Publications

2. A Computer Laboratory referral for Diploma & Engineering students

BY: T R Jagadish et.al- Universities Press
 Department of Technical Education, Karnataka

Diploma in Computer Science and Engineering / Information Science &

Engineering
Second Semester
Subject: C Programming Lab
Contact Hrs / Week: 6 Contact Hrs / Semester: 96

General Objectives :
After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to
- Analyse the given problem
- Think the logic to solve the given problem
- Know the various data types, operators and expressions in C
- Know the various control structures in C
- Understand Arrays, Strings, Structures and Unions in C
- Write programs to solve the given problem in C
- Write structured programs using functions

Graded Exersises

1 WAP to swap the values of two variables without using third variable
WAP to find the largest/smallest of 3 numbers (using conditional
2
operator)
3 WAP to calculate the total interset based on the following
principal amount (Rs) rate of interset
>=10000 20%
>=8000 && <=9999 18%
<8000 16%
4 WAP to find whether the given character is vowel or not (Use Switch)

5 WAP to calculate the roots of a quadratic equation(consider all

possible cases) ( Using Nested If and Switch)
6 WAP to sum & reverse a given integer
7 WAP to check whether the given number is prime or not
WAP to find the number of and sum of all integers greater than 100
8
and less than 200 that are divisible by 7.
9 WAP to detect the Armstrong numbers in three digitss from 100 to 999.

note:- if sum of the digits of the number is equal to number itself, then the
number is called armstrong number
10 WAP to evaluate sine series
11 WAP to generate fibanocci series
12 WAP to convert binary to decimal & vice versa
13 WAP to calculate factorial of a given number using function
14 WAP to find GCD of two numbers using function
15 WAP to find sum and count of positive and negative numbers in an array
16 WAP to search for a given number in an array
17 WAP to find the transponse of a given matrix
18 WAP to addition two matrices
19 WAP to mulitply two matrices
20 WAP to sort a list of names
21 WAP to check whether the given
Page 1 ofstring
3 is palindrome or not
22 WAP to create a structure with employee details and display the same
WAP to process student structure containing roll number, class and age as
members. The program must read 5 student record in an array of structure
23
and display the details of a student who is eldest. Use a function to find the
eldest for which array of structure is an argument.
WAP to count the number of constants, vowels, digits, white space &
24
special characters in a given sentence.
25 WAP to demonstrate # define function.

Scheme of evaluation
1. Record 05
2. Writing two programs 30
3. Entering one program 10
4. Executing one program 25
5. Print out with results 10
6. Viva voce 20
Total 100 marks

Reference Books:

1. Programming in C - E.Balaguruswamy
2. C Programming -Dr. M A Jayarama & D S Rajendra Prasad, Sapna
Publications
3. Programming in C - Yashavant Kanetkar
4. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C --- Ashok N. Kamthane
5. The Spirit of 'C' - MULLISH COOPER
6. Basics of Computers and Applications with C programming - Rajesh
Hongal

Page 2 of 3
Page 3 of 3
 Model Question paper: 2009-10

Second semester Diploma Examination - (CS & IS)

Programming with C (Theory)

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100

Note: Answer three full questions from each section.

Section – I
1. A Fill in the blanks: 1*5=5
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)

B. Write a short on features of C. 5

Section – II

2. Define the following. 2*5 = 10

a) Keyword b) variable c) constant d) Identifier e) data
3. a) Mention the significance of modulo operator. 2
b) Evaluate the expression 2+4/2*8-2 3
c) Write a note on ternary operator. 5
4. a) Compare while & do-while control structure. 4
b) Write the syntax of a switch statement 2
c) Differentiate between Break and continue. 4
5. Write a C program to check the type of a triangle using if – else 10

Section - III
6. a) Discuss the one dimensional array with an example 5
b) Explain different operation on array 5
7. Write a C program to compute multiplication of two matrices. 10
8. Explain initialization of one & two dimensional array with example 10
9. a) Write a note on declaration & initialization of strings 4
b) Explain Strcmp, Strcat & Strlen with example 6
 Section IV
10. a) Write the block structure of the function 4
b) Explain passing arguments as value to function with an example 6
11. Write a C program to find factorial of a given number Using function. 10
12. a) Write a structure definition for the following 5
Item number, Item Name, Item Cost
b) How Structures are initialized? Explain 5
13. a) Define Pre-processor 2
b) Write a program using #define to computer area of circle. 8
 Model Paper
I Semester Diploma Examination
Concepts of Electrical and Electronics Engineering
(Course code: 9CS & 9IS)
Time :3Hours Max Marks:100
Note: i)Section -I is compulsory
ii)Answer any six full questions choosing two questions each from
sections-II,III and IV

Section I
1) a)Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/words. 5X1=5
i)The insulating material used in a capacitor is called .............................
ii)Temperature sensitive resistor is called .............................
iii)Power factor of a pure resistive circuit is .........................
iv)Transformer works on the principle of................................
v)In a color coded carbon resistor the gold band represents ....................tolerance.

b)Define oscillator? Mention the types of oscillator. 5

Section II
2)a)Derive an equation to find the equivalent resistance when three resistors 3
are connected in series.
b) State ohm's law and mention the limitations of ohm's law. Applications of ohms law. 5
c) A resistance of 1KΏ is connected in series with a parallel combination of 100Ώ 4
and 500Ώ.The total combination is connected across 100V supply.Find the effective resistance and
the total current in the circuit.
d)Define electric charge,electric field,permitivity. 3

3)a)State and explain coulombs law. 4

b)Mention the factors on which capacitor depends.Explain briefly charging and
discharging of capacitor. 5
c)Derive the expression for dynamically induced emf. 6
4)a)Define the terms 3X2=6
1)Average value
2)RMS value
3)Form factor
b)State fardays laws. 4
c)Briefly explain types of reactance. 5

Section-III
5) a)Define turns ratio,current and voltage ratio. 3
b)Difference between shell type and core type. 3
c)Explain auto transformer. 5
d)Derive emf equation of a transformer. 4
6) a)Briefly explain plate earthing. 3
b)Explain briefly cartridge fuse. 3
c)Explain construsction of brushless motor. 6
d)Define resistor.Mention the types of resistor. 3
7) a)Explain briefly wire wound resistor. 3
b)Give application of fixed resistor and variable resistor. 6
c)Briefly explain mica capacitor. 3
d)Mention the types of switches. 3
Section IV

8) a) Explain working operation of bridge rectifier 5

b)Briefly explain V-I characteristics of Zener diode 4
c)Explain how transistor acts as a amplifier 4
d)Define multivibrator, comparator 2
9.a)Explain block diagram of linear power Supply 5
b)Define emission ? Explain secondary emission 4
c) Explain block diagram of offline UPS. Mention the merits and demerits. 6
10) a)Write a note on heat sink. 4
b)Mention the merits and demerits of SMPS. 3
c)Give characteristics of op-amp and draw its symbol 4
d)Explain non-inverting amplifier. 4
 BEEE(cs)

Diploma in Computer Science and Engineering

First Semester
Subject: Concepts of Electrical and Electronincs Engineering
Contact Hrs / Week: 4 Contact hrs / Semester: 64

Contents

SECTION I
Electrical Engineering
1 ELECTRIC CURRENT AND CIRCUITS (DC)
1.1 Current, voltage and Resistance --- Definition, unit & how they are measured
1.2 Ohm's law - limitations
1.3 Kirchoff's voltage and current laws.
1.4 Series and Parallel combination of circuits. Practical examples of these circuits
1.5 Power, energy, units and their relation, how they are measured.

2 ELECTROSTATICS
2.1 Electric charge, field,permitivity
2.2 Coulomb's law
2.3 Capacitance --- series and parallel combination
2.4 Meaning of charging and discharging of capacitors

3 ELECTRO MAGNETIC INDUCTION

3.1 Faraday's laws and Lenz's law
3.2 Self and mutual induction and emf

4 AC FUNDAMENTALS
4.1 Definition of sine wave. Equation of AC sine wave. Comparision with DC
4.2 Average value, maximum value, RMS value and form factor for sine wave
4.3 Types of reactances
4.4 Current and voltage in R,RL,RC and RLC circuits
4.5 define power factor
4.6 What is single phase & 3 phase, phase, phase difference and phase angle.
SECTION II
5 TRANSFORMERS
5.1 Principle of operation of transformer
5.2 Turn ration, current and voltage ratios.
5.3 Losses in transformer
5.4 Types of transformers, core and shell type, step-up and step-down.
5.5 Transformers for SMPS.

6 PROTECTION OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS

6.1 Fuses
6.2 Grounding
6.3 Protecting computer system against power transients

7 MOTORS
7.1 Stepper motor, spindle motor in disk drive
7.2 Servometers
7.3 Brushless DC motors
SECTION III

Page 1 of 5
 BEEE(cs)

8 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
8.1 Brief idea like- types,symbols,specifications,general idea of construction,characteristics
and applications of Resistors,capacitors,inductors,relays,switches,cables and connectors

9 BASICS OF ELECTRONICS
9.1 Conductors,semiconductors and insulators
9.3 What is electron emission? Types.
9.4 Semi- conductor- Intrinisic and Extrinsic (P and N type)
9.5 PN junction as semi conductor diode
9.6 Applications as half wave, full wave and bridge rectifiers
9.7 What are filters? Types of filters
9.8 Zener diode characteristics and applications as voltage regulator
9.9 PNP and NPN bipolar transistor -- Principle & working, basic transistor modes,
applications of transistor as switch and amplifier
9.10 Defination, Classification and applications of (no constuction details required)
Multivibrator, Oscillator, Comparator
9.11 Power Supplies -
9.10.1 Block diagram description of Linear power supplu unit
9.10.2 Block diagram description of SMPS, Merits & demrits
9.10.3 Need for UPS, Block diagram decription of online & offline UPS, Merits & demrits
9.10.4 Need for heat sinks

10 OP-AMP
10.1 Block diagram - characteristics
10.2 Inverting and non- inverting operational amplifiers
10.3 Summing amplifier
10.4 Integator and Differentiator

Table of Specifications :

SECTION TOPIC HOURS MARKS

I 1. Electric currents and circuits 5 12
2. Electro statics 4 12
3. Electro magnetic induction 4 12
4. AC fundamentals 4 12
II 5. Transformers 4 12
6. Protection of electric and electronic ckts. 3 6
7. Motors 2 6
III 8. Electronic Components 8 20
9. Basic Electronics 22 50
10. OP-AMP 4 8

Tests and Assignment 4

TOTAL 64 150

Text Books:
1. Concepts of Electrical and Electronics Engineering By K Shashidhar ,Sapna Publications

Page 2 of 5
 BEEE(cs)

Reference Books :
1. Electrical Techology - Thereja
2. Electronic Components - K Padmanabhan
3. Electronic Components - D V Prasad
4. Principles of Electronics - V K Mehta
5. Electronic Principles - Malvino

Page 3 of 5
BEEE(cs)

Page 4 of 5
 BEEE(cs)

n,characteristics
s and connectors

dhar ,Sapna Publications

Page 5 of 5
 Diploma in Computer Science and Engineering / Information Science Engg
Second Semester
Subject: 'C' Programming
Contact Hrs / Week: 4 Contact Hrs / Semester: 64

CURRICULUM

SL Topics Hours Marks

Section - I

1 Introduction to 'C' Language 12 30

2 Condition and Loops 12 30

Section - II
3 Arrays 12 30

4 Strings 4 10
Section - III
5 Structures & Unions 8 20

6 Functions 8 20

7 Preprocessor 4 10

Tests & Assignment 4

Total 64 150

CONTENTS

Topics Content Periods

1 Introduction to 'C' Language 12
1.01 Character set, Variable and Identifiers, Built-in Data Types, Variable
Definition, Declaration, C Key Words-Rules & Guidelines for Naming
Variables.
1.02 Arithmetic operators and Expressions, Constants and Literals, Precedence
and Order of Evaluation.
1.03 Simple assignment statement, Basic input/output statement.
1.04 Simple 'C' programs.
2 Condition and Loops 12
2.01 Decision making within a Program.
2.02 Conditions, Relational Operators, Logical Operator.
2.03 if statement, if-else statement.
2.04 Break, Continue, Switch, Goto and Labels.
2.05 Loop statements.
3 Arrays 12
What is an Array?, Declaring an Array, Initializing an Array. One
dimensional arrays: Array manipulation;Finding the largest/smallest
element in array; Searching & Sorting of element from an array;
Decalring & Initilisation of Two dimensional arrays, Addition/Multiplication
of two matrices, Transpose of a square matrix; Null terminated strings as
array of characters.
4 Strings 4
Introduciton, Declaring & Initialising string variables, Reading & writing
strings from variables, Arithmetic operations & chracters, Putting strings
together, Comparision of two strings, String handling functions
5
Structures & Unions 8
Basic of Structures, Structures variables, initialization, structure
assignment, nested structure, structures and arrays: arrays of
structures,Unions, Size of structures, Bit fields
6 Functions 8
Definition of Functions, Standard Library of C functions, Prototype of a
function: Formal parameter list, Return Type, Function call, Block
structure, Passing arguments to a Function: call by value, arrays as
function arguments, Structure and functions
7 Pre-Processors 4

Introduction, Macro substituion, File inclusion

Text Book:
1 Programming with ANSI-C, Fourth Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill. E. Balaguruswami

C Programming By Dr. M A Jayarama & D S Rajendra Prasad,Sapna

2 Publications
Reference Books
SL Title/Publisher Author
1 Programming with C, Second Edition, Tata Mcgrawhill, 2000. Byron Gottfried
Programming with ANSI & Turbo C, First Edition, 2002, Pearson
3 A. Kamthane
Education.
4 Basics of Computers and Applications with C programming. Rajesh Hongal

11 Let us C, BPB Publication, New Delhi. Yashwant Kanetkar

General Objectives
- Comprehend the different operators.
- Understand the basic input/output statements.
- Understand the control structures.
- Understand the arrays concept.
- Solve simple problems using arrays.
- Know the user defined functions.
- Design a function to solve a problem.
Understand the structure and union concept.
Appairse different string functions
Understand Preprocessor statement

Specific Objectives
- List the character set.
- Define the following
keyword, variable, constants.
- Describe the built-in data types.
- List the variables naming rules.
- Explain the arithmetic, relational, logical operators and expression.
- Discuss the precedence and order of evaluation.
- Describe the simple assignment & Basic input/output statements.
- Write simple C programs.
- List different types of control structures.
- Describe if, if-else, switch conditional statements.
- Explain for, while, do-while loop control structure.
- Define break, continue, goto, labels.
- Define array, string.
- Classify array.
- Discuss insertion, deletion, sorting, searching operations on single
dimensional array.
- Explain addition, subtraction, multiplication, transpose operations on matrices.
- Define function.
- Describe function prototyping.
- List built in functions.
- Define formal, actual parameters.
- Describe block structure.
Explain call-by-value
Describe basics of structure & Unions
Restate structure variables, initialization, assignment.
Explain nested structures, structure & functions, structure & arrays.
Explain C Preprocessing statements
 Intro. to Comp. Sc.

Department of TechnicaL Education

Diploma in Computer Science and Engineering / Information Science and Engineering
I Semester
Subject: I 01 Introduction to Computer Concepts
Contact Hrs / Week: 4 Contact Hrs / Semester: 64

Contents

SECTION I
1 Introduction to Computers
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Characteristics of Computer
1.3 Evolution of Computers
1.3.1 Some early Computers
1.4 Generation of Computers
1.4.1 First Generation(1940-56):Vaccum Tubes
1.4.2 Second Generation(1956-63): Transistors
1.4.3 Third Generation(1964-Early 1970s): Integrated Circuits
1.4.4 Fourth Generation(Early 1970c -Till date): Microprocessors
1.4.5 Fifth Generation(Present and Beyond): Artificial Intelligence
1.5 Classification of Computers
1.5.1 Classification according to purpoose
1.5.2 Classification according to Type of Data-Handled Techniques
1.5.3 Classification accroding to Functionality
1.6 The Computer System
1.6.1 Central Processing Unit(CPU)
1.6.2 Input, Output annd Storage Units
1.7 Applications of Computers

2 Number Systems
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Number Systems
2.2.1 Non-Positional number System
2.2.2 Positional number System
2.2.3 Base (or Radix) of System
2.2.4 computer and numbers
2.2.5 decimal number System
2.2.6 binary number System
2.2.7 octal number System
2.2.8 hexadecimal number System
2.3 binary coding
2.3.1 BCD
2.3.2 ASCII
2.3.3 EBCDIC

3 Primary Memory
3.1 Introduction
3.1.1 Memory Representaion
3.2 Memory Heirarchy
3.2.1 Storage Evaluation criteria
3.3 Random Access Memory(RAM) (Basis Concept only)
3.3.1 Types of RAM (Basics of SRAM & DRAM)
3.4 Read Only Memory(ROM) (Basic Concepts only)
3.4.1 Types of ROM (Basics)

Page 1 of 10
 Intro. to Comp. Sc.

SECTION II
4 Secondary Storage
4.1 Introduction
4.1.1 Benefits of Secondary Storage
4.2 Classification of Secondary Storage
4.3 Mgnetic Tape
4.3.1 Magnetic Tape Organization
4.3.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Magnetic tapes
4.4 Magnetic Disk
4.4.1 Storage organization of a Magnetic Disk
4.4.2 Storage capacity of Magnetic Disk
4.4.3 Accessing Data from a magnetic disk
4.4.4 Types of Magnetic Disks(Flopy Disk, Hard Disk and Zip Disk)
4.4.5 Advantages and Disadvantages of Magnetic Disks
4.5 Optical Disk
4.5.1 Storage organization of optical disk
4.5.2 Storage capacity of Optical Disk
4.5.3 Types of Optical disk(CD-ROM and DVD)
4.5.4 Advantages and Disadvantage of Optical Disk

5 Input Devices
5.1 Introduction
5.1.1 Importance of Input Devics
5.1.2 Types of Input Devices
5.1.3 Keyboard
5.1.4 Mouse
5.1.5 Track Ball
5.1.6 Joy Stick
5.1.7 Light Pen
5.1.8 Touch Screen
5.1.9 Digital Camara
5.1.10 Scanners(handheld and Flatbed Scanners)
5.1.11 Optical Scanners(OCR,OMR,MICR,barcode Reader)

SECTION III
6 Output Devices
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Classification of Output
6.2.1 Hard copy Versus Soft copy
6.3 Hard copy output Devies
6.4 Printers
6.4.1 Impact Rpinters (Dot Matrix,Daisy Wheel)
6.4.2 Non-Impact Printer(Inkjet and Laser Printers)
6.5 Plotters
6.5.1 Types of Plotters(Drum and Flatbelt Plotters)
6.6 Soft copy Output devices
6.7 Monitors
6.7.1 CRT
6.8 Audio Output
6.9 Terminals

7 Computer Program
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Developing a Program
7.2.1 Program Development Cycle

Page 2 of 10
 Intro. to Comp. Sc.

7.3 Algorithm
7.3.1 Examples on Algorithms (Wide coverage)
7.4 Flowchart
7.4.1 Importance of Flowchart
7.4.2 Flowchart Symbols
7.4.3 Guidelines for Preparinng Flowcharts
7.4.4 Flowchart structures
7.4.5 Limitations of Flowcharts
7.4.6 Examples on flow charts (wide coverage)
7.5 Pseudocode(P-code)
7.5.1 Why Pseuducode?
7.5.2 Pseuducode Structure
7.5.3 Pseuducode Guidelines
7.6 Program Testing and Debugging(syntax and Logical Errors)
7.7 Characteristics of good Program

SECTION IV
8 Computer Languages & Software
8.1 Introduction to Computer Languages
8.2 Evolution of Programming Languages
8.3 Classification & Generation of Programming Languages
8.4 Features of a Good Programming languages
8.5 Selection of a Programming Languages
8.6 Introduction
8.7 Software Definition
8.8 Relationship between software and Hardware
8.9 Software Categories
8.10 system software
8.10.1 System Management Programs
8.10.2 System Development Programs
8.11 Application Software
8.12 Software Terminology

SECTION V
9 Basics of Computer Networks & Internet
9.1 Introduction
9.2 LAN,MAN,WAN
9.3 Network Topologies(bus,ring,star,tree,mesh)
9.4 Introduction to Internet
9.5 Evolution
9.6 Internet organization and commities
9.7 Basic Internet Terms
9.8 Getting Connected to Internet
9.8.1 Types of Internet Connection
9.8.2 Internet Software
9.9 Internet Applications
9.10 E-mail
9.11 How E-mail works
9.12 Searching the web(search Engines)
9.13 Internet and viruses

10 Multimedia
10.1 Introdution
10.2 Multimedia:definition

Page 3 of 10
 Intro. to Comp. Sc.

10.3 Building bloks of multimedia

10.4 Multimedia system
10.5 Multimedia Application
10.6 Virtual Reality

Text Books
1. Introduction to Computer Concepts By Niranjan A ,Sapna Publications
2. Introduction to Computer Science - ITL Education Solutions Ltd, Pearson Education.

Reference Books :
2. Introduction to Computers - By Peter Norton's 4th Edition Tata McGraw Hill
3. Fundamentals of Computers - V Rajaram
Online Resources:
www.pearsoned.co.in/ITLEducationSolutionsLimited
www.howstuffworks.com

Table of Specifications :

SECTION TOPIC HRS ALLOTED

I 1. Introduction to Computers 04
2. Number Systems 04
3. Primary Memory 04
II 4. Secondary Strorage 06
5. Input Devices 06
III 6. Output Devices 06
7. Computer Program 06
IV 8. Computer Languages & Software 12
V 9. Basics of Computer Networks & Internet 08
10. Multimedia 04

Tests and Assignment 04

TOTAL 64

Page 4 of 10
 Intro. to Comp. Sc.

General Objectives :
After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to
- Know the basic structure of a computer
- Appreciate the working of a computer
- Understand the Number Systems
- Understand the concepts and functions of I/O Units and Computer memory
- Know the basic structure of Computer Programs
- Appreciate the features of programming langauges
- Know the concepts of computer networks, Internet & Multimedia

Specific Objectives :
After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to
- Explain the working of a computer
- Analyse how problems can be solved using computers
- List the characteristics and applications of computers
- List the advantaqges and disadvantages of using computers
- Describe how character, integers and fractions are represented in computers
- Explain the working of various I/O devices
- Distinguish various types of memories
- Explain how data are stored in various memories
- Explain devloping a program using Algorithms & Flow Charts
- Learn basic concepts of program testing & debugging
- Categorize Programming languages
- Appraise features of good programming languages
- Distinguish between hardware & software
- Categorise softwares
- Learn the basic of Computer netwroks & toplogies
- Summarize the basic concept of Internet & Applications
- Appraise working of E-mail & web searching
- Discuss the building blocks of Multimedia system
- Appraise the Multimedia Applications

Page 5 of 10
Intro. to Comp. Sc.

Page 6 of 10
Intro. to Comp. Sc.

Page 7 of 10
Intro. to Comp. Sc.

Page 8 of 10
 Intro. to Comp. Sc.

td, Pearson Education.

a McGraw Hill

Marks

10
10
10
15
15
15
15
30
20
10

150

Page 9 of 10
 Intro. to Comp. Sc.

d be able to

mputer memory

d be able to

nted in computers

Page 10 of 10
 Code: I-03
Model Question paper: 2009-10

Second semester Diploma Examination - (CS & IS)

Introduction to Computer Concepts (Theory)

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100

Note: Answer any three full questions from each section.

Section – I
1. A. Fill in the blanks 1*5=5
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
B. What is joystick? How s it different from trackball? 5

Section –II

2. Draw a block diagram to illustrate the basic organization of a computer

system and explain the functions of various units of computer system. 10
3. a) What is a radix of a system? 2
b) Explain various types of number system 8
4. a) Explain different types of ROM 6
b) Compare static with Dynamic RAM 4
5. Explain the working of Magnetic tape. What are its advantages &
Disadvantages. 10
Section – III
6. Write a short note on CD-ROM & DVD 10
7. Define the following : 2 * 5 = 10
i) OCR ii) OMR iii) MICR iv)ASCII v)Scanner.
8. a) Write a short note on Impact & Non – Impact Printers 10
b) Write a flow chart to compute a factorial of a given number 10
9. With a neat block diagram, Explain the working principle of CRT. 10
10. a) Write a short note on Pseudo code 5
b) what are the characteristics of a good program. 5
 Section - IV
11. a) What are the advantages of HLL over MLL 4
b) Explain different types of software 6
12. a) Compare Compiler with Interpreter 5
b)What factors should be considered for selecting a good programming
language. 5
13. Define the following 5*2 = 10
a) Linker b) Loader c) Assembler d) Debugger e)Algorithm
14. a) Compare LAN V/s MAN 4
b) Define the following i) Internet ii) Search Engine iii) www 6
15. Describe building blocks of Multimedia system 10
 BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION – KARNATAKA
SUBJECT: APPLIED MATHEMATICS – I
For I- semester
DIPLOMA COURSES OF ALL BRANCHES

Contact hour per week: 04 Contact hour per Semester: 64

UNIT NO. CHAPTER TITLE CONTACT
HR.

ALGEBRA
1 DETERMINANTS 2
2 MATRICES 4
3 BINOMIAL THEOREM 3
4 LOGARITHMS 2
5 VECTOR ALGEBRA 6
TRIGONOMETRY
6 UNITS AND MEASUREMENT OF AN ANGLE 3
7 TRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS OF ACUTE 6
ANGLE AND STANDARD ANGLES
8 TRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS OF ALLIED 4
ANGLES
9 HEIGHTS AND DISTANCES 2
10 COMPOUND ANGLES 4
11 MULTIPLE AND SUB MULTIPLE ANGLE 2
12 TRANSFORMATION FORMULAE 4
13 PROPERTIES AND SOLUTIONS OF 4
TRIANGLES
14 INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 2
ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY
15 BASIC CONCEPTS OF ANALYTICAL 6
GEOMETRY
16 STRAIGHT LINES 6
17 TESTS AND ASSIGNMENTS 4
TOTAL HOUR 64

REFFERENCE BOOKS:
1.Applied Mathematics -I By W.R Neelakanta Sapna Publications.
2. Applied Mathematics -I By Dr. D S Prakash S Chand Publications
3. Text book of mathematics for P U C
QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT
FOR APPLIED MATHEMATICS – I

Questions Questions Questions Questions

UNIT NO.

HOUR

to be set to be set to be set to be set

(2 Marks) (5 Marks) (5 Marks) (5 Marks)
PART- A PART- B PART- C PART- D
1 2 1 1 - -
2 4 1 2 - -
3 3 1 1 - -
4 2 - 1 - -
5 6 2 3 - -
6 3 - - 1 -
7 6 1 - 2 -
8 4 1 - 2 -
9 2 - - 1 -
10 4 1 - 1 -
11 2 1 - 1 -
12 4 1 - 1 -
13 4 1 - 2 -
14 2 1 - 1 -
15 6 1 - - 2
16 6 2 - - 2
TOT 64 15 8 12 04
AL
Questions to 10 5 8 3
be answered

APPLIED – MATHEMATICS – I
Marks No. of Questions No. of Questions
to be set to be Answered

Part A 2 X 10 = 20 15 10
Part B 5 X 05 = 25 08 05
Part C 5 X 08 = 40 12 08
Part D 5 X 03 = 15 04 03

Total = 100

CONTENTS OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS – I

ALGEBRA
UNIT – 1: DETERMINANTS. 2 Hr.

Definition, Order, Expansion of 2nd & 3rd order Determinants by means of

examples. Problems on finding unknown quantity in a 2 nd & 3rd determinant using using
expansion. Solving simultaneous linear equations by determinant method ( Cramer’s
rule). Problems.

UNIT – 2: MATRICES. 4 Hr.

Determinant value of a square matrix. Singular and non singular matrices with
examples. Minor and co factor of an element of a matrix. Adjoint of a matrix. Problems.
Characteristics equations of a square matrix and its roots. Problems. Cayley – Hamilton’s
theorem (statement only). Problems. Find inverse of a matrix using the theorem.

UNIT – 3: BINOMIAL THEOREM. 3 Hr.

Meaning of nCr and its value. Binomial theorem for (x + a) n, where n ia a positive
integer. Expansion. Finding constant term, co-efficient of xn , particular term and middle
term(s). Problems.

UNIT – 4: LOGARITHEMS. 2 Hr.

Defination of common and natural logarithems. Laws of logarithems. Problems

on laws.

UNIT – 5: VECTOR ALGEBRA. 6 Hr.

Defination of vector. Representation of a vector as a directed line segment.

Magnitude of a vector. Types of vectors. Position vector. Vector can be expressed in
terms of end points of position vector. Addition and subtraction of vector in terms of line
segment. Vector in a plane and vector in a space in terms of unit vector i, j and k
respectively. Product of vectors. Scalar and vector product. Geometrical meaning of
scalar and vector product. Applications of dot(scalar) and cross(vector) product:
Projection of a vector on another vector. Area of parallelogram and area of triangle. Work
done by a force and moment of force
 TRIGONOMETRY
UNIT – 6: UNITS AND MEASUREMENT OF AN ANGLE 3 Hr

Defination of an angle. Systems of unit of an angle. Defination of radian. Radian

is a constant angle. Relation between degree & radian and problems. Derivation of l = rθ
& A = ½ r2θ. Problems.

UNIT –7: TRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS OF AN ACUTE ANGLE. 6 Hr

Defination of Trigonometric ratios in terms of sides of a triangle for an acute

angle. Proof of Trigonometric identities. Trigonometric ratios of standard angles: The
numerical value of trigonometric ratios of standard angles like 0 0, 300, 450, 600 and 900.
Problems.

UNIT – 8: ALLIED ANGLES. 4 Hr.

Angle of any magnitude, sign of the trigonometric ratios. Meaning of allied

angles. Trigonometric ratios of allied angles in terms of θ. Problems. Complimentary
angles and relation between trigonometric ratios of complimentary angles. Problems.

UNIT – 9: HEIGHTS AND DISTANCES. 2 Hr.

Defination of angle of elevation and depression. Problems.

UNIT -10: COMPOUND ANGLES. 3 Hr.

Geometrical proof of Sin( A + B) and Cos(A + B). Find Tan( A + B) using

Sin( A + B) and Cos(A + B). Write the formulae for Sin( A - B), Cos(A - B) and tan( A -
B). Problems.

UNIT -11: MULTIPLE ANGLES. 3 Hr.

Derive ratios of multiple angles of 2A and 3A. Problems. Obtain sub multiple
angle formulae. Problems.

UNIT-12: TRANSFORMATION FORMULAE. 4 Hr.

Express sum or difference of Sine and Cosine of an angles in to product form.

Express product of Sine and Cosine of angles in to sum or difference form. Problems.
UNIT-13: PROPERTIES AND SOLUTION OF TRIANGLES. 4 Hr.

The relation between sides of a triangle and Sines, Cosines and Tangents of any
angle(Sine rule, Cosine rule and Tangent rule), Projection rule. Half angle formulae in
terms of sides of a triangle. Problems. Problems on solution of triangles (four types).

UNIT- 14: INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS. 2 Hr.

Defination. Principle values of inverse trigonometric functions. Derivation of

results like sin-1x + cos-1x =Л/2 =tan-1x + cot-1x = cosec-1x + sec-1x, tan-1x + tan-1y = tan-1
Problems.

ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY

UNIT-15: BASIC CONCEPTS OF ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY. 6 Hr.

Defination of a point in a plane, Specification of a point using co-ordinate system.

Points on X-axis and Y-axis. Derivation of distance formula. Problems. Section formulae.
Derivation of co-ordinate of a point which divide the line internally in the given ratio( No
derivation for external division). Mid point formula. Problems. Centroid, area of a
triangle and collinear points. Problems. Locus of a point with respect to a fixed point and
with respect to two fixed points and its equations. Problems.

UNIT-16: STRAIGHT LINES. 6 Hr.

Inclination of a line with horizontal line and its slope. Intercept of a straight line.
Slope of a line parallel to X-axis and Y-axis. Derivation of conditions for two lines to be
parallel and perpendicular. Problems. Derivations equations of straight lines y = mx + c,
y – y1 = m (x – x1 ), y – y1 = (y2 – y1 / x2 – x1 ) (x – x1 ), (x / a ) + (y / b) = 1 and
x cosα + y sinα = P. General equation of a line ax +by + c = 0 and problems. Equation of
lines through a point and parallel or perpendicular to a given line. Problems. Angle
between two lines. Problems. Point of intersection of lines. Equation of a line through the
point of intersection which is parallel or perpendicular to the given line. Problems.

*******************
 GENERAL AND SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES
ALGEBRA

UNIT – 1: DETERMINANTS. 2 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

1.1 To understand meaning of determinants and evaluation of 2 nd & 3rd order

determinants.
1.2 To understand the solution of linear equations by Cramer’s rule.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

1.1.1 Definition of Determinant by means of Algebraic Expression and order in terms of

Rows and Columns.
1.1.2 Evaluate Determinants of 2nd & 3rd order --- Problems.
1.1.3 Solve the problems to find unknown quantity in a determinant.
1.2.1 Solve the linear equations of 2 nd or 3 rd unknowns using determinants. Problems

UNIT – 2: MATRICES. 4 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

2.1 To understand Minors and co-cofactors, adjoint and inverse of a matrix.

2.2 To know the characteristic equation for 2 x 2 matrix.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

2.1.1 Define singular and non singular square matrix.

2.1.2 Find the minors and cofactors of each elements of matrix
2.1.3 Define adjoint of a square matrix.--- Problems.
2.1.4 Define inverse of a square matrix --- Problems.
2.2.1 Explain characteristic equation of a 2 x 2 matrix and its roots --- Problems.
2.2.2 State Cayley – Hamilton’s theorem for 2nd order (Statement only) --- Problems.
2.2.3 Apply it to find inverse of the matrix --- Problems.

UNIT – 3: BINOMIAL THEOREM. 3 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.
3.1 To recognise the meaning of nCr & to compute the values nC0, nCn, nC1, nC2….. Cr
3.2 To prove nCr = nCn-r by demonstration.
3.3 To know the statement of (x+a) n for positive integral Index n.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

3.1.1 Meaning of nC r and value of nCr .

3.2.1 Use of nCr in the expansion (x + a)n , where n is positive integer.
3.3.1 Expansion of (x + a)n , where n is positive integer. (only statement).
3.3.2 Solve the problems of the following types
(a) expansion of type (2x +y)6 , (√3 +2)4, (x2 – 1/√x )8
(b) To simplify (√2 +1)5 + (√2 -1)5
(c) To find middle term(s)
(d). To find the coefficient of xn and constant terms in (x+a)n

UNIT – 4: LOGARITHMS 2 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

4.1 To understand logarithm, common logarithm and natural logarithm.

4.2 To comprehend laws of logarithem.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

4.1.1 Define logarithm,common logarithm and natural logarithm.

4.2.1 Derive the laws of logarithm
(a) loga mn = loga m + loga n
(b) loga m/n = loga m - loga n
(c) loga xk = k loga x
(d) loga b = logc b / logc a (CHANGE OF BASE)
4.2.2 Solve problems on laws of logarithms

UNIT – 5: VECTOR ALGEBRA 6 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

5.1 To understand vectors.

5.2 To understand vector operations.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

5.1.1 Define a vector and represent a vector geometrically.

5.1.2 Name a directed line segment as a vector.
5.1.3 Write different types of vectors.
5.1.4 Write addition and subtraction of vectors in terms of the segment.
5.1.5 Explain the position vector of a point with reference to a point.
5.1.6 Write the conclusion of difference of two vectors with same initial point as position
vector of a point.
5.1.7 Define vector in a plane and vector in a space in terms of unit vectors
i, j and k respectively.
5.2.1 Write types of vector product (a)Scalar product (b)Vector product
5.2.2 Define scalar product and vector product.
5.2.3 Interpret product of vectors geometrically.
5.2.4 Design the product of vectors to find angle between them and unit vector
5.2.5 Apply product of vectors to find ( i.) projection of a vector on another vector
(ii) Area of triangle and parallelogram (iii) work done by a Force (application of
scalar product) (iv) moment of a force (application of vector product)

TRIGONOMETRY
UNIT – 6: UNIT AND MEASUREMENT OF ANGLE 3 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

6.1 To understand the concept of angle, unit and its measurement.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

6.1.1 Define an angle.

6.1.2 Define a right angle in different systems.
6.1.3 Define radian.
6.1.4 Obtain relations between radian and degree.
6.1.5 Solve problems.
6.1.6 Prove the radian as a constant angle.
6.1.7 Derive l = rө
6.1.8 Derive area of sector = (r2ө ) /2.
6.1.9 Solve related problems.

UNIT – 7: TRIGNOMETRIC RATIOS 4 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

7.1 To understand trigonometric ratios.

7.2 To comprehend trigonometric ratios of standard angles.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

7.1.1 Define trigonometric ratios for an acute angle.

7.1.2 Derive important formulae (identities)
7.1.3 Solve problems using identities.
7.1.4 Obtain trigonometric ratios of standard angles 0°, 30° , 45° , 60°,90°
7.1.5 Solve problems using standard values.

UNIT – 8: ALLIED ANGLES 4 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

8.1 To understand allied angles of the type ( nπ/2 ± ө).

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

8.1.1 Define positive and negative angles.

8.1.2 Give examples to differentiate positive and negative angles.
8.1.3 Explain trigonometric ratios in different quadrants and assign signs.
8.1.4 Define allied angles in different quadrants.
8.1.5 Write formulae of 90± Ө, 180± Ө, 270± Ө, 360± Ө and (-Ө)
8.1.6 Solve problems on allied angles.

UNIT - 9: HEIGHTS AND DISTANCES 2 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

9.1 To understand the measurement of Heights and Distances using

trigonometry.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

9.1.1 Define angle of elevation and angle of depression.

9.1.2 Define the “Height” and “Distance”
9.1.3 Solve problems on height and distance.

UNIT – 10: COMPOUND ANGLES 3 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

10.1 To understand compound angles.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

10.1.1 Define a compound angle.

10.1.2 Give examples for compound angles.
10.1.3 Derive the formula of sin(A+B) and cos(A+B) geometrically.
10.1.4 Obtain tan(A+B) interms of tanA and tanB using sin(A+B) and
cos(A+B).
10.1.5 Obtain formula for sin(A-B) ,cos(A-B) and tan(A-B).
10.1.6 Solve the problems on compound angles.

UNIT – 11: MULTIPLE AND SUBMULTIPLE ANGLES. 3 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

11.1 To understand multiple and sub multiple angles.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

11.1.1 Define multiple and submultiple angle with example.

11.1.2 Derive the formulae for trigonometric ratios of 2A and 3A
using compound angle formulae.
11.1.3 Deduce half angle formulae from the ratio of 2A formulae.
11.1.4 Solve problems.

UNIT – 12: TRANSFORMATION FORMULAE 4 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

12.1 To understand transformation formulae.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

12.1.1 Obtain expressions for sinC ± sinD and cosC ± cosD interms of Product of
trigonometric ratios.
12.1.2 Derive expressions for sinAcosB, cosAsinB, cosAcosB and
sinAsinB interms of the sum and difference of trigonometric ratios.
12.1.3 Solve problems.

UNIT – 13: PROPERTIES AND SOLUTIONS OF TRIANGLES 4Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

13.1 To understand the properties of triangles in order to solve them.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

13.1.1 Obtain sine rule ,cosine rule and tangent rule for any angle of a triangle.
13.1.2 Write half angle formulae interms of sides of a triangle (no proof).
13.1.3 Solve simple problems on above rules.
13.1.4 Find the solution of a a triangle in the following cases when (i) all sides are given
(ii)two sides and included angle is given (iii) two angles and one side is
given.(iv)two sides and non included angle is given.

UNIT – 14: INVERSE TRIGNOMETRIC FUNCTIONS. 2 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

14.1 To understand inverse trigonometric functions.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

14.1.1 Define inverse trigonometric function.

14.1.2 Write principal values of trigonometric functions.
14.1.3 Prove standard results like
1. sinˉ1 x + cos– 1 x = tan–1x + cot–1x = cosec–1x + sec–1x = π/2,

x y
2. tan -1 x ± tan -1 y = tan -1  
 1  xy 
14.1.4 Solve the problems on inverse functions.

ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY
UNIT – 15: BASIC CONCEPTS OF POINT AND LOCUS 6 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

15.1 To understand the basic concepts of point and locus.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

15.1.1 Define coordinates in two dimensional space.

15.1.2 Define a point in terms of coordinates.
15.1.3 Obtain equation for the distance between two points in terms of co ordinates.
15.1.4 Solve problems on above formula.
15.1.5 Explain the section of a straight line.
15.1.6 Derive section formula for internal division.
15.1.7 Write section formula for external division.
15.1.8 Write formula for mid point of a line.
15.1.9 Solve problems on internal and external division.
15.1.10 Define locus of a point.
15.1.11 Solve problems on locus of a point.
UNIT – 16: STRAIGHT LINES 6 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

16.1 To understand straight lines.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

16.1.1 Define angle of inclination.

16.1.2 Define slope of a straight line.
16.1.3 Define x and y intercepts for straight line.
 m  m1 
16.1.4 Write tan    2 
 1  m2 m1 
 m  m1 
16.1.5 Write angle between two straight lines in terms of tan    2 
 1  m 2 1 
m
16.1.6 Write the conditions for two lines to be parallel and to be perpendicular to each
other.
16.1.7 Solve problems.
16.1.8 Derive the slope-intercept form of an equation of a straight line y = mx + c
16.1.9 Obtain the point – slope form equation to the straight line y  y1  m( x  x1 )
y  y1
16.1.10 Obtain two point form of the equation to a straight line y  y1  2 ( x  x1 )
x2  x1
x y
16.1.11 Obtain intercepts form of the equation to a straight line,   1
a b
16.1.12 Derive the normal form of equation to a straight line,xcos α + ysin α = p
16.1.13 Write the general form of equation to a straight line, ax +by+c=0
16.1.14 Solve problems on different forms of equation.
16.1.15 Solve problems to find an equation of a straight line passing through the given
point and parallel to the given line.
16.1.16 Solve problems to find an equation of a straight line passing through the given
point and perpendicular to the given line.
16.1.17 Solve problems to find an equation of straight line passing through the
intersection of given lines.
16.1.18 Obtain the condition for the intersection of three lines express in general in the
determinant form.
16.1.19 Solve the problems on the above condition.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. First and Second PUC mathematics Text Books of different authors.
2. Text Book of mathematics –I for polytechnic-by different authors
3. Text Book of mathematics-II for polytechnic- by different authors
*******************************************************
BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION – KARANATAKA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER Code:

APPLED MATHEMATICS –I ( FOR ALL COURSES)

Time: 3 Hrs Max.m marks:100
NOTE: i) Answer any 10 questions in section A, 5 questions in section B
8 questions in section C, & 3 questions in D
ii) Each question carries 2 marks in section A
ii) Each question carries 5 marks in remaining section

SECTION – A
1 2 3
1. Find x if 4 5 x  0
7 8 9

1  2 
2. If A =   , Find A. adj(A)
3 5 

 3 8
3. Find the 5th term in  x  
 x
   
4. If a = 2i + 3 j – 2 k and b = i + 2k, find a . b
 
5. If p = i + J -2k, Find unit vector in the direction of p

6. If sinθ + cosecθ = ½ , find sin2θ + cosec2θ

7. If sec θ = cosec3θ, find θ.

8. Find the value of tan15° without using table or calculator.

 sin 
9. Show that tan =
2 1  cos 
 cos17  sin17
10. Show that  tan 28
cos17  sin17

A (s  b) ( s  c)
11. Show that tan 
2 s( s  a)

12. Show that cos1 ( x)    cos1 x

13. Find the locus of a point which moves at a equal distances from the axis

14. Find the inclination and Y-intercept of the line √3x + y = 3

15. Find the angle between the lines who’s slopes are √3 and 1/√3

SECTION – B

1. Solve the following equations by cramer’s rule

2x + y = 1, y + 2z = 7 and 3z – 2x =11
1 2 5
2. Find the inverse of the matrix A = 0  1 3 
3 1 2 
2  1 
3. Verify Caylay-Hamilton Theorem for the matrix A = 
1 5
15
 3a 
4. Find the co-efficient of x 18
in  x 2  
 x 
1 1 1
5. If loga (bc) = x , logb (ac) = y and logc(a b) = z. Show that   1
1  x 1  y 1 z
6. Find the sin of the angle between the vectors ( 3,2,-1) and ( 2,-1,4)
7. If the position vectors of A, B,C are respectively i + 2j + 3k, 2i + 5j – k and –i + j +2k,
find the area of triangle ABC
8. Find the projection of vector 2i + 3j + 2k on 4i + 5j + 3k

SECTION – C
1. Circular wheel is rotating at the rate of 450 r.p.m. If the radius of the wheel 70cm, find
the distance covered by a point on the rim in 1 second.
tan   sec  1 1  sin 
2 Prove that 
tan   sec  1 cos 

sin  1  cos 
3. Show that   2cos ec
1  cos  sin
4. Show that sin420°cos390° + cos(- 300°) sin(- 330°) = 1

cos(   )sec( ) tan(   )
5. Simplify 2

sec(2   )sin(   ) cot(   )
2
6. The angles of elevation of the top of a tower from the base and top of building are
60° and 45°. The building is 20m high. Find the height of the tower.
sin( A  B)
7. Prove that  =0
sin A sin B
cos 3 A  sin 3 A
8. Prove that = 1 + sin2A
cos A  sin A
sin A  sin 3 A  sin 5 A  sin 7 A
9.Prove that = tan4A
cos A  cos3 A  cos5 A  cos 7 A
cos 2 A cos 2 B 1 1
10.In a triangle ABC show that   2 2
a2 b2 a b
11. Solve the triangle ABC if a = 2 , C = √3 – 1 , B = 120°
1 1 1 
12. Prove that 2 tan 1  tan 1  2 tan 1 
8 7 5 4

SECTION – D

1. Find the point on the x-axis which is equidistant form the points (7,6) and (–3,4)
2. Find the co-ordinates of the point of trisection of the median AB of the triangle ABC
whose vertices are A(– 2, 2 ) ,B (– 1, –3 ) and C (5,7)
3. Find the equation of the line passing through (– 2, 6 ) and the sum of intercepts on the
co-ordinate axes is 5.
4. Find the equation of the line perpendicular to 3x – 2y + 1 = 0 and passes through(1,–2).

0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0
 Department of Technical Education, Karnataka

Diploma in Computer Science and Engineering / Information Science &

Engineering
Second Semester
Subject: C Programming Lab
Contact Hrs / Week: 6 Contact Hrs / Semester: 96

General Objectives :
After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to
- Analyse the given problem
- Think the logic to solve the given problem
- Know the various data types, operators and expressions in C
- Know the various control structures in C
- Understand Arrays, Strings, Structures and Unions in C
- Write programs to solve the given problem in C
- Write structured programs using functions

Graded Exersises

1 WAP to swap the values of two variables without using third variable
WAP to find the largest/smallest of 3 numbers (using conditional
2
operator)
3 WAP to calculate the total interset based on the following
principal amount (Rs) rate of interset
>=10000 20%
>=8000 && <=9999 18%
<8000 16%
4 WAP to find whether the given character is vowel or not (Use Switch)

5 WAP to calculate the roots of a quadratic equation(consider all

possible cases) ( Using Nested If and Switch)
6 WAP to sum & reverse a given integer
7 WAP to check whether the given number is prime or not
WAP to find the number of and sum of all integers greater than 100
8
and less than 200 that are divisible by 7.
9 WAP to detect the Armstrong numbers in three digitss from 100 to 999.

note:- if sum of the digits of the number is equal to number itself, then the
number is called armstrong number
10 WAP to evaluate sine series
11 WAP to generate fibanocci series
12 WAP to convert binary to decimal & vice versa
13 WAP to calculate factorial of a given number using function
14 WAP to find GCD of two numbers using function
15 WAP to find sum and count of positive and negative numbers in an array
16 WAP to search for a given number in an array
17 WAP to find the transponse of a given matrix
18 WAP to addition two matrices
19 WAP to mulitply two matrices
20 WAP to sort a list of names
21 WAP to check whether the given
Page 1 ofstring
3 is palindrome or not
22 WAP to create a structure with employee details and display the same
WAP to process student structure containing roll number, class and age as
members. The program must read 5 student record in an array of structure
23
and display the details of a student who is eldest. Use a function to find the
eldest for which array of structure is an argument.
WAP to count the number of constants, vowels, digits, white space &
24
special characters in a given sentence.
25 WAP to demonstrate # define function.

Scheme of evaluation
1. Record 05
2. Writing two programs 30
3. Entering one program 10
4. Executing one program 25
5. Print out with results 10
6. Viva voce 20
Total 100 marks

Reference Books:

1. Programming in C - E.Balaguruswamy
2. C Programming -Dr. M A Jayarama & D S Rajendra Prasad, Sapna
Publications
3. Programming in C - Yashavant Kanetkar
4. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C --- Ashok N. Kamthane
5. The Spirit of 'C' - MULLISH COOPER
6. Basics of Computers and Applications with C programming - Rajesh
Hongal

Page 2 of 3
Page 3 of 3
 Diploma in Computer Science and Engineering / Information Science Engg
Second Semester
Subject: 'C' Programming
Contact Hrs / Week: 4 Contact Hrs / Semester: 64

CURRICULUM

SL Topics Hours Marks

Section - I

1 Introduction to 'C' Language 12 30

2 Condition and Loops 12 30

Section - II
3 Arrays 12 30

4 Strings 4 10
Section - III
5 Structures & Unions 8 20

6 Functions 8 20

7 Preprocessor 4 10

Tests & Assignment 4

Total 64 150

CONTENTS

Topics Content Periods

1 Introduction to 'C' Language 12
1.01 Character set, Variable and Identifiers, Built-in Data Types, Variable
Definition, Declaration, C Key Words-Rules & Guidelines for Naming
Variables.
1.02 Arithmetic operators and Expressions, Constants and Literals, Precedence
and Order of Evaluation.
1.03 Simple assignment statement, Basic input/output statement.
1.04 Simple 'C' programs.
2 Condition and Loops 12
2.01 Decision making within a Program.
2.02 Conditions, Relational Operators, Logical Operator.
2.03 if statement, if-else statement.
2.04 Break, Continue, Switch, Goto and Labels.
2.05 Loop statements.
3 Arrays 12
What is an Array?, Declaring an Array, Initializing an Array. One
dimensional arrays: Array manipulation;Finding the largest/smallest
element in array; Searching & Sorting of element from an array;
Decalring & Initilisation of Two dimensional arrays, Addition/Multiplication
of two matrices, Transpose of a square matrix; Null terminated strings as
array of characters.
4 Strings 4
Introduciton, Declaring & Initialising string variables, Reading & writing
strings from variables, Arithmetic operations & chracters, Putting strings
together, Comparision of two strings, String handling functions
5
Structures & Unions 8
Basic of Structures, Structures variables, initialization, structure
assignment, nested structure, structures and arrays: arrays of
structures,Unions, Size of structures, Bit fields
6 Functions 8
Definition of Functions, Standard Library of C functions, Prototype of a
function: Formal parameter list, Return Type, Function call, Block
structure, Passing arguments to a Function: call by value, arrays as
function arguments, Structure and functions
7 Pre-Processors 4

Introduction, Macro substituion, File inclusion

Text Book:
1 Programming with ANSI-C, Fourth Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill. E. Balaguruswami

C Programming By Dr. M A Jayarama & D S Rajendra Prasad,Sapna

2 Publications
Reference Books
SL Title/Publisher Author
1 Programming with C, Second Edition, Tata Mcgrawhill, 2000. Byron Gottfried
Programming with ANSI & Turbo C, First Edition, 2002, Pearson
3 A. Kamthane
Education.
4 Basics of Computers and Applications with C programming. Rajesh Hongal

11 Let us C, BPB Publication, New Delhi. Yashwant Kanetkar

General Objectives
- Comprehend the different operators.
- Understand the basic input/output statements.
- Understand the control structures.
- Understand the arrays concept.
- Solve simple problems using arrays.
- Know the user defined functions.
- Design a function to solve a problem.
Understand the structure and union concept.
Appairse different string functions
Understand Preprocessor statement

Specific Objectives
- List the character set.
- Define the following
keyword, variable, constants.
- Describe the built-in data types.
- List the variables naming rules.
- Explain the arithmetic, relational, logical operators and expression.
- Discuss the precedence and order of evaluation.
- Describe the simple assignment & Basic input/output statements.
- Write simple C programs.
- List different types of control structures.
- Describe if, if-else, switch conditional statements.
- Explain for, while, do-while loop control structure.
- Define break, continue, goto, labels.
- Define array, string.
- Classify array.
- Discuss insertion, deletion, sorting, searching operations on single
dimensional array.
- Explain addition, subtraction, multiplication, transpose operations on matrices.
- Define function.
- Describe function prototyping.
- List built in functions.
- Define formal, actual parameters.
- Describe block structure.
Explain call-by-value
Describe basics of structure & Unions
Restate structure variables, initialization, assignment.
Explain nested structures, structure & functions, structure & arrays.
Explain C Preprocessing statements
 DE SPecific Obj

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Programme
FIRST SEMESTER
SUBJECT : DIGITAL ELECTRONICS-1
Common to E&C ,EI&C, CS&E & IS&E
No.of Hrs/Wk : 4 Total No. of Hours/Sem: 64

CONTENT LIST & TIME ALLOCATION

UNIT-1 18 Hrs
Number Systems and Codes 10
Logic Gates 5
Logic Families 3
UNIT-2 18 Hrs
Combinational Logic Circuits 18
UNIT-3 28 Hrs
Boolean Algebra 13
Sequential Logic Circuits 15

TOTAL 64

GENERAL OBJECTIVES
On completion of the course, the student
1 will be able to comprehend the number systems and codes
2 will be familiar with logic gates
3 can realise logic expressions using gates
4 will be able to construct and verify the operation of arithmetic & logic
circuits
5 can understand and appreciate the relevance of combinational circuits
6 will know various logic families
7 will be able to realise various flip-flops using logic gates

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

1 NUMBER SYSTEMS AND CODES

1.1 List different number systems & their relevance: binary, octal,
decimal, hexadecimal
1.2 Study the Conversion from one number system to another
1.3 Perform Arithmetic operations on all number systems
1.4 Represent the Concept of complementay numbers: 1's & 2's
complementary of binary numbers
1.5 Perform Subtraction of binary numbers using complementary
numbers
1.6 Study Codes: definition,relevance,types (BCD, Gray, Excess-3,
ASCII & EBCDIC) and applications
1.7 Examples for the above

2 LOGIC GATES
Page 1 of 4
 DE SPecific Obj

2.1 Illustrate the Difference between analog signals & systems and
digital signals & systems
2.2
Discuss the Types of logics & representation using electric signals
2.3 Know the Definition of gate
2.4 Learn the Basic Logic Gates (NOT, OR, AND, NOR, NAND, EX-OR
& EX-NOR) - symbol,function, expression, truth table .
2.5
Define Universal Gates with examples & realisation of other gates

3 BOOLEAN ALGEBRA
3.1 Understand Boolean: constants, variables & functions
3.2 Comprehend the Laws & Identities of Boolean algebra
3.3 State and prove Demargan's Theorems
3.4 Represent Logic Expression: SOP & POS forms & conversion
3.5 Simplify the Logic Expressions / Functions (Maximum of 4 variables)
: using Boolean algebra and Karnaugh's map methods
3.6 Realisation of simplified logic expressions using gates

4 COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS
4.1 Define a Combinational Circuit and explain with examples
4.2 Arithmetic Circuits (Binary)
a) Realise function,Logical expression, gate Level logic circuit , truth
table & applications of half-adder, half-subtractor, full-adder & full-
subtractor
b)Explain Serial & Parallel adders: concept, comparison &
applications.
c) Working of 2 & 4 bit parallel adders with logic circuit .
d) Construct 2 bit Magnitude Comparator: logic expression, truth
table,gate level circuit .
4.3
Discuss Encoders: definition, relevance, gate level circuit of decimal
to BCD Encoders, Truth table, Definition of Priority Encoder.
4.4 Discuss Decoders: definition, relevance, gate level circuit of BCD to
Decimal Decoders, BCD to Seven Segment Decoder with truth
tables.
4.5 Explain the working of Binary-Decimal: Encoder & Decoder
4.6 Discuss Multiplexers: definition, relevance, gate level circuit and
Truth Tables of 2:1, 4:1, 8:1.Multiplexers.
4.7 Realisation of high order multiplexers using simple multiplexers
4.8 Discuss Demultiplexers: Definition, relevance, gate level circuit and
truth tables of 1:2, 1:4 ,1:8 Demultiplexers .

5 SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS

5.1 Flip-Flops
5.1.1 Define Sequential Circuit: Explain
with examples
5.1.2 Compare Combinational and Sequential Logic Circuits

Page 2 of 4
 DE SPecific Obj

5.1.3 Clock-definition, characteristics, types of triggering & waveform.

5.1.4 Define Flip-flop
5.1.5 Study RS, clocked RS, D, T, JK FF -Race around condition, MS-JK
flip-flops with gatelevel circuit using NAND gates only, logic circuit
and truth table.
5.1.6 Applications of flip-flops.

5.2 SHIFT REGISTERS

5.2.1 Introduction to Registers.
5.2.2 Explain the working of various types of shift registers -
SISO,SIPO,PISO,PIPO with truth table using flip flop
5.2.3 Working of 4 Bit Ring and Johnson Counters with timing diagram and
Truth table.
5.2.4 Applications of shift registers

5.3 COUNTERS
5.3.1 Define Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters - Their
Comparison.
5.3.2 Explain the modulus of a counter
5.3.3 Design of different Modulo counters using decoding gates.
5.3.4 Explain the working of 4 bit ripple counter with truth table and timing
diagram
5.3.5 Define the propagation delay in ripple counter
5.3.6 Explain the Four Bit Synchronous counter with truth table and timing
diagram
5.3.7 List out applications of counters

6 LOGIC FAMILIES
6.1 Introduction, list of various logic families & standard notations
6.2
Explain propagation delay, fan-out, fan-in, power dissipiation,Noise
Margin, Noise Immunity & speed with reference to logic families.
6.3 List and Compare the Features of Standard TTL, CMOS & ECL-
Concept of Saturated and Non Saturated Logic.
6.4 Describe the Interfacing between TTL & CMOS

Text Books
1 Digital Principles & Applications - Floyd
2 Digital Electronics I - By K Shashidhar, Sapna Publications
Digital Electronics Devices Principles & Applications -A.K. Maini (Willey Eastern
3 Publications)

4 Digital Electronics - By A. P. Godse

REFERENCES
1 Digital Principles & Applications - Mavino and Leach
2 Digital Computer Fundamentals- Thomos C Bartee
3 Digital Electronics and Integrated Circuits- R P Jain & M M S Anand
Page 3 of 4
 DE SPecific Obj

4 Digital Systems- Tocci

5 Digital Principles- Morris Mano

Page 4 of 4
 Digital Lab CS&IS

SUBJECT : DIGITAL LAB (CS&IS)

Hrs/Week -- 6 Total No. of Hrs. - 96

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:
On completion the lab course, the student will be able to
1 Familiarize with the use of digital ICs , IC TESTER
2 Understand and comprehend the simple design aspects of digital circuits

LIST OF GRADED EXERCISES

Part A
1 Familiarization of Digital trainer kit, IC tester, Logic pulser, logic probe 6
2 Study of IC Manual and familiarization of Ics and IC families 6
Part B
1 Familiarization of logic gates using Ics 3
a) 7400 b) 7402 c) 7404 d) 7408 e) 7432 f) 7486

2 Realization of NOT, OR, AND, NOR, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates using NAND gate 6
3 Realization of NOT, OR, AND, NOR, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates using NOR gate 6
4 Implementing and verifying Boolean Expression using logic gates 6
5 Verification of DeMorgan's theorem and realization of the given expression using Demorgan's law 6
6 Implementing Half Adder and Full Adder using logic gates 6
7 implementing Half Subtractor and Full Subtractor using logic gates 6
8 Verification of truth table of Flip-Flop 12
i ) Clocked RS FF using NAND Gates
ii) JK FF Using IC 7476
iii) MS-JK FF Using IC 7476
iii) T and D FF
9 Realize Binary to Gray code converter using IC 7486 3
11 Interface 7 segment display with IC 7447 / 7448 decoder . 3
12 Verify the truth table of 1:8 Demultiplexer and 8:1 multiplexer using IC 74138 and 74151 respectively 6
13 Realize and verify the truth table of 4:1 Multiplexer using 2:1 Multiplexer (74157) 3
14 Shift Registers SISO,SIPO, PISO, PIPO using 7495 12
15 Up-down counter using 74190/74191 3
16 Decade counter using 7490 3
96
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS PRACTICE WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
R.P.JAIN AND MMS ANAND

SCHEME OF VALUATION
Note: Pin diagrams of IC's shall be provided to the students .
1 Record 5
2 Write any one Experiments (Circuit Diagram,Truth Table Expression) 30
3 Conduction any one Experiment 30
4 Result 15
5 Viva-Voce 20
Total 100

Page 1 of 1
 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

Sl Ability Knowle Compre Applicat Analysis Total

NO dge hension ion
Content

1 Lessons 5 25 10 40

2 Parts of speech 2 02

3 Countable & Uncountable nouns 2 2

4 Use of some, any etc. 6 6

5 Main & Aux. verbs 2 2

6 Uses of Tenses 8 8

7 Voice 4 4

8 Interrogatives 2 2

9 Negatives 2 2

10 Prepositions 4 4

11 Question tags 2 2

12 Use of adverb too 2 2

13 Use of idioms & phrases 4 4

14 Story from outlines 5 5

15 Developing notes into a paragraph 5 5

16 Comprehension of unseen passage 5 5

17 Summarising 5 5

Total 13 32 40 15 100
 Department of Technical Education
All Diploma Courses in Engineering and Technology Streams
Second Semester
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Contact Hrs./Week: 4 Contact Hrs. / Semester: 64

GOAL: IMPROVEMENT OF ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS OF I OR II SEMESTER

STUDENTS OF DIPLOMA COURSES IN ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY.

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES:

1 READING SKILL
The student is able to :
1.1 Understand the difficult words and phrases in the lesson
1.2 Use the words and phrases correctly in his own sentences
1.3 Read the lesson properly without mistakes
1.4 Read the given passage correctly.

2 WRITING SKILL
The student is able to
2.1 Write the answers correctly to the questions on the lessons
2.2 Write personal letters in the proper format without mistakes
2.3 Use words and phrases in his own sentences
2.4 write grammatically correct sentences.

3 PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF GRAMMAR

The student is able to
3.1 Use verbs correctly
3.2 Use various phrases appropriately
3.3 Use interrogatives and negatives
3.4 Convert active voice into passive and vice versa
3.5 Frame questions, question tags and give short form answers correctly
3.6 Use prepositions appropriately

4 COMPREHENSION
4.1 The student is able to read and understand the seen & unseen passages
and answer the questions given

5 CREATING AWARENESS
5.1 The student becomes aware of current environmental issues and
about his responsibilities toward environment factors.
5.2 Awareness about Right to Information Act
 CONTENT

“ENGLISH COMMUNICATION FOR POLYTECHNICS” By

TEXT NITTTR, Chennai and Published by Orient BlackSwan Pvt
1 BOOK Ltd, Hyderabad.

2 GRAMMAR
2.1 PARTS OF SPEECH
2.2 COUNTABLE, UNCOUNTABLE AND PROPER; NOUNS
2.3 USE OF SOME, ANY, MUCH, MANY, A LOT OF, ETC.,
2.4 MAIN AND AUXILIARY VERBS
2.5 USES OF TENSES
2.6 ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICE
2.7 INTEROGATIVES
2.8 NEGATIVES
2.9 PREPOSITIONS
3.1 QUESTION TAGS
3.2 USE OF ADVERB TOO
3.3 USING PHRASES IN OWN SENTENCES
3 COMPOSITION & COMPREHENSION

3.1 WRITING RESPONSE TO PICTURE

3.2 STORY FROM GIVEN OUTLINES
3.3 EXPANDING OUTLINES INTO PARAGRAPH
3.4 PARAGRAPH WRITING USING HINTS
3.5 COMPREHENSION OF UNSEEN PASSAGE
3.6 NOTE MAKING
3.7 DEVELOPING NOTES INTO PARAGRAPHS
3.8 SUMMERISING

MONTHLY TESTS
READING AND COMPREHENSION EVALUATION
 BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION –
KARNATAKA

SUBJECT: APPLIED MATHEMATICS – II

For II - Semester
DIPLOMA COURSES OF ALL BRANCHES

Contact hour per week: 04 Contact hour per Semester: 64

UNIT NO. CHAPTER TITLE CONTACT
HR.

DIFFERENTIATION CALCULUS
1 LIMITS 6
2 DIFFERENTIATION 16
3 APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIATION 6
INTEGRAL CALCULUS
4 INDEFINITE INTEGRATION 14
5 DEFINITE INTEGRATION 4
6 APPLICATIONS OF DEFINITE INTEGRATION 2
7 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
8 TESTS AND ASSIGNMENTS 4
TOTAL HOUR 64

REFFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Applied Mathematics –II By W.R Neelakanta. Sapna Publications.
2. Applied Mathematics –II By Dr. D S Prakash S Chand Publications
3. Text Books of PUC-2 mathematics.
4. Applied Mathematics –II for Polytechnics- By different Authors.
5. Engineering Mathematics.

Applied Mathematics – II Page 1 of 11

QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT
FOR APPLIED MATHEMATICS – II

Questions Questions Questions Questions

UNIT NO.

to be set (2 to be set (5 to be set (5 to be set (5

HOUR

Marks) Marks) Marks) Marks)

PART- A PART- B PART- C PART- D

1 6 2 2 - -
2 16 4 6 - -
3 6 2 2 - -
4 14 4 - 6 -
5 4 3 - 1 -
6 2 - 1
- -
7 12 - - - 6
TOTA 64 15 10 08 06
L
Questions to 10 07 05 04
be answered

APPLIED – MATHEMATICS – II
Marks No. of Questions No. of Questions
to be set to be Answered

Part A 2 X 10 = 20 15 10

Part B 5 X 07 = 35 10 07
Part C 5 X 05 = 25 08 05
Part D 5 X 04 = 20 06 04

Total = 100

Applied Mathematics – II Page 2 of 11

 Diploma Courses of All Engineering Branches
II Semester
Sub: Applied Mathematics II

CONTENTS

UNIT – 1: LIMITS. 6 Hr.

Variables and Constants. Definition of function. Types of function: Direct and

Inverse functions, Explicit and implicit function, Odd and even functions (Definition
with examples). Concept of x tends to ‘a’. Definition of limit of a function. Problems
on limit of a function by factorization, rationalization when x tend to ‘0’, when x tend
to ‘∞’ and x tend to ‘a’. Derivations of algebraic and trigonometric limits. Problems.
Standard limit (only statement)
a x 1 ex 1
n
 1
4. lim 1  n  n  e
1
1. lim  log e a 2. lim 1 3. lim 1    e
x 0 x x 0 x n 
 n n 0

Simple problems on standard limits.

UNIT – 2: DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 16 Hr.

Definition of increment and increment ratio. Definition of derivative of a

function. Derivatives of functions of xn, sinx, cosx and tanx with respect to ‘x’ from
first principle method. List of standard derivatives. Rules of differentiation: Sum,
product and quotient of functions. Problems on rules. Derivatives of function of a
function (Chain rule). Derivatives of inverse Trigonometric functions, Hyperbolic
functions and inverse of hyperbolic functions, Implicit functions, Parametric
functions. Problems. Logarithmic differentiation. Problems. Successive differentiation
up to second order. Problems.

UNIT – 3: APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIATION. 6 Hr.

Geometrical meaning of derivative. Equation of tangent and normal to the

curve y = f(x) at a given point. Derivative as a rate measure. Definition of increasing
and decreasing function. Maxima and minima of a function.

UNIT – 4: INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 14 Hr.

Definition of Integration. List of standard integrals. Rules of integration (only

statement)
1. kf ( x)dx  k  f ( x)dx. 2.  f(x)  g(x) dx   f(x)dx   g(x)dx

problems. Integration by substitution method. Problems. Integrals of functions

involving a2 + x2 , a2 – x2 and their radicals. Some important integrals of the type

Applied Mathematics – II Page 3 of 11

 dx 1  x dx  x
1.  tan 1    c 2.   sin 1    c with proof.
x a
2 2
a a a2  x2 a

dx  x dx 1 xa
3.  sinh 1    c 4.  2  log   c if x  a  0.
a x a xa
2
a2  x2 2a
dx 1 a  x dx  x
5.  2  log   c if a  x  0. 6.   cosh 1    c
a x a x a
2
2a x a
2 2

dx 1  x
7.   sec 1    c ( 3 to 7 no proof)
x x2  a2 a a

Integrals of the forms:

dx dx px  q px  q
 ax 2  bx  c ,  ax 2  bx  c ,  ax 2  bx  c dx ,  ax 2  bx  c dx. Problems.
Integration by parts. Rule of integration by parts. Problems.
 
Integration of the forms:  e x f(x)  f 1 ( x) dx Problems.

UNIT – 5: DEFINITE INTEGRALS. 4 Hr.

Definition of Definite integral. Theorems on definite integrals. Problems.

 
1 1
Definite integrals of the type  2 dx,  2 dx Problems.
0 1  tan x 0
1  tan x

UNIT – 6: APPLICATIONS OF DEFINITE INTEGRALS. 2 Hr.

Find area, volume and r m s value of a function. Problems.

UNIT – 7: DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. 12 Hr.

Definition, example, order and degree of differential equation with examples.

Formation of differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants up to second
order. Solution of D E of first degree and first order by variable separable method.
Solution of differential equations reducible to variable separable form. Linear
equations and its solution. Solution of differential equations reducible to linear form-
Bernoulli’s form. Homogeneous form and its solution. Solution of differential
equations reducible to homogeneous form. Exact differential equation and its solution.
Solutions of differential equation of a type
2
d y dy
a 2  b  cy  0, where a, b, c are constants. Simple problems.
dx dx

Applied Mathematics – II Page 4 of 11

GENERAL AND SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES
UNIT – 1: LIMITS. 6 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

1.1 To understand variables, constants and functions.

1.2 To know the indeterminant form and evaluation of limit of a given function.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

1.1.1 Explain calculus as calculation of Infinitesimal values.

1.1.2 Define Independent, dependent variable and constants with examples.
1.1.3 Define a function.
1.1.4 List types of functions.
1.1.5 Define 1. Direct and inverse functions 2. Explicit and Implicit function
3.Odd and even function with examples.
1.2.1 Explain the concept of x tends ‘a’.
1.2.2 Define limit of a function.
1.2.3 Solve problems on limit of a function by factorization.
1.2.4 Solve problems on limit of a function by rationalization.
1.2.5 Solve problems on limit of a function when x tends INFINITY.
xn  an
lim  na n 1 for any rational number.
x a x  a
1.2.6 Deduce
sin 
lim  1 where  is in radians
 0 
1.2.7 Solve problems on above results.
1.2.8. Write formula for standard limits(statement only).
 a x 1  e x 1
n
 1
3. lim 1    e  lim 1  n  n
1
1. lim    log e a 2. lim    1
x 0
 x  x 0
 x  n 
 n n 0

1.2.9 Solve simple problems on above results.

UNIT – 2: DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 16 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

2.1 To understand the differentiation of a function in terms of limit of a function.

2.2 To know different methods of differentiation.
2.3 To know the derivatives of higher order up to second order.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

Applied Mathematics – II Page 5 of 11

2.1.1 Define increment and increment ratio.
2.1.2 Define differentiation.
2.1.3 Derive the differential co-efficient (dy/dx).
2.1.4 Derive differentiation of a functions from first principle method xn , Sinx, Cosx
and Tanx with respect to ‘x’.
2.1.5 State derivative of ex and log x.
2.2.1 State rules of differentiation: Derivatives of Sum, Product and quotient of
function.
2.2.2 Solve problems on rules of differentiation.
2.2.3 Obtain the derivatives of function of a function (Chain Rule), Inverse T-
functions, Implicit functions & Parametric functions
2.2.4 Solve problems on above types.
2.2.5 Carry out logarithmic Differentiation
2.2.6 Solve problem of the type xx , ax , x Sin x, x 1/x etc.,
2.3.1 Obtain the second derivative of a function.
2.3.2 Solve problems on Successive differentiation.

UNIT -3: APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIATION. 6Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

3.1 To understand dy/dx as slope of a tangent.

3.2 To illustrate dy / dx as a rate measure.
3.3 To understand maxima and minima of a function.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

3.1.1 Explain geometrical meaning dy / dx as a slope of tangent.

3.1.2 Find equation of tangent and normal to a curve y = f(x) at a given point.
3.1.3 Solve problems on tangent and normals.
3.2.1 Explain derivative as a rate measure.
3.2.2 Obtain velocity and acceleration for a moving body whose equation of motion
is given.
3.2.3 Solve problems on rate measure including variation of area, volume etc.,
3.3.1 Define increasing and decreasing function.
3.3.2 State the condition for maxima and minima of a function, no proof.
3.3.3 Find maximum and minimum values of a function.

UNIT – 4: INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 14 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

4.1 To know integration as converse process of differentiation.

4.2 To understand indefinite integral.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

4.1.1 Define integration as anti derivative.

4.1.2 List of standard integrals.
4.1.3 State rules of Integration.

Applied Mathematics – II Page 6 of 11

4.1.4 Solve the problems on rules of integration.
4.2.1 Explain integration by substitution method.
4.2.2 Solve problems on substitution method.
dx 1 1  x  dx  x
4.2.3 Derive 1. x 2  a 2  a tan  a   c 2.   sin 1    c .
a
a x
2 2

4.2.4 Write
dx  x dx 1 xa
3.  sinh 1    c 4.  2  log   c if x  a  0.
a x a xa
2
a2  x2 2a
dx 1 a  x dx  x
5.  2  log   c if a  x  0. 6.   cosh 1    c
a x a x a
2
2a x2  a2
dx 1  x
7.   sec 1    c ( 3 to 7 no proof)
x x a
2 2 a a

4.2.4 Solve problems on above results.

4.2.5 Write
dx dx px  q px  q
 ax 2  bx  c ,  ax 2  bx  c ,  ax 2  bx  c dx ,  ax 2  bx  c dx.

4.2.5 Solve problems on above results.

4.2.6 Explain the rule integration by parts.
4.2.7 Solve problems of the type x sinx, x 2 Cos x, (ax + b) ex, x sin2x, log x, ex sinx,
x log x etc.,
 
4.2.8 Solve problems of the type  e x f(x)  f 1 ( x) dx

UNIT – 5: DEFINITE INTEGRALS. 4 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

5.1 To understand the concept of definite integral to eliminate constant of

integration.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

5.1.1 State, a b f(x) dx as a definite integral.

5.1.2 State theorems on definite integrals.
5.1.3 Solve the problems of the same type as in indefinite integral using limits of
integration.
 
1 1
5.1.4 Solve definite integrals of the type  2 dx,  2 dx
0 1  tan x 0
1  tan x

UNIT – 6: APPLICATIONS OF DEFINITE INTEGRALS. 2 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

Applied Mathematics – II Page 7 of 11

6.1 To understand definite integral as a tool to find area under the curve, volume
of solid of revolution and r m s value of a function.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

6.1.1 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum (statement).

6.1.2 Write the formulae for finding area, volume and r m s value of a function.
6.1.3 Solve problems on above applications.

UNIT – 7: DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. 12 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

7.1 To understand the concept of differential equation.

7.2 To solve differential equation for unknown functions.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

7.1.1 Define differential equation with examples.

7.1.2 Define Order and Degree of D E with examples.
7.1.3 Formation of D E by eliminating arbitrary constants.
7.2.1 Obtain the solution of D E by variable separable method.
7.2.2 Solve problems on variable separable method.
7.2.3 Obtain the solution of D E by Reducible to variable separable method – Solve
problems.
dy
7.2.4 Obtain the solution of linear D E of the type  Py  Q --solve problems.
dx
7.2.5 Obtain the solution of D E by Reducible to linear form (Bernoulli’s form) –solve
problems.
7.2.6 Obtain the solution of D E by Homogeneous form – solve problems.
7.2.7 Obtain the solution of D E by Reducible to homogeneous form – solve problems
7.2.8 Obtain the solution of Exact D E --- solve problems.
d2y dy
7.2.9 Obtain the solution of D E of the type a 2  b  cy  0, -- Solve simple
dx dx
problems only.

*************************************************

Applied Mathematics – II Page 8 of 11

 BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION – KARANATAKA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Code:

APPLED MATHEMATICS –II ( FOR ALL COURSES)

Time: 3 Hrs
Maximum marks:100

NOTE: i) Answer any 10 questions in section A, 7 questions in section B

5 questions in section C, & 4 questions in D

ii) Each question carries 2 marks in section A

iii) Each question carries 5 marks in remaining section

SECTION – A
sin 2 3x
1. Evaluate lim
x 0 tan 2 4 x

x3  8
2.Evaluate lim
x 2 x 4  16
dy
3. Find if y = 1 –cos4x
dx
dy
4. Find if x2 + y2 = a2
dx
dy
5. Find if x = a sinθ and y = a cosθ
dx
6. Find the slope of a tangent to the curve y = x2+6x – 7 at point ( 1, –2)
7. If s = 4t2 – 4t + 6 then find velocity when t = 2second
8. Evaluate  e x tan e x dx

9. Evaluate  sin 2 x dx

10 Evaluate  cos ec(1  4 x)dx

4
1
11. Evaluate 
0 x
dx


2
12. Evaluate  sin x dx
0

Applied Mathematics – II Page 9 of 11

 
2

 tan
2
13. Evaluate x dx
0

sin x
14. Evaluate  dx
cos 2 x
d (a x )
15. Show that = ax log e a
dx

SECTION – B
sin 
1. Prove geometrically lim
 0 
3sin 2 x  5 x  dy  x
2. Evaluate lim   1  e
x 0 4 x  tan x  dx 
3. Find the derivative of tanx w.r.to x form the first principle
4. If y = ex ( sinx – cosx ), find dy/dx.
2  3sinh x
5. If y = , find dy/dx
3  2 cosh x
6. If xcoy + ysin(x/y) = k find dy/dx.
7. Find dy/dx if x = a(cosθ + θ ) and y = a ( 1 – sinθ )
8. If y = sinx cosx, find dy/dx.
9. Find the equations of tangent and normal to the curve y2 = 9x at ( 1, - 3 )
10. Find the maximum and minimum value of the fuction 2x 3 - 12 x2 + 18x + 5.

SECTION – C

1. Evaluate  sin 3 x dx

dx
2. Evaluate x 2
 6 x  13

x
2
3. Evaluate sin x dx

2x  3
4. Evaluate  8  2 x  x2
dx


2
5. Evaluate  cos3 x dx
0

Applied Mathematics – II Page 10 of 11

 6. Evaluate  x.log x dx
x4
7. Evaluate  x2  1 dx
8. find the area bounded by the curve y = 4x – x2 – 3 and x-axis.

SECTION – D
Solve the following equations;

1.sec2x tany dx + sec2y tanx dy= 0

2. y (1 + x) dx + x (1 + y) dy = 0
3. (y3 – 3x2y ) dx – (x3 – 3xy2 ) dy = 0
4. ( 3y – 7x + 7 ) dx + ( 7y – 3x + 3 ) dy = 0
5. ( 2x + y + 1 ) dx + ( x + 2y + 1 ) dy = 0
 dy 
6. ey   1  e x
 dx 

0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0

Applied Mathematics – II Page 11 of 11

 Department of Technical Education, Karnataka

Diploma in Computer Science and Engineering / Information Science &

Engineering
Second Semester
Subject: Multimedia Lab
Contact Hrs / Week: 6 Contact Hrs / Semester: 96

General Objectives :
After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to
- Know aboute multimedia applications
- Understand multimedia tools
- Comprehend multimedia elements
- understand the picture edit,save option.
- Design animiation projects

Graded Exersises
Using Flash and Photoshop
1 Create an animation to represent the growing moon.
2 Create an animation to indicate a ball bouncing on steps.
3 Simulate Movement of a cloud.
4 Draw the Fan blades as shown in the picture below.
Make the fan to work by giving proper animations.
5 Display the background given (FileName: Tulip.jpg) through your name.
6 Create an animation with the following features.
WELCOME
* Letters should appear one by one
* The fill colour of The text should change to a different colour after
the display of the full word.
7 Simulate a ball hitting another ball.
8 Create an Animated Cursor
Startdrag("ss", true); Mouse.Hide();
9 Design a visiting card containing atleast one graphic and text information.
10 Take a photographic image. Give a title for the image. Put the border.
Write your names. Write the Name of Institution and Place.
11 Prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
Plan your own design.
12 You are given a picture of a flower and associated background (Extract.jpg).
Extract the Flower only from that and organise it on a background.
Select your own background for organisation.
13 You are given a picture (BrightnessContrast.jpg). Adjust the
brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.
14 You are given a picture (position.jpg). Position the picture preferably
on a plain background of a colour of your choice - Positioning includes
rotation and scaling.
15 Remove the arrows and text from the given photographic image
(Filename: photo.jpg).
16 Type a word; apply the following effects. Shadow Emboss
17 Using appropriate tool(s) from the Toolbox, cut the objects from the 3 files
(f1.jpg, f2.jpg & f3.jpg) given to you; organise them in a single file and
apply feather effects.
18 Display the background given (FileName: garden.jpg) through your

Page 1 of 3
 name using Mask.
19 A Picture of two parrots (parrots.jpg) is given to you. Make anyone of
one of the parrots in Black & White.
20 Using Flash change a circle into a squre.

Scheme of evaluation
1. Record 05
2. Writing two procedures 30
3. Executing one problem 35
4. Print out with results 10
5. Viva voce 5 20
Total 100 marks

Reference Books:

1 Ben Long, (2001). Complete Digital Photography, Charles River Media, Inc.,
Hingham, Massachusetts.
2 Bryce Button - Nonlinear Editing (2002). "Storytelling, Aesthetics, & Craft",
California: CMP Books.,
3 Casanova, J.V. & Elias, L.F. (1998), Multimedia Graphics, New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India.
4 Casanova, J.V. & Molina, L. (1998), Multimedia: An introduction, New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India.
5 Casanova, J.V.& Molina, L.(1998), Multimedia Production,
Planning and Delivery, New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.
6 Vaughen, T (2008), Multimedia Making it work, (th ed.) New Delhi
TMH Publishing Company Ltd. Project report on copyright
[http://www.fepproject.org/policyreports.copyright.html]. www.adobe.com
Wikipedia[http://en. wikiped ia. org/wiki/copyright]
www.webdevelopersiournal.com
http://ansel.his.duq.edu http://www.adobe.com

Softwares: Photo Shop, Flash & Adobe Illustrator

Page 2 of 3
Page 3 of 3
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: COMPUTER NETWORKS

Contact Hrs/Week: 4 Contact Hrs/Sem: 64

Table of Contents

Chapter
Contents No. Of Hours Marks
No.
Section-I
1 Introduction 2 5
2 Network Models 3 8
3 Data and Signals 2 5
4 Bandwidth Utilization 2 5
5 Transmission Media 3 8
6 Switching 4 10
Section - II
7 Error Detection and Correction 5 14
8 Data Link Control 2 5
9 Multiple Access 5 14
10 Wired LANs:Ethernet 4 10
Connecting LANs,Backbone Networks
11 4 10
and Virtual LANs
Section - III
12 Network Layer: Logical addressing 4 10
13 Network Layer : Internet Protocol 4 10
Network Layer :Delivery, forwarding
14 2 6
and routing
15 Process to process Delivery : UDP, TCP 4 10
16 Congestion Control 2 5
17 Domain Name System 2 5
Remote Logging, Electronic Mail and
18 2 5
File Transfer
Seminars and guest lectures from
5
industry / institution
Tests 3
Total 64 145
 Detailed contents

1 Introduction
1.1 Data communication
1.1.1 Components
1.1.2 Data representation
1.1.3 Data flow
1.2 Networks
1.2.1 Distributed Processing
1.2.2 Network Criteria
1.2.3 Physical Structures
1.2.4 Network Models
1.2.5 Categories of Networks
1.2.6 Interconnections of Networks : Internetwork
1.3 The Internet
1.3.1 A Brief History
1.3.2 The Internet Today
1.4 Protocols and Standards
1.4.1 Protocols
1.4.2 Standards
1.4.3 Standards Organizations
1.4.4 Internet Standards
2 Network Models
2.1 Layered Tasks
2.1.1 Sender, Receiver and Carrier
2.1.2 Hierarchy
2.2 The OSI Model
2.2.1 Layered Architecture
2.2.2 Peer to Peer Processes
2.2.3 Encapsulation
2.3 Layers in the OSI Model
2.3.1 Physical Layer
2.3.2 Data Link Layer
2.3.3 Network Layer
2.3.4 Transport Layer
2.3.5 Session Layer
2.3.6 Presentation Layer
2.3.7 Application Layer
2.4 TCP/IP Protocol suite
2.4.1 Physical and Data Link Layers
2.4.2 Network Layer
2.4.3 Transport Layer
2.4.4 Application Layer
2.5 Addressing
2.5.1 Physical Addresses
2.5.2 Logical Addresses
2.5.3 Port Addresses
2.5.4 Specific Addresses
3 Data and Signals
3.1 Analog and Digital
 3.1.1 Analog and Digital Data
3.1.2 Analog and Digital Signals
3.1.3 Periodic and Non-Periodic Signals
3.2 Periodic Analog Signals
3.2.1 Sine Wave
3.2.2 Phase
3.2.3 Wavelength
3.2.4 Time and Frequency Domain
3.2.5 Composite Signals
3.2.6 Bandwidth
3.3 Digital Signals
3.3.1 Bit-rate
3.3.2 Bit-length
3.3.3 Digital Signal as a Composite Analog Signal
3.3.4 Transmission of Digital Signals
3.4 Performance
3.4.1 Bandwidth
3.4.2 Throughput
3.4.3 Latency
3.4.4 Bandwidth Delay Product
3.4.5 Jitter
4 Bandwidth Utilization
4.1 Multiplexing
4.1.1 Frequency Division Multiplexing
4.1.2 Wavelength Division Multiplexing
5 Transmission Media
5.1 Guided Media
5.1.1 Twisted Pair Cable
5.1.2 Co-axial Cable
5.1.3 Fibre-Optic Cable
5.2 Unguided Media : Wireless
5.2.1 Radio Waves
5.2.2 Micro Waves
5.2.3 Infrared
6 Switching
6.1 Circuit Switched Networks
6.1.1 Three Phases
6.1.2 Efficiency
6.1.3 Delay
6.2 Datagram Networks
6.2.1 Routing Table
6.2.2 Efficiency
6.2.3 Delay
6.3 Virtual Circuit Networks
6.3.1 Addressing
6.3.2 Three Phases
6.3.3 Efficiency
6.3.4 Delay
7 Error Detection and Error Correction
7.1 Introduction
 7.1.1 Types of Errors
7.1.2 Redundancy
7.1.3 Detection versus Correction
7.1.4 Forward Error Correction versus Retransmission
7.1.5 Coding
7.1.6 Modular Arithmetic
7.2 Block Coding
7.2.1 Error Detection
7.2.2 Error Correction
7.2.3 Hamming Distance
7.2.4 Minimum Hamming Distance
7.3 Cyclic Codes
7.3.1 Cyclic Redundancy Check
7.3.2 Polynomials
7.3.3 Advantages of Cyclic Codes
7.4 Checksum
7.4.1 Idea
7.4.2 One’s Complement
7.4.3 Internet Checksum
8 Data Link Control
8.1 Framing
8.1.1 Fixed Size Framing
8.1.2 Variable Size Framing
8.2 Flow and Error Control
8.2.1 Flow Control
8.2.2 Error Control
8.3 Protocols
9 Multiple Access
9.1 Random Access
9.1.1 Aloha
9.1.2 CSMA
9.1.3 CSMA/CD
9.1.4 CSMA/CA
9.2 Controlled Access
9.2.1 Preservation
9.2.2 Polling
9.2.3 Token Passing
10 Wired LANS : Ethernet
10.1 IEEE Standards
10.1.1 Data Link Layer
10.1.2 Physical Layer
10.2 Standard Ethernet
10.2.1 MAC Sublayer
10.2.2 Physical Layer
10.3 Fast Ethernet
10.3.1 MAC Sublayer
10.3.2 Physical Layer
10.4 Gigabit Ethernet
10.4.1 MAC Sublayer
10.4.2 Physical Layer
 10.4.3 Ten-Gigabit Ethernet
11 Connecting LANs, Backbone networks and Virtual
LANs
11.1 Connecting Devices
11.1.1 Passive Hubs
11.1.2 Repeaters
11.1.3 Active Hubs
11.1.4 Bridges
11.1.5 Two-Layer Switches
11.1.6 Routers
11.1.7 Three-Layer Switches
11.1.8 Gateways
11.2 Backbone Networks
11.2.1 Bus Backbone
11.2.1 Star Backbone
11.2.2 Connecting Remote LANs
11.3 Virtual LANs
11.3.1 Membership
11.3.2 Configuration
11.3.3 Communication between Switches
11.3.4 IEEE Standards
11.3.5 Advantages
12 Network Layer : Logical Addressing
12.1 IPv4 Addresses
12.1.1 Address Space
12.1.2 Notations
12.1.3 Class Full Addressing
12.1.4 Class less Addressing
12.1.5 Network Address Translation
12.2 IPv6 Addresses
12.2.1 Structure
12.2.2 Address Space
13 Network Layer : Internet Protocol
13.1 Internetworking
13.1.1 Need for Network Layer
13.1.2 Internet as a Datagram Network
13.1.3 Internet as a Connectionless Network
13.2 IPv4
13.2.1 Datagram
13.2.2 Fragmentation
13.2.3 Checksum
13.2.4 Options
13.3 IPv6
13.3.1 Advantages
13.3.2 Packet Format
14 Network Layer : Delivery, Forwarding and Routing
14.1 Delivery
14.1.1 Direct versus In-Direct Delivery
14.2 Forwarding
14.2.1 Forwarding Technique
 14.2.2 Forwarding Process
14.2.3 Routing Table
15 Process to Process Delivery : UDP, TCP
15.1 Process to Process Delivery
15.1.1 Client/Server Paradigm
15.1.2 Multiplexing and De-Multiplexing
15.1.3 Connectionless Versus Connection Oriented Service
15.1.4 Reliable Versus Un-Reliable
15.1.5 Three Protocols
15.2 User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
15.2.1 Well Known Ports for UDP
15.2.2 User Datagram
15.2.3 Checksum
15.2.4 UDP Operation
15.2.5 Use of UDP
15.3 TCP
15.3.1 TCP Services
15.3.2 TCP Features
15.3.3 Segment
15.3.4 TCP Connection
15.3.5 Flow Control
15.3.6 Error Control
15.3.7 Congestion Control
16 Congestion Control
16.1 Data Traffic
16.1.1 Traffic Descriptor
16.1.2 Traffic Profiles
16.2 Congestion
16.2.1 Network Performance
16.3 Congestion Control
16.3.1 Open-Loop Congestion Control
16.3.2 Closed-Loop Congestion Control
17 Domain Name System
17.1 Name Space
17.1.1 Flat Name Space
17.1.2 Hierarchical Name Space
17.2 Domain Name Space
17.2.1 Label
17.2.2 Domain Name
17.2.3 Domain
17.3 Distribution of Name Space
17.3.1 Hierarchy of Name Servers
17.3.2 Zone
17.3.3 Route Server
17.3.4 Primary and Secondary Servers
17.4 DNS in the Internet
17.4.1 Generic Domains
17.4.2 Country Domains
17.4.3 Inverse Domain
18 Remote Logging, Electronic Mail and File Transfer
18.1 Remote Logging
18.1.1 Telnet
18.2 Electronic Mail
18.2.1 Architecture
18.2.2 User Agent
18.2.3 SMTP
18.2.4 POP and IMAP
18.2.5 Web-based Mail
18.3 File Transfer
18.3.1 FTP
18.3.2 Anonymous FTP

General Objectives:
1 Know the concepts of Data Communication, networking, protocols, standards and
networking models
2 Understand the concepts of data and signals
3 Learn the concepts of Bandwidth Utilization
4 Know the various transmission Medias
5 Understand the concepts of switching
6 Understand various Error detection and correction methods
7 Know about data flow and error control
8 Know about data link control
9 Understand multiple access
10 Learn the concepts of wired LANs and Ethernet
11 Compare various connecting devices
12 Know the concepts of network layer, logical addressing, IP, Forwarding and
routing
13 Understand Transport layer UDP, TCP and congestion control
14 Know about domain name system, remote logging, E-mail and file transfer

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES:

Learn Data communication

Classify Components
Appraise Data representation
Know about Data flow
Know about Networks
Appraise Distributed Processing
Know about Network Criteria
Physical Structures
Compare Network Models
Discuss Categories of Networks
Know about Interconnections of Networks : Internetwork
Know about Internet
Understand Protocols and Standards
Know about Layered Tasks, Sender, Receiver and Carrier
Learn about The OSI Model, Layered Architecture, Peer to Peer Processes
Discuss Layers in the OSI Model
Discuss TCP/IP Protocol suite and its layers
Discuss Addressing
Learn about Analog and Digital signals
Discuss Periodic Analog Signals, Digital Signals ,Performance
Classify Multiplexing
Learn about various Transmission Medias
Discuss Circuit Switched Networks, datagram n/ws and virtual circuit
Classify Types of Errors
Learn about Redundancy
Compare Detection and Correction
Compare Forward Error Correction and Retransmission
Know about Block Coding, Error detection , correction and hamming distance
Learn about Cyclic Codes , CRC, Polynomials, checksum , 1’s complement
Discuss Framing , Flow and Error Control
Discuss Random Access ,Aloha ,CSMA,CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA, Controlled
Access, Preservation ,Polling , Token Passing
Learn about IEEE Standards ,Data Link Layer ,Physical Layer ,
Standard Ethernet ,MAC Sub layer ,Physical Layer, Fast Ethernet ,MAC
Sub layer ,Physical Layer ,Gigabit Ethernet MAC Sub layer ,Physical
Layer ,Ten-Gigabit Ethernet
Discuss Connecting Devices like ,Hubs ,Repeaters , Active Hubs ,
Bridges ,Two-Layer Switches ,Routers , Three-Layer switches ,
Gateways ,Backbone Networks , Connecting Remote LANs ,Virtual
LANs ,Configuration Communication between Switches ,IEEE Standards
and Advantages
Discuss about IPv4 Addresses , Address Space , Notations ,Class
Full Addressing ,Class less Addressing ,Network Address Translation ,
 IPv6 Addresses ,Structure , Address Space
Learn about Internetworking ,Need for Network Layer , Internet as a
Datagram Network ,Internet as a Connectionless Network IPv4 ,
Datagram, Fragmentation, Checksum,Options,IPv6, Advantages and
Packet Format
Discuss Delivery ,Direct versus In-Direct Delivery ,Forwarding ,
Forwarding Technique ,Forwarding Process, Routing Table.
Discuss Process to Process Delivery ,Client/Server Paradigm ,Multiplexing
and De-Multiplexing, Connectionless Versus Connection Oriented
Service Reliable Versus Un-Reliable ,Three Protocols , UDP, Well
Known Ports for UDP, User Datagram ,Checksum UDP Operation ,
Use of UDP ,TCP ,TCP Services ,TCP Features ,Segment ,TCP
Connection ,Flow Control Error Control , Congestion Control Data
Traffic , Traffic Descriptor , Traffic Profiles , Congestion ,
Network Performance ,Congestion Control Open-Loop Congestion
Control, Closed-Loop Congestion Control .
Discuss Name Space , Flat Name Space ,Hierarchical Name Space
Domain Name Space,Label ,Domain Name , Domain Distribution of
Name Space ,Hierarchy of Name Servers Zone ,Route Server ,Primary
and Secondary Servers DNS in the Internet ,Generic Domains ,
Country Domains Inverse Domain.
Discuss Remote Logging, Telnet , Electronic Mail ,Architecture , User
Agent SMTP ,POP and IMAP , Web-based Mail ,File Transfer , FTP

Text Books: 1. Data Communications and Networking - Behrouz A Forouzan, Tata

McGraw-Hill, 4th edition, ISBN: 9780070634145
2. Computer Network -By Niranjan A, Sapna Publications

References:

1. Computer networks ---- Tannanbaum, PHI

2. Data and computer communication --- William Stallings

3. Computer Networks – C R Sarma, JAICO Publication

4. Computer Networks --- Olifer Wiley publications

5. Computer Networks --- Brijendra Singh

 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: COMPUTER NETWORKS

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections. Marks

Section – I
1. a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/s 5x1=5
i. The process of combining more than one type of data signal is called…..
ii. CSMA stands for …………
iii. IP address is of ………. Bits
iv. Error detection is the responsibility of …….layer
v. ……… is a connection oriented reliable protocol.
b) Write a note on network physical structures. 5

Section – II

2. a) Explain ISO OSI Reference model. 8

b) Distinguish between base band and broad band transmission. 5
c) Define multiplexing. 2
3. a) Explain frequency division multiplexing process. 5
b) Explain any two unguided media. 5
c) Explain the concept of optical fiber communiction. 5
4. a) Define switching. Explain circuit switched network. 10
b) Explain Forward error correction verses retransmission. 5
Section – III
5. a) What is meant by cyclic codes ? Illustrate CRC with an example. 10
b) Define framing. Explain the two classes of framing. 5
6. a) Explain CSMA and CSMA / CD. 10
 b) Write a note on 802.3 MAC frame format. 5

7. a) What is the significance of Ten-Gigabit Ethernet ?. 5

b) What is the difference between a bus backbone and a star backbone? 5
c) Explain the role of VLANs. 5

Section – IV

8. a) What is meant by network address translation ? 3

b) Distinguish between IPv4 and IPv6 addressing. 5
c) Explain the role of network layer in an inter network. 7
9. a) Explain hierarchical routing with an example . 10
b) Write a note on socket addressing. 5
10. a) Explain the features of TCP. 5
b) Explain the concept of open loop congestion control. 5
c ) List the services provided by application layer and explain any one. 5
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of contents

Chapter Contents No. of Marks

No Hours
Section - I
1 Basic Structure Of Computers 04 12
2 Machine Instructions and Programs 14 36
Section - II
3 Basic Processing Unit 08 36
4 Input/Output Organization 12 20
Section - III
5 The Memory system 12 26
6 Processors 06 15
Seminars and Guest lectures from industry and institutes 5
Tests 3
Total 64 145

Detailed Contents

1 Basic Structure Of Computers

1.1 Functional Units
1.1.1 Input Unit
1.1.2 Memory Unit
1.1.3 Arithmetic and Logic Unit
1.1.4 Output Unit
1.1.5 Control Unit
1.2 Basic Operational Concepts
1.3 Bus Structures
2 Machine Instructions and Programs
2.1 Numbers, Arithmetic operations and Characters
2.1.1 Number representation
2.1.2 Addition of positive numbers
 2.1.3 Addition and subtraction of signed numbers
2.1.4 Overflow in integer arithmetic
2.1.5 Characters
2.2 Memory Locations and Addresses
2.2.1 Byte Addressability
2.2.2 Big Endian and Little Endian Assignments
2.2.3 Word Alignment
2.2.4 Accessing numbers, characters and character strings
2.3 Memory Operations
2.4 Instruction and Instruction sequencing
2.4.1 Register Transfer notation
2.4.2 Assembly Language notation
2.4.3 Basic instruction types
2.4.4 Instruction execution and straight line sequencing
2.4.5 Branching
2.4.6 Condition codes
2.5 Addressing modes
2.5.1 Implementation of variables and constants
2.5.2 Indirection and pointers
2.5.3 Indexing and arrays
2.5.4 Relative addressing
2.5.5 Additional modes
2.6 Assembly Language
2.6.1 Assembler directives
2.6.2 Assembly and execution of programs
2.7 Basic Input- Output Operations
3 Basic Processing Unit
3.1 Some Fundamental Concepts
3.1.1 Register transfers
3.1.2 Performing an Arithmetic or Logic operation
3.1.3 Fetching a word from memory
3.1.4 Storing a word in memory
3.2 Execution of a complete Instruction
3.2.1 Branch instructions
3.3 Multiple Bus Organization
3.4 Hardwired Control
3.4.1 A complete processor
3.5 Microprogrammed Control
3.5.1 Microinstructions
3.5.2 Microprogam Sequencing
4 Input Output Organization
4.1 Accessing I/O Devices
 4.2 Interrupts
4.2.1 Interrupt Hardware
4.2.2 Enabling and Disabling Interrupts
4.2.3 Handling Multiple Devices
4.2.4 Controlling Device requests
4.2.5 Exceptions
4.5 Direct Memory Access
4.5.1 Bus arbitration
4.6 Buses
4.6.1 Synchronous bus
4.6.2 Asynchronous bus
4.7 Interface Circuits
4.7.1 Parallel port
4.7.2 Serial port
4.8 Standard I/O Interfaces ( Basic concepts only)
4.8.1 Peripheral Component Interconnect(PCI) Bus
4.8.2 SCSI Bus
4.8.3 Universal Serial Bus (USB)
5 The Memory System
5.1 Some Basic Concepts
5.2 Semiconductor RAM Memories
5.2.1 Internal Organization of memory chips
5.2.2 Static Memories
5.2.3 Asynchronous DRAMs
5.2.4 Synchronous DRAMs
5.2.5 Structure of larger memories
5.2.5 Memory system consideration
5.2.6 Rambus memory
5.3 Read-Only Memories
5.3.1 ROM
5.3.2 PROM
5.3.3 EPROM
5.3.4 EEPROM
5.3.5 Flash Memory
5.4 Speed, Size and Cost
5.5 Cache Memories
5.5.1 Mapping Functions
5.5.2 Replacement Algorithms
6 Processors
6.1 What is Microprocessor?
6.2 Architectural Advancements of Microprocessors
6.2.1 Pipelining
6.3 Evolution of Microprocessors
6.3.1 8-bit Microprocessors
6.3.2 16-bit Microprocessors
6.3.3 32-bit Microprocessors

General Objectives:

1. Understand the basic structure of a computer with instructions.

2. Learn about machine instructions and program execution.
3. Learn about the internal functional units of a processor and how they are
interconnected.
4. Understand how program controlled I/O is performed.
5. Learn about basic memory circuit, organization and secondary storage.
6. Understand different processor families.

Specific Objectives:

1.1 Understand the Functional Units

1.2 Learn about Basic Operational Concepts
1.3 Classify the Bus Structures
2.1 Understand about Numbers, Arithmetic operations and Characters
2.2 Learn about Memory Locations and Addresses
2.3 Understand Memory Operations
2.4 Understand Instruction and Instruction sequencing
2.5 Define Addressing modes
2.6 Learn about Assembly Language
2.7 Understand Basic Input- Output Operations
3.1 Study Some Fundamental Concepts
3.2 Understand Execution of a complete Instruction
3.3 Learn about Multiple Bus Organization
3.4 Understand Hardwired Control
3.5 Understand Micro programmed Control
4.1 Understand accessing I/O Devices
4.2 Classify Interrupts
4.5 Know about Direct Memory Access
4.6 Understand Buses
4.7 Understand Interface Circuits
4.8 Learn Basic Concepts of Standard I/O Interfaces
 5.1 Learn Some Basic Concepts of memory
5.2 Understand Semiconductor RAM Memories
5.3 Understand Read-Only Memories
5.4 Know about Speed, Size and Cost
5.5 Understand Cache Memories
6.1 Define Microprocessor
6.2 Learn Architectural Advancements of Microprocessors
6.3 Understand Evolution of Microprocessors

Text book:
1. For Chapters 1-6 : Computer Organization, 5th edition, Carl Hamacher,
Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, McGraw Hill, International edition.
2. Computer Organization By- Niranjan A, Sapna Publications.
3. For Chapter 7: Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, Third printing,
Krishna Kant, PHI, And ISBN: 9788120331914
(Section 2.4, 2.10.1, 2.11.1, 2.11.2, 2.11.3)
Reference : 1. Computer Organization By- Dr. B S Pradeep
2. Computer architecture and organization , 4th edition , P Chakraborty ,
JAICO publishers
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: Computer Organization

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.

Marks

Section – I

1. a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/s 5x1=5

i.
ii.
iii .
iv.
v.
b) Write a note on bus arbitration. 5

Section – II

2. a) With a layout explain basic operational concepts with . 10

b) Distinguish between Multiprocessors and multicomputers. 5

3. a) Distinguish between Big-endian and little-endian. 5

b) Explain basic instruction types. 5
c) How instruction execution is carried out? 5
4. a) List the addressing modes. Explain any two with general format. 10
b) What is the significance of assembler directives? 5
 Section – III
5. a) How basic I /O operations carried out ? Explain. 5
b) Explain single bus organization of the data path inside a processor. 10
6. a) List out the instructions to fetch a word memory. 5
b) Explain how a complete instruction execution takes place inside a processor. 5
c) Write a note on micro instructions. 5
7. a) Explain the concept of micro programmed control. 4
b) With block diagram describe a complete processor. 6
c) Explain the I/O gating for the registers inside a processor. 5

Section – IV
8. a) Explain the vectored interrupts. 5
b) What is an exception? Explain its types. 5
c) Write a diagram of a computer system using different interface standards. 5
9. a) Explain the organization of bit shell in a memory chip. 10
b) Explain the technique of LRU replacement algorithm. 5
10. a) With a neat figure explain direct mapping technique. 5
b) Explain briefly the Intel 8088 elementary block diagram. 10
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: Data Structures lab
Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96
List of Programs

PART - A
1. To illustrate the use of pointers in arithmetic operations
2. To illustrate the different parameter passing mechanisms: Call by value
and Call by reference
3. To find the smallest element in an array of 10 elements using pointers
4. To count the number of characters in a given file.
5. To create a file that contains atleast 5 records which consists of Book No.,
Book Name, Author, Publisher, and price
6. Display the contents of the file created in program No. 5 in the following
format
Book No. Book Name Author Publisher Price
PART – B
7. To illustrate Stack operations using pointers to array
8. To implement queue using pointers to array
9. To implement circular queue: insert, delete and display
10. To implement singly list : create, delete and display
11. To implement doubly linked list : create, delete and display
12. To implement binary tree traversal operations.
13. To sort using bubble sort.
14. To sort an array using selection sort.
15. To sort an array using insertion sort.
16. To search a given number using binary search
Note: Execute programs in LINUX / Windows platform

References:

1. Programming in ANSI C, 4th/e, E.Balagurusamy, Tata Mcgraw Hill, ISBN:

9780070648227
2. Introduction to Data Structures in C, Ashok N Kamthane Third impression
2009, Pearson Education, ISBN : 9788131713921

Scheme of valuation

1 Record 05
2 Writing two programs one each from 20 X 2 = 40
part A & part B
3 Entering one program from part B 05
4 Execution with result 30
5 Viva-voce 20
Total Marks 100
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: DATA STRUCTURES USING C
Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

Chapter No Topic No. of Hrs Marks

Section I
1 Pointers 08 18
2 Dynamic Memory allocation 04 6
3 Files 06 14
Section II
4 Introduction to data structures 02 4
5 The Stack 08 22
6 Queues 06 14
Section III
7 Linked lists 08 20
8 Trees 06 16
9 Sorting 06 15
10 Searching 02 6
Seminars and Guest lectures from
05
Industry and Institute
Tests 03
Total hrs 64 145

Detailed Contents

1 Pointers
1.1 Concept of pointers
1.2 Declaring and initializing pointers
1.3 Accessing variables using pointers
1.4 Pointer arithmetic
1.5 Pointers and arrays
1.6 Pointers and character strings
1.7 Pointers and functions
1.8 Pointer as a function argument
1.9 Pointers to function
1.10 pointers and structures
2 Dynamic Memory allocation
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Dynamic memory allocation
2.3 Allocating a block of memory : Malloc
 2.4 Allocating multiple blocks of memory : Calloc
2.5 Releasing the used space : Free
2.6 Altering the size of memory : Realloc
3 Files
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Defining and opening a file
3.3 Closing a file
3.4 Input / Output operations on files
3.5 Error handling during I/O operations
3.6 Random Access to files
3.7 Command line arguments
4 Introduction to data structures
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Data and information
4.3 Types of data structures
4.4 Primitive & non – primitive data structures ND operations
5 The Stack
5.1 Definition and examples
5.2 Primitive Operations- Push and Pop
5.3 Representing Stacks in C
5.4 Implementing Push and Pop Operations in C
5.5 Applications of Stacks
5.6 Infix, Postfix and Prefix Expressions
5.7 Algorithm for evaluating an expression- Infix to prefix, Infix to Postfix
5.8 Recursion
5.9 Recursive definition
5.10 Multiplication of Natural numbers
5.11 Factorial Function
5.12 GCD function
5.13 Properties of Recursive algorithms/functions
5.14 Recursion in C
6 Queues
6.1 The queue and its sequential representation
6.2 C implementation of Queues and their operations
6.3 C implementation of Circular queues and their operations
6.4 Dequeue and priority queues(Concepts only)
7 Linked lists
7.1 Linked linear lists
7.2 Inserting and removing nodes from a list
7.3 Linked Implementation of Stacks and Queues
7.4 Array implementation of lists in C and its limitations
7.5 Linked list using dynamic variables in C
7.6 Comparing the Dynamic and Array Implementation of Lists
7.7 Circular linked lists (Concepts only, no implementations)
7.8 Doubly linked list
8 Trees
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Basic Terms
 8.3 Binary trees
8.4 Complete binary tree
8.5 Binary tree representation
8.6 Operation on binary tree
8.7 Traversal of a binary tree
9 Sorting
9.1 Exchange sorts
9.2 --Bubble sort
9.3 --Quick sort (No implementation)
9.4 Selection and tree sorting
9.5 --Straight selection sort
9.6 --Binary tree sort
9.7 Insertion Sorts
9.8 --Simple Insertion sort
9.10 --Shell sort (No implementation)
9.11 Merge sort and Radix sort (No implementation)
10 Searching
10.1 Introduction
10.2 Searching
10.3 Linear (sequential) search (without creating linked list)
10.4 Binary search

General objectives:

1 Understand the concept of pointers and their operations

2 Understand the concept of dynamic memory allocation
3 Understand file handling in C
Know the concepts of linear data structures, their operations and
4 applications
Know the concepts of non linear data structures, their operations and
5 applications
6 Understand the various sorting and searching techniques

Specific Objectives:

Pointers
Bring out the concepts of pointers
Learn to declaring and initializing pointers
Learn to access variables using pointers
Explain the concepts of pointer arithmetic
Explain the use of Pointers in arrays, character strings, functions, structures
Files
Define File
Learn the I/O operations on files
Distinguish between sequential & random access files
Learn to handle errors in files and command line arguments
Introduction to data structures
Define Information ,data and data structures
Distinguish between the various types of data types: primitive and non primitive
Define stack with examples
Explain the Primitive Operations- Push and Pop performed on stack
Write programs to Implement Push and Pop Operations in C
Learn the applications of Stacks
Learn about Infix, Postfix and Prefix Expressions
Learn to convert expressions i.e. from Infix to postfix & prefix,
Learn to convert Postfix to infix & prefix ,Prefix to infix & postfix Expressions
Understand recursion: eg. Multiplication of natural numbers, Factorial and GCD
Learn queue with examples and their sequential representation
Learn C implementation of Queues and their operations
Learn C implementation of Circular queues and their operations
Learn the concepts of Dequeue and priority queues
Linked list
Learn the concepts of Linked linear lists, their advantages and disadvantages
Write programs for Inserting and removing nodes from a list
Write programs to implement of Stacks and Queues
Learn Array implementation of lists in C and its limitations
Implement Linked list using dynamic variables in C
Examples of list operations in C
Comparing the Dynamic and Array Implementation of Lists
Learn concepts of Circular & doubly linked lists
Trees
Define Binary trees and learn their concepts
Understand tree operations
Learn & implement binary tree traversal operations
Sorting
To understand different sorting Techniques with examples
To implement sorting techniques in C
Searching
To understand linear and binary search Techniques with examples
To learn and implement linear and binary search techniques in C

Text book:
1. For Chapter 1 to 3 -- Programming in ANSI C, E.Balagurusamy, 4E, Tata
McGraw Hill, ISBN: 9780070648227
2. DATA STRUCTURES USING C By Niranjan A, Sapna Publications.
3. For Chapters 5, 6, 7, 9,10 -- DATA STRUCTURES USING C AND C++,
Langsam yedidyah, Augenstein moshe j., Aron M. Tenenbaum , Second
Edition, PHI
 4. For Chapters 4 and 8 -- Introduction to Data Structures in C, Ashok N
Kamthane, Third impression 2009, Pearson Education, ISBN :
9788131713921

Reference Books:
1. Data Structures with C, By Nanda Gopalan.
2. C and data Structures, Dr.N.B. Venkateshwarulu and Dr.E.V Prasad,
S chand Publications
3. Data structures Using C, Aron M. Tenenbaum ,langsam yedidyah,
Augenstein moshe j. , PHI
4. C and Data Structures, Prof. P S Deshapande and Prof. O G Kakde
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: Data Structures using C

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.
Marks

Section – I
1. a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/s 5x1=5
i. …… is a variable which holds the address of another variable.
ii. ……. is an example for non linear data structure
iii. The process of a function calling itself is called…………
iv. ……. is used to open a file.
v. The total number of nodes in a complete binary tree is given by …..
b) Write a note on Command line arguments. 5

Section – II

2. a) Define Pointer. Explain pointer arithmetic. 6

b) Differentiate between call by value and call by reference parameter
passing techniques with example. 9

3. a) Write a program to sort N numbers using malloc( ) . 6

 b) Define File and explain different File modes. 6
c) How to handle errors in files? 3
4. a) Distinguish between linear and non linear data structure. 5
b) Write an algorithm to perform PUSH and POP operations in Stack. 10

Section – III
5. a) What is recursion ? Explain with an example. 7
b) Convert the following expressions to postfix 6

i. (A + B) * (C - D) $ E * F
ii. ((A – (B + C) * D) $ (E + F)
c) Define Queue. 2
6. a) Write a program to implement Circular Queues in C 10
b) Write a note on Priority queues. 5
7. a) Write an algorithm to insert a node into a linked list. 8
b) Compare the Dynamic and Array Implementation of Lists. 7

Section – IV

8. a) Explain Doubly linked list. 5

b) Write the tree traversal algorithms. 10
9. a) Construct the binary tree for the following data 5
15,4,8,9,2,13,1,6,10,11,14
b) Write a program to implement simple insertion sort and trace
with an example. 10
10. a) Explain tree sorting with an example. 8
b) Write a program to perform binary search using recursion. 7
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE LAB
Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96
List of Programs

1 Program to input two different integers using the function input box to compare two
numbers
2 Develop a class average program that will process an arbitrary number of grades, each
time the program is run.
3 Program to find the minimum of three numbers using sub procedures
4 Program to demonstrate function procedure
5 Program to demonstrate ctrl array
6 Program to demonstrate dynamic array
7 Program to demonstrate param array
8 Program to demonstrate function array
9 Program to demonstrate string functions
10 Design an application to change the color, font size, type of the form using scroll bar
11 Program to demonstrate date and time functions
12 Program to demonstrate adding and subtracting dates with date add and date diff
13 Program to demonstrate function filter & split
14 Program to demonstrate timer ctrl
15 Program to demonstrate combo box ctrl
16 Design an application to validate the user name & password & display appropriate
msg using msg box ctrl
17 Program to demonstrate pop-up & pull down menu
18 Program to demonstrate nested on error statement
19 Program to demonstrate linear search
20 Design an application which performs the following operations on the database the
form using ADO a) add b) update c) delete
Soft wares to be used: kbasics or any other equivalent GUI Software

Note: Two theory hours and Four practical hours to be handled per week

References:
www.kbasic.com

Scheme of Examination

1 Record 05
2 Writing two programs 15+15=30
3 Entering two program 10
4 Execution of both 20+20 = 40
programs with results
5 Viva-Voce 15
Total 100
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject : PC Hardware and Networking Lab

Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96

List of Experiments

SN PART A Hrs
1 Understand the importance of earthing. Measure the voltages of single phase 3
3 pin socket between the points: Phase - Neutral, Neutral – Earth and Phase-
Earth. (Have guest lectures about method and type of earthing).
2 Study and measure voltages of SMPS 3
3 Drawing the motherboard layout (any latest processor) and studying the 3
chipset through data books or Internet
4 CMOS setup of any latest PC 6
5 Learn parallel port, serial port and USB port testing and Installation of 6
Scanner, Printers and ADSL/DSL Modems.
6 Study of Diagnostic Software. (Any one) 3
7 Fault findings: 6
(a) Problems related to CPU.
(b) Problems related to RAM
8 Disassembly and Assembling of PC and Installation of Operating System 6
a) Windows Vista or higher b) Linux
PART B
9 a) Crimping of RJ45: Straight and Cross. 6
b) Punching Cat 6 cable to I/O Box. Use punching tool.
Check connectivity using LAN tester.
10 Install NIC (both RJ45 and Wireless), Switch and Wireless router 6
11 Study different IP class (A, B, C) addressing. (Manual & Dynamic) 6
Install
12 Windows Server 2008 or higher version & also install the following services 6
 a) Active directory b) DNS c) DHCP d) Print server
Create and manage users. Set policies using GPO.
13 Connect Windows Vista / Windows 7 users (minimum 3) to Windows domain 6
and share any two devices (HDD, DVD, Printer, Scanner). Client connectivity
media wired and wireless.
14 Create users on Linux and specify permissions. 6
15 Install internet connection (Minimum ADSL or Wireless Broad Brand) and 6
share on clients. (Not for exam)
16 Visit any industry / institutes (Engineering colleges, university campus etc) 12
and study the following
1. Type and Configuration of client PC’s and OS (Eg: Linux, Windows,
MAC etc.)
2. Type and Configuration of Servers and Domains used
3. Type of networking (Topology and media used)
4. Different network devices used (switch, routers, access points etc)
5. Different types of peripheral devices used (Eg: printers, scanner, web
cam etc.)
6. Applications used by the users.
Prepare a report of about 3 to 4 (A4 size) pages and include in the lab record.
Tests 6
Total 96

Note: Two theory hours and Four practical hours to be handled per week

Scheme of Examination

1 Record+Report(Q 16) 05+05=10

2 Writing Procedure for two 15+15=30
experiments (One each
from Part A & Part B)
3 Conduction 10+10=20
4 Fault diagnosis 20
5 Viva-Voce 20
Total 100
References:
www.pcguide.com
www.karbosguide.com
www.windowsnetworking.com
www.linuxtopia.org
www.networktutorials.info
www.academicearth.org
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Third Semester
Subject: WEB DESIGN LAB
Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96

Part- A

Define the following :

Web site, Web Page, Types of Web Pages, Browsers & their types, Client –Server Model, Web
–Server, Working of different types of Web Pages, General structure of a Web Page, Scripting
languages, URL, Popular Search Engines, WWW

Illustrate Html tags & their attributes:

Head, title, body, comments, div, <h1>……<h6>, hr, br, span,

<em>,<p>,<pre>,<strong>,<marquee>,<sup>,<sub>, <b>,
<big>,<font>,<i>,<small>,<s>,<u>,All tags pertaining to lists, <a>:text as links and images as
links, all table related tags, all tags related to Frames, forms & all form elements, CSS, Adding
images using <img >tags & setting an image as background, embedding a multimedia on to a
web page(video, audio, zip)

MINI-Project (Max -2 students in a batch)

Design a static web site having a minimum of 6 web pages using all the html features studied.

Part-B

Client side scripting using JavaScript

Introduction to JavaScript, data types, operators, control structures, arrays & Strings and
procedures

1. Write a menu-driven script to perform all arithmetic operations.

2. Write a script to check whether the given number is prime or not.

3. Write a script to search for an element in an array of n elements.

4. Write a script to illustrate a subroutine.

 5. Write a script to compute the GCD of 2 numbers using Function.

6. Write a script to find the second largest number in an array.

7. Write a script to check whether the given integer is Palindrome or not.

8. Write a script to illustrate different in-built String functions.

Scheme of valuation

1 Record 05

2 Writing two programs one each from

part A & part B 10 +10 = 20

3 Entering and Executing both programs

(Part A + Part B ) 10 + 20 = 30

5 Demonstration of Mini project 20

6 Viva-Voce 25

Total Marks 100

Note : 1. Internet facility to be provided

2. Two theory hours and Four practical hours to be handled per week

References:
1. JavaScript Bible, Sixth Edition, Wiley-India Edition.
2. Internet & World-Wide Web How To Program, pearson edu,Deitel 4th Ed.,
3. Web design Technology S.Chand & comp. Ltd. D.P.Nagapal.
4. HTML Black Book by Holzner. Wiley publications.
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject : DBMS lab
Contact Hrs / week : 6 Total hrs: 96

Note: Draw E-R diagrams & Relational schema.

1. Create the following tables for a COMPANY database

EMPLOYEE

Fname Minit Lname Ssn Bdate Address Sex Salary Super_ssn Dno

DEPARTMENT

Dname Dnumber Mgr_ssn Mgr_start_date

DEPT_LOCATIONS

Dnumber Dlocation

PROJECT

Pname Pnumber Plocation Dnum

WORKS_ON

Essn Pno Hours

DEPENDENT

Essn Dependent_name Sex Bdate Relationship

For table structure refer page no: 247 and for sample values refer page no. 159 of the
reference text 1.

2 Illustrate the use of constraints

NOT NULL
PRIMARY KEY
UNIQUE
CHECK
DEFAULT
REFERENCES
3 DATA MANIPULATION : INSERTING VALUES INTO A TABLE
4 Illustrate the use of SELECT statement
5 Conditional retrieval - WHERE clause
6 Query sorted - ORDER BY clause
7 Grouping the result of query - GROUP BY clause and HAVING clause
8 Aggregate functions in SQL (Count, Sum, Max, Min, Avg)
9 SQL operators
10 Query multiple tables using JOIN operation
11 Write nested and complex queries using multiple tables
12 Use different single row and multi row (group) functions
13 Perform UPDATE, ALTER, DELETE, DROP operations on tables
14 Illustrate the use of CREATE VIEW command and manipulating
15 Database Security And Privileges : Use GRANT and REVOKE commands
16 Use COMMIT and ROLL BACK commands
17 Use SAVEPOINT commands
18 Using any front end tool develop an application involving minimum 3-4 tables. (Not
for exam)

Scheme of examination

1 Record 05
2 Create tables (min 2 tables ) 10
3 Inserting records 05
4 Writing 5 queries on minimum two tables 30
5 Execution with results for 5 queries 30
6 Viva – Voce 20
Total marks 100

References:
1. Fundamentals of Database Systems, 5th edition, Ramez Elmasri, Shamkan
B. Navathe, Pearson EducationSql Pl/Sql The Programming Language Of
Oracle W/CD, Ivan Bayross, Bpb Publications, 2009.
2. http://www.sql-tutorial.net/
3. Mysql 5 For Professinals W/Cd, Ivan Bayross / Sharanam Shah, Shroff
Publishers & Distributors
4. Database Management System Oracle SQl and PL/SQL, Pranab Kumar das
Gupta, PHI, 2009 Print

Softwares:

Database : SQl/MySQL/Oracle
Front end tool for database querying: Sqldeveloper or any other query tool
www.oracle.com
www.mysql.com
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

Contact Hours / week: 4 Total hours: 64

Table of Contents

Sl. No. Topic No. of Hrs Marks

Section I
1 Databases and database users 04 10
2 Database System Concepts and 04 10
Architecture
3 Data Modeling Using the Entity- 06 15
Relationship(ER) Model
4 Relational Data Model and Relational 04 10
Database Constraints
Section II
5 The Relational Algebra 08 22
6 SQL: Schema Definition, constraints, 12 30
queries and views
Section III
7 Functional Dependencies and 08 22
normalization for relational databases
8 Introduction to transaction processing 04 10
concepts and theories
9 Concurrency Control Techniques 03 08
10 Database Recovery Techniques 03 08
Seminars and Guest lectures from 05
Industry and Institute
Tests 03
Total hours 64 145

DETAILS OF CONTENTS
1. Databases and database users
1.1 Introduction
1.2 An Example
1.3 Characteristics of the database approach
1.4 Actors on the scene
1.5 Workers behind the scene
1.6 Advantages of using the DBMS Approach
1.7 A Brief History of Database Applications
1.8 When Not to use a DBMS
2. Database System Concepts and Architecture
2.1 Data Models, Schemas , and Instances
2.2 Three-Schema Architecture and Data Independence
2.3 Database Languages and Interfaces
2.4 The Database System Environment
2.5 Centralized and Client /Server Architectures for DBMSs.
2.6 Classification of database Management System.

3. Data Modeling Using the Entity-Relationship(ER) Model

3.1 Using High-Level Conceptual Data Models for Database Design
3.2 An example Database Application
3.3 Entity Types, Entity Sets, attributes and keys
3.4 Relation Types, Relationship Sets, roles and structural constraints
3.5 Weak Entity Types
3.6 Refining the ER Design for the Company Database
3.7 ER Diagrams, naming, conventions and design issues
3.8 Relationship Types of Degree Higher Than Two

4. Relational Data Model and Relational DataBase Constraints

4.1 Relational Model concepts
4.2 Relational Model Constraints and relational database schemas
4.3 Update Operation, Transaction and Dealing with constraints violations

5. The Relational Algebra

5.1 Unary Relational Operations: SELECT and PROJECT
5.2 Relational algebra operations from Set theory
5.3 Binary Relational Operations: JOIN and DIVISION
5.4 Additional Relational Operations
5.5 Examples of Queries in relational algebra

6. SQL: Schema Definition, constraints, queries and views

6.1 SQL Data Definition and data types
6.2 Specifying constraints in SQL
6.3 Schema Change statement in SQL
6.4 Basic queries in SQL
6.5 More Complex SQL queries
6.6 INSERT, DELETE and UPDATE statements in SQL
6.7 Specifying constraints and Assertions and Triggers
6.8 Views(Virtual Tables) in SQL

7. Functional Dependencies and normalization for relational databases

7.1 Informal Design guidelines for relation schemas
7.2 Functional dependencies
7.3 Normal forms based on primary keys
7.4 General definition of second and third normal forms
7.5 Boyce-codd Normal form
8. Introduction to transaction processing concepts and theories
8.1 Introduction to transaction processing
8.2 Transaction and system concepts
8.3 Desirable properties of transaction
8.4 Characterizing schedules based on recoverability
8.5 Characterizing schedules based on serializablity
8.5.1 Serial, non-serial and conflict serializable schedules

9. Concurrency Control Techniques

9.1 Two-Phase Locking Techniques for Concurrency Control
9.1.1 Types of locks and system log tables
9.1.2 Guaranteeing Serializability by Two-Phase locking
9.1.3 Dealing with Dead Lock and Starvation

10. Database Recovery Techniques

10.1 Recovery Concepts
10.1.1 Recovery outline and categorization of recovery algorithms
10.1.2 Caching (Buffering) of disk blocks
10.1.3 Write-ahead logging, steal/no-steal and force/ no-force
10.1.4 Checkpoints in the system log and fuzzy checkpointing
10.1.5 Transaction rollback

General Objectives:

1. Understand the database concepts, their benefits and advantages

2. Understand the Database architecture
3. Understand the concepts of E-R diagrams & E-R modeling
4. Understand relational algebra
5. Comprehend the different aspects of SQL
6. Understand the concepts of normalization
7. Understand the concepts of transaction processing
8. Understand the techniques of concurrency control
9. Comprehend the concepts & techniques of backup & recovery of database

Specific Objectives:

1 Databases and database users

Define Database system
Learn the characteristics of database approach
Learn the duties of database administrators, database designers and end users
Learn the responsibilities of system analyst, application programmers and
implementers
Learn Benefits of using database approach
Learn when not to use a DBMS
2 Database System Concepts and Architecture
Define Data models, database schemas and database instances
 Learn the categories of data models
Learn the three-schema architecture and data independence
Generalize Database languages and interfaces
Learn about Database system environment
Compare classification of DBMS
Data Modeling Using the Entity-Relationship(ER) Model
Learn Conceptual Data Models for Database Design
Define Entity Types, Entity Sets, attributes and keys
Define Relation Types, Relationship Sets, roles and structural constraints
Define Weak Entity Types
Design ER model for the Company Database
Know the notations of ER Diagrams, naming conventions and design issues
Relational Data Model and Relational Database Constraints
Learn the concepts of Relational Model
Explain Relational Model Constraints and relational database schemas
Explain Update Operations on relations
The Relational Algebra
Learn Unary Relational Operations: SELECT and PROJECT
Learn Relational algebra operations from Set theory
Learn Binary Relational Operations: JOIN and DIVISION
Learn Additional Relational Operations : Aggregate function
Compare different JOIN operations
Write queries in relational algebra
SQL: Schema Definition, constraints, queries and views
Learn about Data definition and data types in SQL
Learn to specify constraints in SQL
Learn SQL statements to change the database schema
Use Insert and Update statements in SQL
Learn to Formulate queries in SQL
Create Views in SQL
Learn to Specify indexes in SQL
Functional Dependencies and normalization for relational databases
Generalize the Design guide lines for relation schemas
Refine the database model using functional dependencies
Learn Normal forms based on primary keys
Learn second and third normal forms
Apply Boyce - Codd normal form to the database
Introduction to transaction processing concepts and theories
Analyse the basic concepts of transaction processing
Appraise the properties of transactions
Characterize schedules based on recoverability and serializability
Concurrency Control Techniques
Learn two-phase locking techniques
Database Recovery Techniques
Learn the concepts and the recovery techniques
Text book:
1. Fundamentals of Database Systems, 5th edition, Ramez Elmasri, Shamkan B.
Navathe, Pearson Education, ISBN- 9788131716250

Reference:
1. Database Management Systems – By Nandagopalan, Sapna Publications
2. Fundamemtals of Database Management Systems, Mark L. Gillenson, 2009,
Wiley India
3. Database Management Systems – Raghu Ramakrishnan and Johannes Gehrke
– 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2003
4. DBMS a practical approach , by E R Rajiv Chopra, S Chand publications.
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: Database Management Systems

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.
Marks
Section – I
1. a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/s 5x1=5
i) An ________schema describes the physical storage structure of the database.
ii) The basic object that the ER model represents is an __________.
iii) _________ is the notation for select operation in relation algebra.
iv) The _________ constraint states that no primary key value can be null.
v) The information stored in the catalog is called _________.

b) Mention the capabilities that should be provided by a DBMS 5

Section – II
2. a) What are the different types of end users? Explain the activities of each. 5
b) Explain the main categories of Data Models. 5
c) What are the different ways of classifying a DBMS 5
3. a) Define the following terms: 5
i. Entity ii. Attribute iii. Attribute value
iv. Composite attribute v. Entity set
b) Describe the naming convention used for ER diagram. 5
 c) Design an ER diagram for the Company database. 5
4. a) Discuss the entity integrity and referential integrity constraints. 5
b) Discuss the various types of update operation on a relation. 5
c) Explain aggregate functions. 5
Section – III

5. a) Explain the following relational algebra operations with example : 9

i. Select ii. Project iii. Cartesian product
b) Explain the various types of inner join operations. 6
6. a) Explain CREATE TABLE command in SQL . 5
b) How to create Views in SQL? Explain with an example. 5
c) What is the difference between WHERE and HAVING clause? 5
7. a) Consider the following tables : 9
WORKS (Pname, Cname, Salary)
LIVES (Pname, Street, City)
LOCATED_IN (Cname,City)
MANAGER (Pname, Mgrname)
Write the SQL queries for the following:
i. List the names of the people who work for the company Wipro along
with cities they live in.
ii. Find the people who work for the company “Infosys” with salary
more than Rs 50000
iii. Find the names of the persons who live and work in the same city.
b) What is meant by COMMIT and ROLLBACK? Explain 6
Section – IV
8. a) Explain the different class of anomalies with respect to relational scheme. 6
b) Define Functional dependency. Explain its inference rules 4
c) Compare 1NF with 2NF. 5
9. a) What is the purpose of BOYCE_CODD normal form ? .Explain 7
how it is differs from 3NF? .
b) Explain the ACID properties of transaction. 4
c) List the different types of failures. What is meant by catastrophic failure? 4
10.a) What is lock? Describe the types of locks. 10
b) Explain Fuzzy check pointing. 5
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: Linux Lab
Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96

DETAILS OF CONTENTS

PART-A

1. Introduction to Linux Administration

2. Understand Linux system organization
Introduction to users groups & super user logging in & logging out
Internal & external commands in Linux
Internal commands in Linux echo, type, etc.
External commands in Linux, ls, mv, rm, cat, useradd etc
Command line commands – who, log name, banner, cal, date, bc, man, info etc.
Related exercises.
3. Working with files & directories.
Know the categories of files.
Files & directory commands – cat, less, more, ls, comm, diff, tar
Pipes & redirection- use of !, &, > ,touch, absolute & relative paths.
Directory related commands – pwd, cd, mkdir, rmdir
Manipulating file commands - cp, mv, rm
Related exercises.
4. File permissions & file utilities.
File link commands chmod, umask, file, type, wc, split, cmp, diff.
5. Learn to use vi editor
6. Simple Filters – head, tail, cut, paste, sort, uniq, tr, pr.
7. Expressions & search patterns .(dot operator), *, ^, +, ?, grep, egrep, fgrep
8. Process Management commands.
Process creation, status, Identifying process, ps -f & its options,
 Running process in background, Job control, Process termination.
Changing process priority, Scheduling process(Usage of sleep and wait commands)
9. Communication utilities
Rlogin, telnet, ping, finger, write, msg, talk, and mail.
10. Linux file system storage & file structure.
11. Linux system administration
Managing file system, Disk management utilities, mounts,
umount, df, du, fdisk, su, useradd etc.
12. I / O redirection
I/P & o/p redirection, running multiple commands, redirecting error o/p.
Null redirection, Understanding and usage of file descriptors, Formatting o/p.
13. Linux Environment
Introduction, Environment variables, Command prompt system variables,
Profiles, files, terminal variable stty command and its options,
Command history, editing Environment variable.
14. Introduction to shell programming.
Introduction, Uses of shell script, Shell special characters, comments,
command separator, escaping, quoting command substitution.
Creating shell script, Shell identifiers, Shell variables,
Destroying a variable,Positional parameters & command line arguments ,
evaluating expressions,Text formatting with echo & tput script termination.
15. Shell control structures - if, case, for, while, relational and logical operators,
Advanced filter – sed and awk.
PART-B

GRADED EXERCISES

1. Write a Shell script to print the command line arguments in reverse order.
2. Write a Shell script to check whether the given number is palindrome or not.
3. Write a Shell script to sort the given array elements in ascending order using bubble sort.
4. Write a Shell script to perform sequential search on a given array elements.
5. Write a Shell script to perform binary search on a given array elements.
 6. Write a Shell script to accept any two file names and check their file permissions.
7. Write a Shell script to read a path name, create each element in that path e.g: a/b/c i.e., „a‟ is
directory in the current working directory, under „a‟ create „b‟, under „b‟ create „c‟.
8. Write a Shell script to illustrate the case-statement.
9. Write a Shell script to accept the file name as arguments and create another shell script, which
recreates these files with its original contents.
10. Write a Shell script to demonstrate Terminal locking.
11. Write a Shell script to accept the valid login name, if the login name is valid then print its home
directory else an appropriate message.
12. Write a Shell script to read a file name and change the existing file permissions.
13. Write a Shell script to print current month calendar and to replace the current day number by „*‟ or
„**‟ respectively.
14. Write a Shell Script to display a menu consisting of options to display disk space, the current users
logged in, total memory usage, etc. ( using functions.)

15. Write a C-program to fork a child process and execute the given Linux commands.

16. Write a C-program to fork a child process, print owner process ID and its parent process ID.

17. Write a C-program to prompt the user for the name of the environment variable, check its validity
and print an appropriate message.

18. Write a C-program to READ details of N students such as student name, reg number, semester
and age. Find the eldest of them and display his details.

Text Book:

1. “UNIX – Concepts and Applications”, Sumitabha Das, 4th Edition,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

(Chapters 1.2, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 18, 19).

2. “Linux Command Line and Shell Scripting Bible”, Richard Blum,

 Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2008. (Chapters 1.2, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 14, 15).

3. “Linux Lab: Hands on Linux”, Dayanand Ambawade and Deven N.Shah,

Wiley Dreamtch Pvt. Ltd

Scheme of valuation

1 Record 05
2 Writing two programs one each from 15 + 15 = 30
part A & part B
3 Entering two programs 05 + 05 = 10
4 Executing two programs with Result 15 + 15 = 30
5 Viva-voce 25
Total Marks 100
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: OOP with C++ Lab
Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96

1. Write a C++ program to find the largest of three numbers using inline function.

2. Write a C++ program to sort an array of integer in ascending order using a function
called exchange( ) which accepts two integer arguments by reference.

3. Write a C++ program to implement function overloading in order to compute

power(m,n) where i) m is double and n is int ii) m and n are int.

4. Create a 'DISTANCE' class with :

- feet and inches as data members
- member function to input distance
- member function to output distance
- member function to add two distance objects
Write a main function to create objects of DISTANCE class. Input two distances
and output the sum.

5. Create a class called 'EMPLOYEE' that has

- EMPCODE and EMPNAME as data members
- member function getdata( ) to input data
- member function display( ) to output data
Write a main function to create EMP, an array of EMPLOYEE objects. Accept
and display the details of at least 6 employees.

6. Create a class called 'TIME' that has

- three integer data members for hours, minutes and seconds
- constructor to initialize the object to zero
- constructor to initialize the object to some constant value
- member function to add two TIME objects
- member function to display time in HH:MM:SS format
Write a main function to create two TIME objects, add them and display the
result in HH:MM:SS format.

7. Create a class 'COMPLEX' to hold a complex number. Write a friend function to

add two complex numbers. Write a main function to add two COMPLEX objects.

8. Create a 'MATRIX' class of size m X n. Overload the ‘+’ operator to add two
MATRIX objects. Write a main function to implement it.

9. Derive a class ‘MAT’ from MATRIX class created in program No. 8. Add a
member function to overload ‘*’ operator to multiply two objects. (Single
Inheritance)

10. Write a c++ program :

a) to illustrate multilevel inheritance.
b) to illustrate multiple inheritance.

11. Create a 'STRING' class which overloads ‘ = = ' operator to compare two
STRING objects.

12. Write a C++ program to illustrate ‘this’ pointer and pointers to derived classes.

13. Create a base class called 'SHAPE' having

- two data members of type double
- member function get-data( ) to initialize base class data members
- pure virtual member function display-area( ) to compute and display the area
of the geometrical object.
Derive two specific classes 'TRIANGLE' and 'RECTANGLE' from the
base class. Using these three classes design a program that will accept
dimension of a triangle / rectangle interactively and display the area.
14. Write a C++ program to read a list containing item name, item code and cost
interactively and display the data in a tabular format as shown below:

NAME CODE COST

The Name and Code are left-justified and the Cost is right-justified with a precision of
2 digits. Trailing zeros are shown. Fill the unused spaces with Hyphen

15. Design your own manipulator to provide the following output specification for
printing money value:
1) 10 columns width
2) The character '$' at the beginning
3) Showing '+' sign.
4) Two digits precision
5) Filling of unused spaces with ' * '
6) Trailing zeros shown

16. Write a C++ program that uses a single file for both reading and writing the data.

17. A file contains a list of names and telephone numbers in the following form:
Name Tel. No.

Write a C++ program to read the file and output the list in the tabular format.
The name should be left-justified and numbers right-justified. Use a class
object to store each set of data.

18. Write an interactive, menu-driven program that will access the file created in
program No.17 and implement the following tasks:
i) To determine the telephone numbers of the specified person.
ii) To determine the name if a telephone number is given.
iii) To update the telephone number whenever there is a change.
19. Write a C++ program that displays the size (in bytes) of a given file. The name of
the file is specified as command line argument.

20. Define a function template for finding the minimum value contained in an array.
Write main( ) function to find the minimum value of integer array and minimum value
of floating point numbers in an array.

21. Write a class template to represent a generic vector. Include member functions to
perform the following tasks:
1) To create the vector.
2) To modify the value of a given element.
3) To multiply the vector by a scalar value.
4) To display the vector in the form (10, 20, 30,…..)
Note: Execute programs in LINUX/Windows platform

Scheme of Examination

1 Record 05
2 Writing two programs 20+20=40
3 Entering one program 10
4 Execution with result 25
5 Viva-Voce 20
Total 100
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: OOP with C++
Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

Chapter No Topic No. of Hrs Marks

Section I
1 Introduction to OOP 02 06
2 C++ Additional features 06 15
3 Classes and Objects 10 26
Section II
4 Operator Overloading 06 16
5 Inheritance 08 20
6 Virtual functions 06 16
Section III
7 Managing Console I/O Operations 08 20
8 Files 06 16
9 Templates 04 10
Seminars and Guest lectures from 05
Industry and Institute
Tests 03
Total hrs 64 145

Detailed Contents
1 Introduction to OOP
1.1 Software evolution
1.2 A look at procedure oriented programming
1.3 Object oriented programming paradigm
1.4 Basic concepts of OOPs
1.5 Benefits of OOPs
1.6 Objects oriented languages
1.7 Application of OOPs
2 C++ Additional Features
2.1 What is C++?
2.2 The i/o stream class
2.3 Tokens
2.4 Comments
2.5 Basic data types, User defined data types, Derived data types
2.6 Symbolic constants
 2.7 Type Compatibility
2.8 Declaration of variables
2.9 Dynamic initialization of variables
2.10 Reference variables
Operators in C++: Scope resolution operator, Member dereferencing
2.11 operators, Memory management operators
2.12 Manipulators (setw & endl)
2.13 Type cast operator
2.14 Function prototyping
2.15 Call by reference
2.16 Return by reference
2.17 Inline functions
2.18 Default arguments
2.16 Function overloading
3 Classes and Objects
3.1 C structures revisited
3.2 Specifying a class
3.2.1 A simple class example
3.2.2 Creating objects
3.2.3 Accessing class members
3.3 Defining member functions
3.3.1 Outside the class definition
3.3.2 Inside the class definition
3.4 A C++ program with class
3.5 Memory allocation for objects
3.6 Static data members
3.7 Static member functions
3.8 Arrays within a class
3.9 Arrays of objects
3.10 Constructors & Destructors
3.10.1 Default constructors
3.10.2 Parameterized constructor
3.10.3 Overloaded constructor
3.10.4 Constructor with default argument
3.10.5 Copy constructor
3.10.6 Destructor
3.11 Objects as function arguments
3.12 Returning objects from functions
3.13 Friend functions
3.14 Friend Class (only definition)
4 Operator Overloading
4.1 Defining operator overloading
4.2 Overloading unary operator
4.3 Overloading binary operator
4.4 Overloading binary operator using friends
4.5 Manipulation of strings using operators
4.6 Rules for overloading operator
4.7 Type conversions
4.7.1 Basic to class type
4.7.2 Class to basic type
4.7.3 One class to another class type
5 Inheritance
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Defining Derived classes
5.3 Single Inheritance
5.4 Making a private member inheritable
5.5 Multilevel inheritance
5.6 Multiple inheritance
5.6.1 Ambiguity resolution in inheritance
5.7 Hierarchical inheritance
5.8 Hybrid inheritance
5.9 Virtual base classes
5.10 Abstract classes
5.11 Constructors in Derived classes
5.12 Containership : nesting of classes
6 Virtual Functions
6.1 Pointers to objects
6.2 this pointer
6.3 Pointers to derived classes
6.4 Virtual function
6.5 Rules for virtual functions
6.6 Pure virtual function
7 Managing Console I/O Operations
7.1 C++ streams
7.2 C++ stream classes for console I/O operations
7.3 Unformatted I/O operations
7.4 Formatted console I/O operations
7.5 Managing output with Manipulators
7.6 Designing our own manipulator
8 Files
8.1 Classes for file stream operations
8.2 Opening and closing a file
8.3 Detecting end of file
8.4 File modes
8.5 File pointers and their manipulation
8.6 Sequential I/O operations
8.7 Updating a file : Random Access
8.8 Error handling functions
8.9 Command line arguments
 9 Templates
9.1 Class templates
9.2 Function templates
9.3 Member function templates
9.4 Non Type Template argument

General Objectives:

1. Understand the concepts of OOPs, their advantages and applications

2. Comprehend the features of C++
3. Know to create classes, objects, constructors and destructors
4. Know the concepts and advantages of overloading operator and type conversions
5. Appreciate the concepts of inheritance and the various types of inheritance.
6. Understand virtual functions & their need and usage
7. Appreciate the need for manipulators and the design of the same
8. Use the various operations of files to perform file operations
9. Understand the concept of templates.

Specific Objectives:

Introduction to OOP
Differentiate between procedure oriented and object oriented programming
Learn the concepts and benefits of OOPs
Appraise the applications of OOPs
C++ Additional features
Learn C++ keywords, constants, variable declarations and initialization
Learn the use of scope resolution operator & memory management operators
Learn to use IO Manipulators
Write functions to implement call by reference and return by reference
Learn the concepts of function overloading
Classes and Objects
Learn to create objects and access class members
Learn to define member function within and outside the class definition
Write C++ programs using classes
Know about static data members and static functions
Know various types of constructors & use of destructor
Learn to use objects as function arguments and to return objects from functions
Learn to use arrays and strings as class members
Write programs to implement array of objects
Learn about friend functions and friend classes
Operator Overloading
Define operator overloading
Learn to overload unary and binary operator
Write programs to overload unary and binary operators
 Write programs to overload binary operator using friend functions
Know the rules to be followed while overloading operators
Know about various type conversions
Inheritance
Know the concepts of base class, derived class and derived class constructors
Write programs to overload member functions
Analyse the concept behind Single Inheritance (public & private)
Differentiate between multilevel and multiple inheritance
Differentiate between Hierarchical inheritance & hybrid inheritance
Write programs to implement all the types of inheritance
Learn about Virtual base classes and nesting of classes
Write programs to implement virtual classes & nesting of classes
Virtual functions
Write programs to implement Pointers to objects
Know the use of this pointer
Write programs to implement Pointers to derived classes
Know the concepts of Virtual function & pure virtual function. Implement them
Managing Console I/O Operations
Understand the concepts of console I/O operations
Learn formatted and unformatted console I/O operations
Know about Manipulators and implement own manipulators
Files
Know all the Classes for file stream operations
Know all the operations and modes of a file
Write programs to implement sequential I/O operations
Learn to update a file in random access with error handling function.
Templates
Know about templates and their uses
Implement function templates, member function templates

Text Book:
1. OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING WITH C++,
4E, E Balaguruswamy, Tata Mc Graw hill
2. OOPS with C++ By Niranjan A., Sapna Publications
References:
1. Object oriented programming in c++, By P B Kottur., Sapna Publications
2. Object oriented programming in c++, Dr.G.T. Thampi, Dr. S.s.Matha,
Dreamtech, 2009 edition,
3. Object oriented programming in c++, Rajesh K Shukla , Wiely Precise text
Book.2008.
4. Object Oriented Programming in Turbo C++ , Robert Lafore.
5. Object Oriented Programming with C++ , Sourav Sahay, Oxford Higher
Education
6. Analysis & Designing Of Algorithms with C/C++ -By Nandagopalan.
 7. C++ Complete Reference, Herbert Schilt. TMH.
8. Programming in C++ , M T Somashekar , PHI
9. Professional C++ , Wiley India (Wrox )
Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: OOP with C++

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.
Marks

Section – I
1. a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/s 5x1=5
i. …… is an alias name given to a variable.
ii. ……. is a special member function that initializes the data members of a class.
iii. The process of deriving one class from more than one base class is called-----
iv. A ……. Function can accept a value of any type.
v. The ------ class provides the functionality for performing read operation from a file.
b) Compare POP V/S OOP. 5
Section – II
2. a) Explain the const qualifier . 5
b) Write a c++ program to illustrate an inline function. 5
c) Explain function Overloading with an example 5
3. a) Define a class. 2
b) Write a program to illustrate constructor overloading. 8
c) Explain the concept of constructor with default arguments. 5
4. a) What is a friend function? Explain with an example. 5
b) How are static data members declared and defined? Explain. 6
c) What is the significance of operator overloading? 4
 Section – III
5. a) Write a c++ program to add two complex objects by overloading the ‘+ ‘operator. 10
b) What is type conversion? 2
c) What is inheritance? List out the types of Inheritance. 3
6. a) What is Multiple Inheritance? Write a c++ program to illustrate
Multiple Inheritance 10
b) Explain the concept of Nesting of Classes. 5
7. a) Explain the use of this pointer. 5
b) . Create a base class called 'SHAPE' having 10
- two data members of type double
- member function get-data( ) to initialize base class data members
- Pure virtual member function display-area ( ) to compute and display the
area of the geometrical object.
Derive two specific classes 'TRIANGLE' and 'RECTANGLE' from
the base class. Using these three classes design a program that will accept
dimension of a triangle / rectangle interactively and display the area.

Section – IV

8. a) With examples explain unformatted I /O operations. 5

b) Explain the built in monitors in C++ with examples. 10
9. a) Write a program to illustrate the user defined manipulators with arguments. 5
b) What are the built in classes for a file? Explain. 6
c) What are the different modes to open a file? 4
10. a) Write a note on command line arguments. 5
b) What is a template? 2
c) Write a program to illustrate class template with multiple parameters. 8
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: OPERATING SYSTEM
Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of content

Chapter No. Content No. of Hours Marks

Section I
1 Introduction to operating systems 8 20
2 Process management 10 26
3 Synchronization 2 5
4 Deadlocks 4 10
Section II
5 Memory management 10 26
6 Virtual memory management 6 15
Section III
7 File system 8 22
8 Implementing file system 8 21
Seminars and Guest lectures from 5
Industry and Institute
Tests 3
Total 64 145

Detailed content

Chapter
No. Content
01 INTRODUCTION TO OPERATING SYSTEMS
1.1 What operating systems do
1.2 Computer System architecture
1.3 Operating System structure
1.4 Operating System operations
1.5 Process management
1.6 Memory management
1.7 Storage management
 1.8 Protection and security
1.9 Distributed system
1.10 Special-purpose systems
1.11 Computing environments.
1.12 Open-source Operating Systems
2 PROCESS MANAGEMENT
2.1 Process concept
2.2 Process scheduling
2.3 Operations on processes
2.4 Inter-process communication
2.5 Process Scheduling: Basic concepts
2.6 Scheduling criteria
2.7 Scheduling algorithms
3 SYNCHRONIZATION
3.1 Background
3.2 The critical section management and semaphores (Concepts only)
4 DEADLOCKS

4.1 System model

4.2 Deadlock characterization
4.3 Methods for handling deadlocks
4.4 Deadlock prevention
4.5 Deadlock avoidance
4.6 Deadlock detection
4.7 Recovery from deadlock
5 MEMORY MANAGEMENT -- STRATEGIES
5.1 Background
5.2 Swapping
5.3 Contiguous memory allocation
5.4 Paging
5.5 Structure of page table
5.6 Segmentation
6 VIRTUAL MEMORY MANAGEMENT
6.1 Background
6.2 Demand paging
6.3 Copy-on-write
6.4 Page replacement
6.5 Allocation of frames
7 FILE SYSTEM
7.1 File concept
7.2 Access methods
7.3 Directory and disk structure
7.4 File system mounting
7.5 File sharing
7.6 Protection
8 IMPLEMENTING FILE SYSTEMS
8.1 File system structure
8.2 File system implementation
8.3 Directory implementation

General Objectives:
1. To provide a grand tour of the major components of the os.
2. To introduce notion of a process which forms the basis of all
computation.
3. To introduce the critical – section problem whose solutions can
be used to ensure the consistency of the shared data.
4. To develop a description of deadlocks.
5. To provide a detailed description of various memory
management techniques.
6. To describe the benefits of a virtual memory system.
7. To explain the function of file system.
8. To describe the details of implementing local file systems and
directory structures.
Specific objectives:

To understand What operating systems do

To develop Computer System architecture
To learn Operating System structure
To discuss Operating System operations
To understand Process management
To understand Memory management
To understand Storage management
To understand Protection and security
To define Distributed system
To define Special-purpose systems
To understand Computing environments.
To define Open-source Operating Systems
To define Process concept
To understand Process scheduling
To describe Operations on processes
To understand Inter-process communication
To understand Process Scheduling: Basic concepts
To define Scheduling criteria
To present Scheduling algorithms
To understand Background of synchronization
To define The critical section management and semaphores (Concepts only)
To understand System model for deadlock
To describe Deadlock characterization
To present Methods for handling deadlocks
To learn about Deadlock prevention

To learn about Deadlock avoidance

To learn about Deadlock detection
To learn about how to Recover from deadlock
To understand of Background memory management strategies
To learn about Swapping
To understand Contiguous memory allocation
To learn about Paging
To present Structure of page table
To learn about Segmentation
To understand Background virtual memory management
To learn about Demand paging
To define Copy-on-write
To understand Page replacement
To present Allocation of frames
To define File concept
To learn the various Access methods
To discuss Directory and disk structure
To learn how to perform File system mounting
To define File sharing
To understand Protection
To understand File system structure
To describe File system implementation
To describe Directory implementation

TEXT BOOK:
1. Operating System Principles – Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin, Greg
Gagne, 8th edition, Wiley-India. (Chapters-1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11)
ISBN- 9788126520510
2. Operating System By Niranjan A, Sapna Publications

Reference Books:
1. Modern Operationg System, Tanenbaum, Third Edition, PHI Publication.
2. System Programming and Operating system, Dhamdhre , TMH
3. Operating Systems a practical approach , 2010 edition , E R Rajiv Chopra ,
S Chand publication
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: Operating System

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.
Marks

Section – I

1. a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/s 5x1=5

i. The program in execution is …………….
ii. A new process is created by ………….
iii . ………. is the number of processes that are executed per unit.
iv. In two-level directory structure, each user has ………….
v. The file system implementation is done through ………….
b) Write a note on Protection and security. 5
Section – II
2. a) What are the advantages of multiprocessor systems? Explain. 5
b) Explain clustered systems. 5
c) Distinguish between traditional computing and client server computing. 5
3. a) Define the process. Explain the process states with diagram. 6
b) Differentiate between long term scheduler v/s c p u scheduler. 4
c) What are the reasons for process co operation? Explain. 5
4. a) Which are the CPU scheduling criteria? Explain 5
b) Consider the following set processes, with the length of CPU burst 10
given in milliseconds:
Process Burst time Priority
P1 10 3
P2 1 1
P3 2 3
P4 1 4
 P5 5 2
The processes are assumed to have arrived in the order p1, p2, p3, p4, p5 all at time 0.
i). Draw the Gantt charts for FCFS and priority scheduling.
ii). What is the turnaround time for each process for each of scheduling
algorithms in part i ?
iii). Calculate average waiting time of each process.
Section – III
5. a) Explain how solve the problem of critical-section through semaphores 5
b) Explain the four necessary conditions for deadlock. 8
c) What do you mean by deadlock avoidance? 2
6. a) What is the significance of swapping ? Explain. 5
b) Explain in detail the paging memory management scheme. 10
7. a) Explain first-fit ,best-fit and worst-fit strategies for memory allocation . 6
b) What is the user view of segmentation? Explain. 5
c) Explain the concept of virtual memory. 4
Section – IV
8. a) Consider the following page reference string
1,2,3,4,2,1,5,6,2,1,2,3,7,6,3,2,1,2,3,6.
How many page faults would occur for the following replacement algorithms,
assuming 4 page frames ?
i) LRU replacement
ii) FIFO replacement
iii) Optimal replacement 10
b) What is a file? Explain its attributes. 5
9. a) What are the operations performed on a directory ? Explain. 6
b) Explain two-level and tree-structured directories. 9
10. a) How to implement a file system ? Explain in detail . 9
b) What is the significance of the virtual file system? Explain. 6
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

Chapter Topics Hours Marks

No
1 The Software Problem 02 05
2 Software Process 10 26
3 Software Requirements Analysis and 08 20
Specifications
4 Software Architecture 06 16
5 Planning a Software Project 06 16
6 Design 10 26
7 Coding 06 16
8 Testing 08 20
Seminars and Guest Lectures from industry 05
and institutes
Test 03
Total 64 145

Detailed Contents

1 The Software Problem

1.1 Cost, Schedule and quality
1.2 Scale and Change

2 Software Processes
2.1 Process and Project
2.2 Component Software Processes
2.3 Software development Process Models
2.3.1 Waterfall
2.3.2 Prototyping
2.3.3 Iterative development
2.3.4 Rational Unified Process
2.3.5 Time boxing Model
2.3.6 Extreme programming and Agile processes
2.3.7 Using process model in a project
2.4 Project Management Process
3 Software Requirements Analysis and Specifications
3.1 Value of good SRS
3.2 Requirement process
3.3 Requirement Specification
3.3.1 Desirable Characteristics of an SRS
3.3.2 Components of an SRS
3.3.3 Structure of a Requirements Documents
3.4 Functional Specification with use cases
Basics
Examples
Extensions
Developing use cases
3.5 Other Approaches for Analysis
Data Flow Diagram
Entity Relationship Diagrams
3.6 Validation

4 Software Architecture
4.1 Role of Software Architecture
4.2 Architecture Views
4.3 Component and Connector view
4.3.1 Components
4.3.2 Connectors
4.3.3 Example
4.4 Architecture styles for C&C View
4.4.1 Pipe and Filter
4.4.2 Shared data Style
4.4.3 Client Server style
4.4.4 Some other styles
4.5 Documenting Architecture Design
4.6 Evaluating Architectures

5 Planning a Software Project

5.1 Effort Estimation
5.1.1. Top-Down Estimation Approach
5.1.2 Bottom-Up Estimation Approach
5.2 Project Schedule and Staffing
5.3 Quality Planning
5.4 Risk Management Planning
5.4.1 Risk Management Concepts
5.4.2 Risk Assessment
5.4.3 Risk Control
5.4.4 A Practical Risk Management Approach
5.5 Project Monitoring Plan
5.5.1 Measurements
 5.5.2 Project Monitoring and tracking
5.6 Detailed Scheduling

6 Design
6.1 Design Concepts
6.1.1 Coupling
6.1.2 Cohesion
6.1.3 The Open-Closed Principle
6.2 Function Oriented Design
6.2.1 Structure Charts
6.2.2 Structured Design Methodology
6.2.3 Example
6.3 Object Oriented Design
6.3.1 OO Concepts
6.3.2 Unified Modeling language (UML )
6.3.3 A Design Methodology
6.3.4 Examples
6.4 Detailed Design
6.4.1 Logic/Algorithm Design
6.4.2 State Modeling of Classes
6.5 Verification

7 Coding
7.1 Programming Principles and Guidelines
7.1.1 Structured Programming
7.1.2 Information Hiding
7.1.3 Some Programming Practices
7.1.4 Coding Standards
7.2 Incrementally Developing Code
7.2.1 An incremental coding process
7.2.2 Test Driven development
7.2.3 Pair Programming
7.3 Managing Evolving Code
7.3.1 Source Code Control and Build
7.3.2 Refactoring
7.4 Unit Testing
7.4.1 Testing procedural units
7.4.2 Unit testing of Classes
7.5 Code Inspection
7.5.1 Planning
7.5.2 Self review
7.5.3 Group review meeting

8 Testing
8.1 Testing Concept
 8.1.1 Error, Fault and Failure
8.1.2 Test Case, Test Suite and Test Harness
8.1.3 Psychology of Testing
8.1.4 Levels of Testing
8.2 Testing Process
8.2.1 Test Plan
8.2.2 Test Case Design
8.2.3 Test Case Execution
8.3 Black Box Testing
8.3.1 Equivalence Class Partitioning
8.3.2 Boundary value Analysis
8.3.3 Pair Wise Testing
8.3.4 Special Cases
8.3.5 State based testing
8.4 White Box testing
8.4.1 Control Flow Based Criteria
8.4.2 Test Case Generation and Tool Support

General Objectives :

1 Know how costs, schedule and quality drive a software project

2 Learn the role of software process and a process model in a project
3 Understand the role of SRS in a project and how requirements are validated
4 Understand the software architectural views
5 Learn planning and estimation of a software project
6 Know the key design concepts of software engineering
7 Learn the structured code inspection process
8 Learn how testing is planned and testing done

Specific Objectives:

1 The Software Problem

Differentiate between a student software and an industrial-strength software
Learn the software quality attributes
Learn the additional software quality attributes : Scale and Change
2 Software Processes
Define Process, Project, Process Model
Learn the components of software processes
Explain different Software Development Process Models
Illustrate temporal relationship between development and management process
3 Software Requirement Analysis and Specification
Learn the value of Good SRS
Explain the tasks involved in the requirement process
 Appraise the characteristics of a SRS
Explain the components of SRS
Describe the general structure of SRS
Learn the functional specification with use cases with examples
Learn the levels of abstraction used for developing Use cases
Explain DFD , ERD
Learn how a SRS should be validated
4 Software Architecture
Appraise the role of software architecture
Discuss architectural views
Explain component and connector view
Learn various Architecture Styles for C&C view
Learn Documenting Architecture Design and Evaluation
5 Planning a Software Project
Learn how to estimate effort and schedule for the project to establish project goals and
mile stones and team size
How to establish quality goals for the project and prepare a quality plan
Identify high-priority risk that can threaten the success of the project and plan for their
mitigation
How to plan for monitoring a project using measurements to check if a project is
progressing as per plan
How to develop a detailed task schedule for the overall estimates and planning task
6 Design
Identify the key design concepts
Learn the structure chart notation for expressing the structure of a function oriented
system
Learn key concepts related to OO and UML that can be used to express an OOD
Learn the guidelines for making a detailed design
Learn to verify a design
7 Coding
Know the programming principles and guidelines
Appraise coding standards
Learn the effective processes that developers use for incremental developing code
Explain how to manage evolving code by using proper source code control and
refactoring
Explain unit Testing
Learn the process of code inspection
8 Testing
Learn the concepts and definition relating to testing
Appraise how testing is planned and how unit test is done
Learn to test case selection using black box and white box testing approaches
Textbook:

1. Software Engineering –A Precise Approach, Pankaj Jalote, edition 2010, Wiley India,
ISBN: 9788126523115.

References:
1. Software Engineering A Practitioners Approach, Roger S Pressman, 2010,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, ISBN 9780070701137
2. Software Engineering, Sajan Mathew, 2009 Reprint, S Chand publications
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fourth Semester
Subject: Software Engineering

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.

Section - I
1 a. Fill in the blanks 5x1=5
i. Once the software is delivered and deployed it enters _____________ phase
ii. ___________ is a critical activity in software development
iii. ___________ are commonly used during problem analysis
iv. A _________ connects a client to a server.
v. A testing frame work is also called as ______________

b. Write a short note on white box testing 5

Section – II
2. a) Define Software quality attributes 5
b) Explain with a neat diagram the components of software processes 10
3 a) Explain any one software development process mode? 10
b) Which is more important – the process or the product? Why? 5
4 a) Explain the desirable Characteristics of SRS 10
b) Write a short note on DFD 5
Section-III
5 a) What is requirement analysis? Explain briefly 10
b) What is software architecture 5
6 a) What are the steps taken for avoiding, monitoring and managing risk 10
 b) Write a short note on software project planning 5
7. a) What is the relevance of design concept cohesion 5
b) Explain coupling, functional dependences 10

Section -IV
8. a) Explain the design concepts in software engineering 10
b) Differentiate between flowchart and structure chart 5
9. a) Write a note on information hiding 5
b) Explain test driven development 10
10. a) Explain test case execution 10
b) Define boundary value analysis 5
 GOVT. OF KARNATAKA
DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION
Subject Title : Basic Management Skills &
Indian constitution

Q P Code :
Hours Per Week : 04
Hours Per Semester : 64

BASIC MANAGEMENT SKILLS & INDIAN CONSTITUTION

TOPIC ANALYSIS
Hours Weightage of
SL.No Major Topics
Allotted Marks
SECTION-I
1 Management Skills 09 15
2 Operations Management 12 35
SECTION-II
3 Total Preventive Maintenance 04 10
4 Total Quality Management 06 20
5 Safety and Environmental issues 06 20
SECTTION-III
6 Indian Constitution 08 20
7 Parliamentary System and procedures 05 10
8 Empowerment of Women 08 15
9 Environmental Awareness and Industry 03 -
Innovations
Tests 03 -
Total 64 145

CONTENTS

1. MANAGEMENT SKILLS

1.1 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS.

1.11 Know Thyself/ self –Discovery.
1.12 Know others and understand the perspective of others.
1.13 Intergroup communications.
1.14 Art Of Communications
 1.2 TEAM BUILDING and TEAMWORK SKILLS.

1.21 Aspects of team building.

1.22 Team v/s Group.
1.23 Inter group collaboration.

2. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
2.1 Production & Productivity
2.1.1 Stages involved in Product Design
2.1.2 Factors considered while designing a Product
2.1.3 Types of Production
2.1.4 Factors to improve Productivity
2.2 Production, Planning & Control
2.3 Make or Buy Decision
2.3.1 Criteria considered for make or buy decision
2.3.2 Analysis for make or buy decision
2.4 Purchasing
2.4.1 Methods of Purchasing Material or Component
2.4.2 Steps involved in purchasing of material or component
2.5 Stores Management
2.5.1 Methods of Storing
2.5.2 Tools required for Stores Management
2.5.3 Codification System
2.6 Logistics Management
2.6.1 Different means of Transportation
2.6.2 Routing & Delays, Tracing, Packaging & Material Handling,
Damage Claims, Demurrage Charges and Insurance Buying
2.7 Inventory & Inventory Control
2.7.1 Functions of Inventory Control
2.7.2 Inventory Control Techniques
2.7.3 Inventory Management Software
2.8 Introduction to MRP and ERP

3.TOTAL PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.1 Maintenance and concept of TPM

3.2 Economics involved in preventive maintenance
3.3 Techniques of TPM
3.4 Benefits of TPM
3.5 Planned Maintenance and Predictive Maintenance
4. TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
4.1 Quality and Inspection
4.1.1 Factors affecting Quality
4.1.2 Relation between Quality & Cost
4.1.3 Quality Control
4.2 Concept of TQM
4.2.1 Tools and Techniques of TQM
4.3 Quality Management System
4.3.1 I.S.O 9000:2000 Quality Standards
4.3.2 Procedures and Documentation of ISO 9000 certification

5. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

5.1 Accident and Safety
5.2 Accident Prevention, Accident Reporting and Crisis Management
5.3 Safety provisions under Indian Factories Act
5.4 Safety Management System-OSHAS 18001
5.5 Environmental issues addressed by organization

6. INDIAN CONSTITUTION

6.1 Indian Constitution-Formation of Constituent Assembly-Framing of the

Constitution-Drafting Committee-Contributions of Dr. B R Ambedkar,
Chairman of Drafting Committee and the members in drafting a
constitution for India.
6.2 Preamble-objectives-Directive principles
6.3 Features of Constitution
6.4 Fundamental Rights
6.5 Fundamental duties
6.6 Amendments for Indian Constitution
6.7 Human Rights

7. PARLIAMENTARY SYSTEMS AND PROCEDURES.

7.1 Government-Meaning-organs-functions.
7.2 Parliament-meaning-Two houses-Lok Sabha-Composition-election-
Presiding officer-term-RajyaSabha- Composition-election-Presiding
officer-term
7.3 Powers of parliament
7.4 Executive Role - President-Vice President-Prime Minister-Council of
Ministers
7.5 Indian Judiciary system-Supreme Court-High Court-subordinate courts
7.6 Constitutional bodies-Election Commission-Public Service Commission-
Finance Commission
7.7 Structure of State government- State Legislature-Governor-Chief
Minister-Council of Ministers
 7.8 Local self government-meaning-Three tier system-Village panchayath-
taluk panchayath-Zilla panchayath
7.9 Local bodies-Municipalities and Corporations

8.0 EMPOWERMENT OF WOMEN.

8.1 Concept, Definition and need for Women's Empowerment

8.2 Strategies, approaches, process, levels, principles and indicators for
women’s empowerment.
8.3 Gender statistics in India – Glaring inequalities
8.4 Women and Development:
8.4.1 Goals and Objectives of National Policy for Women's
Empowerment
8.4.2 Advancement of Women through Five-Year Plans
8.4.3 Special Programs for Women's Development.
8.5 Constitutional Provisions towards Women's Rights and Special
Legislations for Women.
8.6 Case Studies.

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. MANAGEMENT SKILLS
1.1 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS.
1.11.1 Importance of knowing yourself-Process of knowing yourself.
1.11.2 SWOT analysis-Benefits of SWOT analysis
1.11.3 SWOT analysis grid and questions to complete the grid.
1.12.1 Importance of knowing others-Process of knowing others.
1.13.1 Resolving Win/Lose Situations into win/win through inter group
communications.
1.14.1 Defining communication- Special features of communication.
1.14.2 Communication process- Channels of communication.
1.14.3 Formal and informal communication network.
1.14.4 Barriers to communication- Tips of effective communication.
1.14.5 Tips of powerful presentation- Art of public speaking- Importance of
public speaking- Benefits of public speaking- Public speaking tips.

1.2 TEAM WORK AND TEAMWORK

1.21.1 Meaning and aspects of team building- Skills needed for teamwork-
A model of team building.
1.22.1 Team v/s Group- Characteristics of a effective team- Role of a team
leader- Role of a team members- A successful team of nine persons.
1.23.1 Inter group collaboration- Advantages of inter group collaboration.
 1.23.2 Difficulties faced in inter-group collaboration.
1.23.3 Factors shaping inter group collaboration.

2. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
2.1 Define Production & Productivity
2.1.1 Explain various stages involved in product design
2.1.2 List factors considered while designing a product
2.1.3 Explain Job, Batch & Mass production with their advantages and
disadvantages
2.1.4 List factors to improve/increase productivity
2.2 State the functions of PPC- planning, routing, scheduling, dispatching and
inspection
2.3 State the importance of make or buy decision
2.3.1 List the criteria considered for make or buy decision
2.3.2 Briefly explain methods of analysis for make or buy decision-
Simple cost analysis, Break even analysis & Economic analysis
2.4 Define purchasing
2.4.1 Explain briefly different methods of purchasing the material or
component.
2.4.2 Explain the steps involved in purchasing of Material or Component
2.5 Explain Stores Management
2.5.1 Explain different methods of storing
2.5.2 Explain briefly Bin Card, Material Issue Requisition, Material
Returned Note and Store Ledger
2.5.3 Explain advantages and systems of Codification
2.6 Explain Logistics Management
2.6.1 Explain different means of transportation
2.6.2 Explain Routing & Delays, Tracing, Packaging & Material
Handling, Damage Claims, Demurrage Charges and Insurance
Buying
2.7 Define Inventory and Inventory Control
2.7.1 List important functions of Inventory Control
2.7.2 Explain briefly Inventory Control Techniques – ABC, VED, SDE,
MNG Analysis
2.7.3 List few Inventory Management Softwares
2.8 Describe about MRP & ERP. List the software’s used

3. TOTAL PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.1 Explain Maintenance and explain the concept of TPM
3.2 Explain the economics involved in preventive maintenance
3.3 Describe the techniques of TPM
3.4 List the benefits of TPM
3.5 Explain planned maintenance and predictive maintenance

4. TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

 4.1 Define Quality, Inspection & explain its importance
4.1.1 List factors affecting quality
4.1.2 Explain the relation between cost & quality
4.1.3 Define and Explain quality control
4.2 Explain concept of TQM
4.2.1 Explain briefly tools & techniques of TQM – Flow charts, Control
charts, Histograms, Pareto charts, Check sheets, Scatter diagram,
Cause and effect diagram, 5-S, Poka-yoke, Kaizen, Re-engineering
and Six-sigma
4.3 Define QMS
4.3.1 Explain briefly I.S.O 9000:2000 Quality Standards – ISO 9000, ISO
9001 & ISO 9004
4.3.2 Explain procedures and documentation involved in ISO 9000 series
certification

5. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

5.1 Define accident and safety
5.2 Explain accident prevention, accident reporting and crisis management
5.3 List the safety provisions under Indian Factories Act
5.4 Explain Safety Management System-OSHAS 18001
5.5 Give a brief summary of ISO 14000 series and IS16949 & IS16959
certifications

6. INDIAN COSTITUTION

6.1 Introduction to Indian Constitution

6.2 Discuss the Formation of Constituent Assembly
6.3 Discuss the Contributions of Dr. B R Ambedkar as a Chairman of Drafting
Committee and the members in drafting a constitution for India.
6.4 Discuss Preamble and its main objectives
6.5 State the Directive principles
6.6 Discuss the Features of Constitution
6.7 Mention the number of parts, articles, schedules and discuss the article -1
6.8 Discuss Fundamental Rights
6.9 Discuss Fundamental duties
6.10 Explain the Amendment and its procedure
6.11 Discuss Human Rights and its significance

7. PARLIAMENTARY SYSTEM

7.1 Discuss the Parliamentary system of Government.

7.2 Discuss the about:
7.2.1 Loka Sabha: Composition, election, Presiding officer and term
7.2.2 RajyaSabha: Composition, election, Presiding officer and term
7.3 Powers of parliament
7.3.1How law is made, three readings
 7.3.2Diffrence between Bill and act
7.3.3Administrative control- Explain importance of questioning- concept
of Question hour- concept of zero hour
7.3.4 Briefly explain about Confidence motion and Censure motion
7.4 Explain the meaning of the budget
7.5 President-Vice President-Prime Minister-Council of Ministers their
appointments and functions
7.6 Discuss the formation and functions of supreme court-High court-
Subordinate court.
7.7 Discuss the importance of Constitutional bodies-Election Commission-
Public Service Commission-Finance Commission
7.8 Discuss the about state legislature:
7.8.1 Legislative assembly: Composition, election, Presiding officer and
term
7.8.2 Legislative council: Composition, election, Presiding officer and
term
7.9 Governor-Chief Minister-Council of Ministers their appointments and
functions
7.10 Local self government-meaning-Three tier system
7.11 Discuss the formation and functions of Village panchayath-taluk
panchayath-Zilla panchayath and urban local bodies such as
Municipalities and Corporations

8. Empowerment of Women

8.1 Explain the Concept and Definition of Women's Empowerment.

8.2 Discuss the different strategies, approaches, process, levels, principles and
indicators for women's empowerment.
8.3 Discuss the Gender statistics in India – Glaring inequalities.
8.4 Explain Women and Development
8.4.1 List the Goals and Objectives of National Policy-2001 for
Women's Empowerment.
8.4.2 Discuss the emphasis given on the Advancement of Women
through Five-Year Plans.
8.4.3 List the Various Special Programs for Women's
Development from government.
8.5 State Constitutional Provisions towards Women's Rights -Fundamental
Rights Article 14, 15, 15(3), 16-Directive of State Policy Article 39,42-
Fundamental Duties 51(A)(e) and Reservation of seats Article 243(D)(3),
Article 243(T)(3) - explain the following Special Legislation for Women-
Dowry Prohibition Act 1961, Domestic Violence Act 2005,Sexual
Harassment at Workplace Bill 2006, Equal Remuneration Act 1976,Hindu
succession Act,1956, Prenatal diagnostic techniques (regulation and
prevention of misuse) act,1994.
8.6 Case Studies.
Reference Books:
1. Soft Skills- by Dr. K. Alex, S Chand & Company Ltd.
1 Total Quality Management- Prof. Dr. H D Ramachandra
2 Industrial Organization and Engineering Economics- T.R.Banga
& S C Sharma
2 Total Quality Management- S Raja Ram, M Shivashankar.
3 Industrial management and organizational behavior- K.K.Ahuja
4 Industrial management and engineering economics- O.P.khanna
5 Production and operations management-Dr .K.Aswathappa and
Dr.Sreedhar Bhatt- Himalaya publishers
6 Introduction to the Constitution of India- Dr. Durga Das Basu
7 The constitution of India - P.M.Bhakshi- Universal law
publishers
8 Our constitution-National Book Trust of India
9 Our Parliament-National Book Trust of India
10 Our Judiciary-National Book Trust of India
11 Empowerment of rural women in India-Hemalatha H.M and
Rameshwari Varma,Hema Prakashana.
12 The right to development-centre for development and human
rights-Sage Publications.
13 Industrial Engg. &Mgmt Science By- T R Banga & SC Sharma.

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

FIFTH SEMESTER

BASIC MANAGEMENT SKILLS & INDIAN CONSTITUTION

Time: 3Hrs Max marks: 100
Part-I is compulsory and Answer any two full questions from Part-II, Part-III, and
Part-IV

PART- I
1. A) Fill in the blanks with appropriate words:- 5X1=5
I) The Constitution of India came into effect on ______________.
ii) The term of the chairperson of Rajyasabha is_________ years
iii) ______________ is an unforeseen event
 iv) The ISO ______________ is related with Environmental management systems
v) Increased ________ leads to the benefits for both employer and employee
B) State the qualities of a good leader 5

PART-II
2 a) Explain SWOT analysis-Mention benefits of SWOT analysis 5
b) Explain special features of communication. 5
c) Explain Formal and informal communication network. 5
3 a) Explain the motivating factors 5
b) State the qualities of a good leader 5
c) Explain the process of team building 5
4 a) State the characteristics of entrepreneur 5
b) Lists the steps involved for setting up small scale/Medium scale industries
c) Define outsourcing and mention its features 5
PART-III
5 a) State the functions of Production planning and Production control 5
b) Define inventory and inventory control 5

c) State the importance of material management 5

6 a) Explain the total productive maintenance . 5

b) List the various types of preventive measures to avoid an accident 5

c) List the factors affecting quality 5

7 a) Explain the concept of Total quality management 5
b) List the various types SQC tools 5

c) State the importance of material management 5

PART-IV
8 a) What is a constitution? 5
b) Why Dr. B R Ambedkar is known as architect of Indian Constitution? 5
c) What is sovereignty? 5
9 a) Why is there a need to Economic, social and political justice in India? 5

b) Explain three tier panchayath system 5

 c) Mention the salient features of Indian constitution. 5
10 a) what are the approaches to empowerment of women? 5
b) List the goals and objectives of national policy for women's empowerment.5
c) Write a note on dowry prohibition act. 5

Question Bank on Indian Constitution

1. What is a government?
2. What is a constitution?
3. Why constitution is called the rule of the State?
4. Write the importance of the constitution.
5. To draft a constitution to India was the most challenging task. Why?
6. What are the contributions of Dr. B R Ambedkar in drafting a constitution for
India?
7. What is the importance of republic day?
8. What is the importance of preamble?
9. Why is preamble said to be the soul of the constitution?
10. What is sovereignty?
11. What is the objective of Socialism?
12. The principle of Secularism is suitable to India. How?
13. Why is India called republic?
14. Why is there a need to Economic, social and political justice in India?
15. Mention the aspects which strengthen the bond of fraternity in India?
16. In the present context unity and integrity are most essential in India. Why?
17. Though Directive principles are not enforceable by law they are important in the
constitution. How?

18. Mention the salient features of Indian constitution.

19. How is written constitution, advantageous than unwritten constitution?
20. Indian constitution is one of the lengthiest constitution. Mention the factors to
substantiate the statement.
21. State the notable features borrowed from the following constitutions: a) U. S. A.
b) England c) Ireland d) Canada.
22. Why is Indian constitution termed as flexible constitution?
23. What is universal Adult Franchise?
24. Write the advantages of single citizenship.
25. Why is Indian judiciary said to be an independent judiciary?

25. What is the importance of Fundamental rights?

27. How can it be said that Fundamental rights are not absolute?
28. Mention the Fundamental rights.
29. Give reasons as to why certain sections of the society are provided concessions
and privileges in spite of right to equality.
30. How does cultural and educational right protect the interests of the minorities?
31. Mention the right introduced in 2010 under right to equality what is the
importance of it?
32. Name the right that bans child labour and provides protection to women against
exploitation.
33. The right to Constitutional remedies is said to be the heart and soul of our
constitution. Why is it said so?

34. Rights and Duties are like the two sides of the same coin - Substantiate the
statement.
35. Mention a few fundamental duties that you have to follow as a citizen of this
country.
36. When and in which the fundamental duties part of the constitution was
incorporated?

37. Name the body that has powers to amend the provisions of the constitution in
India.
38. What is the procedure followed in parliament to amend the provisions of
Fundamental rights and Directive principles?

39. Write the procedures to be followed to amend the constitutional provisions.

 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Fifth Semester

Sub: COMMUNICATION AND ANALYSIS SKILL DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMME

(CASP)

HOURS/WEEK: 06 TOTAL HOURS: 96

Competence to be developed in learners:

I. To present orally any topic of the student’s interest to the rest of the class without the
assistance of media or any other aid (only talk) for at least 10 minutes creating interest in
the listeners and sustaining the interest with a meaningful conclusion.
II. To prepare a study report on any product/service in comparison with another one that is
comparable from technical specification to customer satisfaction.
III. To present with the aid of slides (6 to 10) about the study conducted above to the rest of
the class in about 10 minutes with the use of print for information and slides for graphs,
pictures, images, video and animations etc.

Note to teachers:

 A teacher may guide only 6 to a maximum of ten students per year. This is to ensure
active participation of each learner.
 All 96 hours need NOT be contact hours by the teacher. Students may be encouraged to
do activities on their own with peer group to ensure higher level of participation.
 There are ten different tasks to be completed in the course of 96 hours. On completion
of each task, record the result and the marks along with the initials of the learner for
future reference, inspection and evaluation.
 A few activities are suggested under each task. Teachers can improvise on the list and
add more activities as they progress from one batch to another.
 Students should not be compared with each other; instead they must be compared to the
standards given against each task.
 The standard suggested is minimum requirement, learners may excel. The services of
those who excel may be utilised to guide other learners to reach the suggested minimum.
 The tasks 8, 9 and 10 may be evaluated in the presence of the total group so that learners
get the benefit of knowing the inferences made by others and even their presentation
style.

Details of tasks must be completed:

(One group consists of maximum 6 nos.)
Task 1 – Communication skills (one to one personal communication). 6 hrs. 5 marks.
Method of achieving task: Practice in pairs through role play
Suggested activities:
1. Telephonic conversation of a customer and supplier.
2. A computer product show room sales person and a customer.
3. Negotiation between marketing representative of a computer firm and a technical
representative at a polytechnic
 Standards to be met:
 Given a telephone number, a student must be able to call and gather information
from the person, sustaining the conversation for about 3 min using proper
etiquettes and report on the enquiry made about the product or service. [e.g., call
a toll free number to ask details about a product or service]
 Given a situation, a student must be able to talk to a person face to face in
simulation, gather information about a product, discuss about it and also
negotiate with him in the specified time (here, time can be specified by the
teacher as per the need).

Task 2 – Communication exercise (one to many in simulation) 6 hrs. 5 marks.

.
Method of achieving task: Student should pick a topic and make presentation
Suggested Activities:
1. A very short talk highlighting the features of a branded computer peripheral (Printer,
Scanners, Router, Intelligent Switches, etc)
2. A creative advertisement sequence for a consumer product being eco friendly.
3. A debate on increasing the productivity for a software industry.
Panel discussion on saving consumption of power in Computer industry

Standards to be met:
 Given a brochure, one must be able to study about the product and understand it
in 15 min and talk about it to his group highlighting its features and explain it in
about 3 min.
 A student must be able to identify a topic of interest for debate, initiate the
debate and carry it on, dividing the group into two based on different
perspectives(e.g., For and against the topic

Task 3 – Listening Skills: 6 hrs. 5 marks.

Method of achieving task: Listen to an advertisement and record the message

Suggested Activities:
1. View an advertisement of a branded computer product and write down the message
behind.
2. Listen to the audio in a promotional CD for about 15 minutes of any chosen product or
service. Note down points and discuss among friends.
3. View a downloaded video of an open source product for15 minutes and write down the
summary in a paragraph of 20 lines.
4. Listen to a lecture on a computer topic from www.academicearth.org for about 30
minutes and write a summary in 200 words.

Standards to be met:
 Given an audio clip or a visual of an advertisement, one must be able to listen
carefully and understand it enabling him to write the message behind it in the
specified time (say in about 5 min.).
 A student must be able to listen to a lecture or watch a CD for 15 min, noting
down the key points and write a summary in 200 words in the next 15 min.
Note: Hints taken and the summary must be hand written by the student and
documented for evaluation.
Task 4 – Reading skills: 6 hrs. 5 marks.

Method of achieving task: Read commercially available literature and make presentation
Suggested activities:
1. Read an article from an e-magazine about cloud computing and talk to the rest of the
group in about 5 minutes.
2. Read an advertisement of a new released computer product by a company and elaborate
its qualities after collecting information from a different source like the company web
site and a few customers.
3. Read an article on designing a System (Payroll, ERP, Railway reservation ETC) from
the internet and discuss the merits.
4. Read an article on Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) packages from the internet and
discuss the merits relevant to industry
5. Read a note on usage of automated material handling system and storage retrieval
system from any technical journal and narrate in the class.

Standards to be met:
 Given an article from a journal or an advertisement from a magazine, one must
be able to comprehend it in 15 to 20 min. Later on read it out to an audience,
with proper intonation and elaborate it in the next 10 min.
 Given an article from the internet, a student must be able to gather more
information from the net about it, understand it and read it out for an audience
and narrate it.

Task 5- Writing Skills: 12 hrs. 10 marks.

Method of achieving task: Prepare a resume in writing& highlighting the skill sets
Suggested activities:

1. Write a resume and a covering letter for three different jobs

1) Wanted skilled technician for a Software Testing industry.
2) Wanted technician who is proficient in Computer Networking for an MNC.
3) Wanted Technician for Networking for a software
2. Write a synopsis for given topics such as Information Storage and retrieval.
3. Write a summary on latest technology in Mobile Computing.
4. Write an essay on any topic related to recent trends in IT for 150 words to 200 words.

Standards to be met:
 Given a job advertisement, a student must be able to write a suitable
resume and a covering letter in 30 min [Advertisements can be tailor-
made by the teacher deliberately to train their students- e.g., two
different jobs like a marketing person and an assistant in a Research &
Development section and train students to prepare two resume for these
jobs highlighting different achievements of the student in co-curricular
activities to suit each job]
  Given a topic, a student must be able to write a synopsis or summary or
an essay in about 150 words in the stipulated time.
Note: All these have to be hand written by the learner and documented for
evaluation.

Task 6- Knowledge of using Internet: 6 hrs. 5 marks.

Method of achieving task: Use the internet and perform the task identified
Suggested activities:

1. Creating an e-group with a free internet service provider among friends and act as a
moderator in turn among a group of learners.
2. Contacting other related groups from the net and communicating to them exchanging
views and ideas. Mobilising a signature campaign on the net for a common cause and
redressing it to an authority.
3. Collecting data from net
For example
1) Advanced fabrication technologies for IC manufacturing
2) Nanotechnology as applied to electronics
4. Forwarding resumes to different jobs.

Standards to be met:
 Given an access to internet, one must be able to create an email ID, send mails,
forward simple mails and also mails with attachments including scanned
attachments and URL (web addresses for direct link). Also, they must be able to
collect data from different websites using internet search engines and forward
resumes to different job offering companies.
Note: Printouts of the mails, replies received and also the attachments with date
and time have to be documented.

Task 7- Oral communication: 12 hrs. 5 marks.

Method of achieving task: Conduct group discussion on a specific topic and record the
discussions
Suggested activities:

1. Debate on current topics like Proprietary OS versus open source.

2. Group discussion on latest developments in web technologies.
3. Discussion on qualities required for an adaptive developer.
4. Debate on role of one proprietary software against another in the field of RDBMS.

Standards to be met:
 Given a topic of relevance, they must be able to form groups and discuss/debate
on it. Also one must take cue and participate actively in a group discussion .
Encourage students to note down the points of discussion and file the points in
the portfolio for evaluation.
 Task 8- Data analysis: 18 hrs. 10 marks.
.
Method of achieving task: Collecting actual market data and analysing for meaningful
inferences
Suggested activities:
1. Collect data for any two products/equipments of two different producers used in software
industry which includes technical details, specifications, cost and customer satisfaction.
2. Use appropriate tools and collect data from authentic sources. Depending on the source
decide the number of units for collecting the data.
3. Analyse the data with a view to compare the two products/ equipments.
4. Interpret the analysis for meaningful conclusions.
5. Record the whole process for any other person to verify.

Standards to be met:
 Given two products/equipments/service, one must collect adequate information
from an authentic source for each, like the company website or the printed
brochure and record the specifications.
 The maintenance of quality of the product/service needs to be studied from
personnel working at different levels in the company(3 -5 in number) for each
product/service. A set of questions needs to be prepared for collecting data. The
same questionnaire has to be used for collecting data from the personnel
mentioned above.
 One must compare the two products for all the parameters based on the
specifications. Also, a market survey has to be done preparing a printed
questionnaire of around 5 questions and collecting responses from 20 customers.
Then, analyse the data, compare them and interpret the analysis for meaningful
conclusions.
Note: This being a comprehensive task may require few weeks to finish. The
data collected and the analysis carried out need to be documented.

Task 9-Presentation Skills: 12 hrs. 10 marks.

Method of achieving task: Present the data collected and analysed in Task 8 to group of
students.
Student should present the report of the activities conducted under Task 8 for about 10
minutes supported by few slides (6 to 10) of pictures, graphs, images etc. The text material
if any may be printed and given to the audience. Discourage students from using text
material in slides.

Standards to be met:
 One must present the analysis done in task 8 using slides with pictures, graphs,
images etc in 10 min. The first slide may contain text only as per need but other
slides should preferably have pictures and images. Usage of graphs for
comparison and analysis is preferred. Text materials have to be given as
handouts to the audience.

Task-10- Pick & Speak:(Technical ) 12 hrs. 5 marks.

Method of achieving task: Pick and speak on any topic at spot
Suggested activities:
Pick a topic from a lot and student should be allowed to speak for the duration of
2 to 3 minutes without the aid of any other media.
 Standards to be met:
 One must be able to talk extempore for 2 min on any topic picked randomly
from the lot, given a time of two minutes for organising his/her thoughts. The
topics can be kept simple and general (current events of interest like cricket or
tsunami). It must be totally an oral activity without the aid of any other media.

Suggested topics for presentation, discussion, and written & other skill development
 GRID computing
 Cloud computing
 Ubiquitous computing
 Semantic web mining
 Service Oriented Architecture
 Object Oriented Design and Modelling
 FOSS
 Pattern recognition & Image processing
 3G & 4G
 Embedded systems
 Reverse software Engineering
 WLAN
 WCDMA
 IPHONE-5G
 Blue-ray technology
 RTOS
 AJAX
 IPOD
 PYTHON
 PERL
 Software Quality Assurance
 SOAP
 Neural Networks
 Artificial intelligence
 Expert systems
 Data mining
 SAP
 .NET Applications
 Computer graphics
 Fuzzy logic
 Data compression techniques
 Hi speed data networks
 Wi-Fi
 VOIP
 Temporal databases
 Spatial databases
 Any Other related new technologies
FORMAT OF LOG SHEET *
Sl.No. Date Task Progress of Initials of staff in charge and Evaluation
Task the student (as suggested in each
task)

Signature of Guide Signature of HOD

 All documented work as described in each task need to be filed in a portfolio

with task no.1 at the bottom and task 10 on top.
 The log sheet may be filed on top.
 Learners need to have only one portfolio which contains all original documents.
Duplicate copies need not be maintained. This is to ensure the authenticity of
data collected and the analysis conducted on the data.

SCHEME OF EVALUATION
(Total no. of students in one batch for end examination should not exceed 10)

1. Maintenance of portfolio & log book. 10

2. Evaluation of prepared report on all ten tasks 65
3. End examination:
A portfolio evaluation is recommended for the end examination evaluating the
record of all ten activities of each individual learner for consistency and in case of
any discrepancy the learner may be assessed on the criteria given against each task.
Marks awarded for evaluating the portfolio - 50
Total= 125.

Note to End examination evaluators:

 Check the genuineness and authenticity of all recorded activities in the portfolio.
 The learner may be asked to do one activity of the choice of the examiner which
involves listening to instructions, writing a small paragraph of 50 words, reading it and
talking for a few minutes.
 The learner may be asked about his satisfaction of the marks awarded and in case of any
mismatch the examiner may assess his performance and alter the portfolio assessment
(here the benefit of doubt may be in favour of the learner i.e., an improvement may be
recorded but in case the examiner feels that the marks awarded is more the same may
be retained).
 Do not compare the performance of one student with that of another.
 Always compare the performance of a learner to the given standard.
 Total time taken for the evaluation of a portfolio need not exceed 15 minutes

Recommended text book for the prescribed syllabus:

Ashan Academy (2011), Communication and Analysis skills, Orient
Blackswan, Hyderabad.
 References:

1. Chakravarthi K. T. & Chakravarthi L. T. (2011), Soft Skills for Managers,

biztantra, New Delhi.
2. Alex K., (2009), Soft Skills: S. Chand & company Ltd, New Delhi.
3. Pink M. A. & S. E. Thomas. : Communication Skills, S. Chand & company
Ltd, New Delhi.
4. Siddons S. (2008), Presentation Skills, Universities Press, Hyderabad.
5. Adler.: Communication : Goals and Approaches, Cengage Learning.
6. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_Language_Skills_Assessment
7. http://www.how-to-write-a-resume.org/resume_writing_examples.html
8. http://www.mindtools.com/page8.html
9. http://lorien.ncl.ac.uk/ming/Dept/Tips/present/present.html
10. http://www.doaj.org/
11. http://www.openj-gate.com/
12. http://www.linuxalt.com/
13. http://www.linux.ie/newusers/alternatives.php
14. http://www.econsultant.com/i-want-open-source-software/index.html
15. http://www.opensourcemac.org/
16. http://www.opencascade.org/

In case during the implementation of CASP any teacher has a suggestion to improve the
learners competence concerning any one of the ten tasks or any other additional one please feel
free to mail to the following addresses: 1) [email protected] or 2) [email protected]
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject: Programming with Java Lab

Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96

1 Write a Java Program to define a class, describe its constructor, overload

the Constructors and instantiate its object
2 Write a Java Program to define a class, define instance methods for
setting and Retrieving values of instance variables and instantiate its
object.
3 Write a Java Program to define a class, define instance methods and
overload them and use them for dynamic method invocation.
4 Write a Java Program to demonstrate use of sub class
5 Write a Java Program to demonstrate use of nested class.
6 Write a Java Program to implement array of objects.
7 Write a Java program to practice
- using String class and its methods.
- using String Buffer class and its methods.
8 Write a Java Program to implement Vector class and its methods.
9 Write a Java Program to implement Wrapper classes and their methods.
10 Write a Java Program to implement inheritance and demonstrate use of
method overriding.
11 Write a Java Program to implement multilevel inheritance by applying
various access controls to its data members and methods.
12 Write a program to demonstrate
- use of implementing interfaces.
- use of extending interfaces.
13 Write a Java program to implement the concept of importing classes from
user defined package and creating packages.
14 Write a program to implement the concept of threading.
 -by extending Thread Class
-by implementing Runnable Interface
15 Write a program to implement the concept of Exception Handling
- using predefined exception.
- by creating user defined exceptions.
16 Write a program using Applet
- to display a message in the Applet.
- For configuring Applets by passing parameters.
17 Write a Java Program to demonstrate
-Keyboard event
Mouse events
18 Write programs for using Graphics class
- to display basic shapes and fill them.
- draw different items using basic shapes
- set background and foreground colors.

Text:
1. Computer Programming in Java, Junaid Khateeb and Dr. G.T. Thampi, Wiley
Dreamtech, ISBN: 9788177228298
2. Programming with Java, 4th edition, Balagurusamy, Mc Graw Hill, ISBN-
9780070141698

Scheme of Valuation
1 Record 05
2 Writing two programs 30
(2x15)
3 Executing one program 40
4 Result 05
5 Viva Voce 20
Total 100
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject: Programming With Java

Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

SN Chapter Hours Marks

1 Introduction of Java 5 12
2 Classes, Objects and Methods 10 25
3 Strings and String Buffer 4 10
Classes
4 Interface: Multiple Inheritance 4 10
5 Packages: Putting Classes 6 15
Together
6 Multithreaded Programming 6 15
7 Managing Errors and 4 10
Exceptions
8 Applet Programming 10 25
9 Graphics Programming 7 18
Seminars, Guest Lectures and 5
other innovation interactions
Tests 3
Total 64 140+5(Objective
Type)
 Detailed Contents

1 Introduction of Java
1.1 Java history
1.2 Java Features
1.3 How Java Differs from C and C++
1.4 Java and World Wide Web
1.5 Java Environment
1.6 Simple Java Program
1.7 More of Java
1.8 An Application with Two Classes
1.9 Java Program Structure
1.10 Java Tokens
1.11 Java Statements
1.12 Implementing a Java Program
1.13 Java Virtual Machine
1.14 Command Line Arguments
1.15 Programming Style
1.16 Constants
1.17 Variables
1.18 Data Types
1.19 Scope of Variables
1.20 Symbolic Constants
1.21 Type Casting
1.22 Standard Default Values
1.23 Special Operators
1.24 Mathematical Functions
1.25 Labeled Loops (break & Continue)
1.26 Operators and Expressions
1.27 Decision Making, Branching & Looping

2 Classes, Objects and Methods

2.1 Introduction
2.2 Defining a Class
2.3 Fields Declaration
2.4 Methods Declaration
2.5 Creating Objects
2.6 Accessing Class Members
2.7 Constructors
2.8 Methods Overloading
2.9 Static Members
2.10 Nesting of Methods
2.11 Inheritance: Extending a Class
2.12 Overriding Methods
 2.13 Final Variables and Methods
2.14 Final Classes
2.15 Finalize Method
2.16 Abstract Methods and Classes
2.17 Methods with Variable arguments (Var Args)
2.18 Visibility Control

3 Strings and String Buffer Classes

3.1 Strings
3.2 Vectors
3.3 Wrapper classes
3.4 Enumerated Types
3.5 Annotations

4 Interfaces: Multiple Inheritance

4.1 Introduction
4.2 Defining Interfaces
4.3 Extending Interfaces
4.4 Implementing Interfaces
4.5 Accessing Interface Variables

5 Packages: Putting Classes Together

5.1 Introduction
5.2 Java API Packages
5.3 Using System Packages
5.4 Naming Conventions
5.5 Creating Packages
5.6 Accessing a Package
5.7 Using a Package
5.8 Adding a Class to a Package
5.9 Hiding Classes
5.10 Static Import

6 Multithreaded Programming
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Creating Threads
6.3 Extending the Thread Class
6.4 Stopping and Blocking a Thread
6.5 Life Cycle of a Thread
6.6 Using Thread Methods
6.7 Thread Exceptions
6.8 Thread Priority
6.9 Synchronization
6.10 Implementing the „Runnable‟ Interface
6.11 Inter-thread Communication
7 Managing Errors and Exceptions
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Types of Errors
7.3 Exceptions
7.4 Syntax of Exception Handling Code
7.5 Multiple Catch Statements
7.6 Using Finally Statement
7.7 Throwing Our Own Exceptions
7.8 Using Exceptions for Debugging

8 Applet Programming
8.1 Introduction
8.2 How Applets Differ from Applications
8.3 Preparing to Write Applets
8.4 Building Applet Code
8.5 Applet Life Cycle
8.6 Creating an Executable Applet
8.7 Designing a Web Page
8.8 Applet Tag
8.9 Adding Applet to HTML File
8.10 Running the Applet
8.11 More About Applet Tag
8.12 Passing Parameters to Applets
8.13 Aligning the Display
8.14 Displaying Numerical Values
8.15 Getting Input from the User
8.16 Event Handling

9 Graphics Programming
Introduction
9.1 The Graphics Class
9.2 Lines and Rectangles
9.3 Circles and Ellipses
9.4 Drawing Arcs
9.5 Drawing Polygons
9.6 Line Graphs
9.7 Using Control Loops in Applets
9.8 Drawing Bar Charts
9.9 Introduction to AWT Package
9.10 Introduction to Swings
Text book:

1. Programming with Java, 4th edition, Balagurusamy, Mc Graw Hill, ISBN-

9780070141698

2. Programming With Java By Niranjan A, Sapna Publications

Reference Books:

1. Computer Programming in Java, Junaid Khateeb and Dr. G.T. Thampi, Wiley
Dreamtech, ISBN : 9788177228298

2. Java 6 Programming – Black Book Wiley India Pvt ltd

3. Programming in JAVA2 – Dr. K. Somasundaram Jaico Publish

4. Programming in JAVA – S.S. Khandare – S. Chand Publish

General Objectives:
After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to

1. Visualize the java revolution.

2. Familiarize extending classes.
3. Understand the concepts of interfaces, packages, exception & strings.
4. Practice the use of threads, Interactive I/O & Understand the concepts of applets.
5. Study the concept of AWT.
6. Extend the concept of advanced java like swings.
Specific Objectives:

1 Introduction of Java
Know about Java History, it‟s Features, how it differs from C & C++, Java &
WWW & Java Environment.
Learn the java programming, An Applications with two classes, Java program
structure, tokens, statements & its implementation.
Learn Interactive input/output, JVM, Command line arguments, programming
style.
Brief Knowledge about Constants, Variables, data type, and scope of variable,
symbolic constants, type casting, standard default values, special operators,
mathematical functions & Labeled loops like break & continue.
2 Classes, Objects and Methods
Learn to define & declare classes ,objects, Class members, accessing class
members through methods, inheritance, overriding methods, final variables &
methods, final classes, finalizer method, abstract methods & classes , methods
with variable arguments and also visibility control
3 Strings and String Buffer Classes
Understand strings, vectors, wrapper classes, enumerated & Annotations
4 Interfaces: Multiple Inheritance
Know about interfaces.
Learn to Define interfaces , implementing them & to access their variables
5 Packages: Putting Classes Together
Learn about packages, java API„s, use of system packages & naming
conventions.
Learn to create, access , usage of java package, adding classes to package,
hiding classes & static import of classes & packages
6 Multithreaded Programming
Brief Knowledge of Threads, creating threads, extending thread classes, stopping
and blocking a thread, life cycle of thread.
Learn to use thread methods, exceptions & its priority.
Know to have synchronization between threads, implement the runnable
interface & also inter -thread communication.
7 Managing Errors and Exceptions
Know about Errors, its types & exceptions.
Managing & handling exceptions using multiple catch statements & final
statements.
Learn to throw our own exceptions & also Exception debugging
8 Applet Programming
Learn about applets & how it differs from applications.
Learn to write applets, building applet code, applet life cycle , creating an
executable applet, designing a web page, applet tag, adding applet to html file,
 running the applet , applet tags passing parameters to applets, displaying
numerical values., getting input from the users, event handling
9 Graphics Programming
Learn about graphic programming, graphic classes, Lines and Rectangles, Circles
and Ellipses.
Learn to draw arcs, polygons, & line graphs using control loops in applets & also
to draw bar charts.
A brief knowledge of AWT packages & swings.
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Fifth Semester
Subject: Java Programming

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.

Section - I
1 a. Fill in the blanks 5x1=5
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v
b. “Java is a Revolutionary Programming Language” . Justify 5

Section – II
2. a).What is a Token? List the various types of Tokens supported by Java. 2
b). Write a program to find the number of and sum of all integers greater than 100 and
less than 200 that are divisible by 7 5
c). Describe different forms of Inheritance with examples 8
3 a). What is a Constructor? What are its special properties 5
b). compare Overloading with Overriding methods 5
c). Explain the different levels of access protection available in Java 5
4 a). How does String Class differ from String buffer Class 5
b). Write a program which illustrates Wrapper Class 7
c). Differentiate between a Class and Interface 3
 Section-III
5 a). Write a Program which Illustrates Implementing Multiple Inheritance 7
b). What is a Package ? Explain how to create a package with an example 5
c). How do we add a Class or Interface to a Package? 3
6 a). How to access a Package? Illustrate with an example 7
b). Differentiate between Multi Threading and Multitasking 5
c). How to create Thread? 3
7. a). Write a program which illustrates the Thread methods yield(), stop()
and sleep() 6
b).What is an Exception? List the Java common exception types and causes 5
c). What is a finally block? When and How it is used? 4

Section -IV
8. a). What is an Applet? Explain the life cycle of an Applet 10
b). Write a note on HTML Applet tag 5
9. a). Write an Applet Program to input 3 floating point numbers, to find sum,
Average and Largest of Three 10
b). Write a note on Swings 5
10. a). Describe Three ways of Drawing a Polygon 6
b). Write Applets to Draw the following shapes 9

i. Cone

ii. Cylinder

iii. Cube
 PROJECT WORK - SCHEDULING
I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIV XV XVI
FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT
NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH VACA NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH
TASKS RESOURCE NEEDED T T T T T T T T TION T T T T T T T T
Internet / library /
industry / Research
Literature survey for project Centres

Finalisation of the Area in which Internet / library /

the project has to be done industry

Laboratory /
Finding out Facility to do the Industry/ Project
project Sites
Laboratory /
Collecting Data / Doing Industry/ Project
experiments / writing of code Sites
Using relevent
Analysis of Data software

Results and Fine tuning the Laboratory /

experiment using the Data Industry/ Project
Analysis Sites

Report writing
Submission of Project Report and
Viva voce
 Department of Technical Education, Karnataka
DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER SCIEBNCE & ENGINEERING
FIFTH & SIXTH SEMESTER
(Final end examination will be in Sixth Semester)
SUBJECT: PROJECT WORK I & II

Project Work – I
First Phase- V Semester
Contact Hrs/Week: 3 Hrs. Total : 48 Hrs

GUIDELINES FOR PROJECT FORMULATION

The project work constitutes a major component in most of the professional programmes and it
is to be carried out with due care and should be executed with seriousness by the candidates.
Batch Size : Maximum 4 students per batch

TYPE OF PROJECT
As majority of the students are expected to work out a real life project in some industry/research
and development laboratories/educational institutions/software companies, it is suggested that
the project is to be chosen which should have some direct relevance in day-to-day activities of
the candidates in his/her institution. Students are encouraged to work in the areas listed at the
end. However, it is not mandatory for a student to work on a real life project. The student can
formulate a project problem with the help of Guide.

PROJECT PROPOSAL (SYNOPSIS)

The project proposal should be prepared in consultation with your guide. The project
proposal should clearly state the project objectives and the environment of the proposed project
to be undertaken. The project work should compulsorily include the software development.
The project proposal should contain complete details in the following form:

1. Title of the Project.

2. Introduction and Objectives of the Project.
3. Project Category (DBMS/OOPS/Networking/Multimedia/Artificial Intelligence/Expert
Systems etc.).
4. Tools / Platform, Hardware and Software Requirement specifications.
5. Analysis (DFDs at least up to second level , ER Diagrams/ Class Diagrams/ Database
Design etc. as per the project requirements).
6. A complete structure which includes:
 Number of modules and their description to provide an estimation of the student‟s
effort on the project.
 Data Structures as per the project requirements for all the modules.
 Process logic of each module.
 Testing process to be used.
 Reports generation (Mention tentative content of report).
7. Are you doing this project for any Industry/Client? Mention Yes/No. If Yes, Mention the
Name and Address of the Industry or Client.
8. Future scope and further enhancement of the project. Also mention limitation of the project.

PROJECT PROPOSAL SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL

After finalizing the topic and the selection of the guide, students should be submit the Project
Proposal to the HOD along with the synopsis and bio-data of the guide. Incomplete project
proposals in any respect will be immediately rejected.

FORMAT OF LOG SHEETS (To be verified during IA verification and bounded with the
project synopsis)

To be filled as per Project Work Schedule given in the spread sheet

Sl.No. Date Task Progress of Task Initials of staff Evaluation

in charge (10 Marks

I A Marks:

Scheme of Evaluation

1 Log record 05
2 Synopsis 10
3 Presentation 10
Total 25
 PROJECT WORK – II

PHASE – II- VI Semester

Contact Hrs/Week: 3 Hrs Total : 48 Hrs

PROJECT REPORT FORMULATION

Items to be included in the Project Report

The following items should be included in the Project Report:

1. The project report must contain the following:

 Introduction
 Objectives
 Tools/Environment Used
 Analysis Document (This should include SRS in proper structure based on Software
Engineering concepts, E-R diagrams/Class diagrams/any related diagrams (if the
former are not applicable), Data flow diagrams/other similar diagrams (if the former
is not applicable), Data dictionary)
 Design Document (Modularization details, Data integrity & constraints including
database design, Procedural design, User interface design)
 Program code (Complete code (well indented)/Detailed specification instead of
code*, Comments & Description. The program code should always be developed in
such a way that it includes complete error handling, passing of parameters as
required, placement of procedure/function statements as needed.)
 Testing (Test case designs are to be included separately for Unit testing, Integration
testing, System testing; Reports of the outcome of Unit testing, Integration testing,
System testing are to be included separately. Also, details of debugging and code
improvement are to be included.)
 Input and Output Screens
 Implementation of Security for the Software developed (In case, you have set up a
User Name and Password for your software, you should ensure the security of User
Name and Password during transmission to server)
 Limitations of the Project
 Future Application of the Project
 References and Bibliography

1. Project reports should be typed neatly in Times New Roman letters with font size 14 for titles
and 12 for text on both sides of the paper with 1.5 line spacing on a A4 size paper (210 x
297 mm). The margins should be: Left - 1.5", Right - 1", Top and Bottom - 0.75".
2. The total number of reports (Soft bound) to be prepared are
 One copy to the department library
 One copy to the concerned guide(s)
 One copy to the candidate.
3. Before taking the final printout, the approval of the concerned guide(s) is mandatory and
suggested corrections, if any, must be incorporated.
4. Every copy of the report must contain
 Inner title page (White)
 Outer title page with a plastic cover
 Candidate declaration and Certificate in the format enclosed both from the institution
and the organization where the project is carried out.
 An abstract (synopsis) not exceeding 100 words, indicating salient features of the work.
5. The organization of the report should be as follows

1. Inner title page

2. Abstract or Synopsis
3. Acknowledgments Usually numbered in
roman
4. Table of Contents
5. List of table & figures (optional)
Chapters (to be numbered in Arabic) containing Introduction-, which usually specifies
the scope of work and its importance and relation to previous work and the present
developments, Main body of the report divided appropriately into chapters, sections and
subsections.
The chapters, sections and subsections may be numbered in the decimal form for e.g.
Chapter 2, sections as 2.1, 2.2 etc., and subsections as 2.2.3, 2.5.1 etc.
The chapter must be left or right justified (font size 16). Followed by the title of
chapter centered (font size 18), section/subsection numbers along with their headings must
be left justified with section number and its heading in font size 16 and subsection and its
heading in font size 14. The body or the text of the report should have font size 12.
The figures and tables must be numbered chapter wise
The last chapter should contain the summary of the work carried, contributions if any,
their utility along with the scope for further work.
Reference and Bibliography: The references should be numbered serially in the order
of their occurrence in the text and their numbers should be indicated within square brackets for
e.g. [3]. The section on references should list them in serial order in the following format.
1. For textbooks –R S Khandpur, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill.
 2. For papers – Y.Javadi and I. Sattari, Welding distortion in pipes, Journal of pressure
vessels and piping, Vol 85, Aug 2008, pp 337-343

Separator sheets, used if any, between chapters, should be of thin paper

SOFTWARE TOOLS:

Only Open Source Software‟s Should Be Used to Carry out the Project Code in Project Phase –
II

FORMAT OF LOG SHEETS (To be verified during IA verification and bounded with the
project synopsis)

To be filled as per Project Work Schedule given in the spread sheet

Sl.No. Date Task Progress of Task Initials of staff Evaluation

in charge (10 Marks

I A Marks:

Scheme of Evaluation

1 Log record 05
2 Synopsis 10
3 Presentation 10
Total 25

Laboratory Equipments

A separate lab dedicated to CASP and Project work should be established

 CANDIDATE’S DECLARATION

I, ------------------------------------------ the student of Diploma in -----------------------------

Department bearing Reg No---------------------------------------of ---------------------------------------
------- hereby declare that I own full responsibility for the information, results and conclusions
provided in this project work titled “------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------- “submitted to Board of Technical Examinations, Government of Karnataka for
the award of Diploma in ______________________
To the best of my knowledge, this project work has not been submitted in part or full
elsewhere in any other institution/organization for the award of any certificate/diploma/degree. I
have completely taken care in acknowledging the contribution of others in this academic work. I
further declare that in case of any violation of intellectual property rights and particulars
declared, found at any stage, I, as the candidate will be solely responsible for the same.

Date:
Place: Signature of candidate
Name: --------------------
Reg No-------------------
 DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION
NAME OF THE INSTITUTION
Address with pin code
Department of ……………………………………………………..
Year _________

CERTIFICATE

Certified that this project report entitled “ --------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------” which is being

submitted by Mr./Ms. ………………………….……………….., Reg. No…..……………, a bonafide
student of …………………………………….in partial fulfillment for the award of Diploma in
________ Engineering during the year ……………………... is record of students own work carried
out under my/our guidance. It is certified that all corrections/suggestions indicated for internal
Assessment have been incorporated in the Report and one copy of it being deposited in the polytechnic
library.

The project report has been approved as it satisfies the academic requirements in respect of
Project work prescribed for the said diploma.

It is further understood that by this certificate the undersigned do not endorse or approve
any statement made, opinion expressed or conclusion drawn there in but approve the project
only for the purpose for which it is submitted.

Guide(s) Head of Department Principal

Name and signature

Examiners
1. 2
 Laboratory Equipments
A separate lab should be established and dedicated to carry out project work for the students.

SN Item Qty
1 Computers with latest configuration 20
2 Switch – 32 port 01
3 I/O boxes 20
4 Structured Networking For all systems
5 Internet Connection For all 20 systems
6 Software‟s As required

ROADMAP FOR PROJECT GUIDES

1. The project work is proposed to be carried out during the V and VI semesters so that
learners prepare during the V semester, do some field work based on the preparation
during the mid semester vacation and report the analysis and inferences during the VI
semester.
2. The learners would reach a level of maturity by the time they reach V semester and so a
meaningful project lasting for a year can be executed by them.
3. To execute the project with involvement needs constant guidance and monitoring of the
progress of the learners by the guide.
4. This does not mean teacher has to advice learners.
5. Be confident about the ability of the learner and “intellectually provoke” them with
challenging questions. These questions should prompt the learners to search information
and update themselves (to be carried out during the first two weeks).
6. Do not feed information to learners. Instead crate a „cognitive dissonance‟ (a
challenging question or situation that the learner is not able to find an immediate answer
but feels the need to search for information to find a solution).
7. Defer judgement on learners and give them identified sources if required like a journal
article, book or a web site.
8. Even if the learners report their inability to solve do NOT give or prescribe a solution.
9. Be patient and give time for the learner to construct his knowledge.
10. Give corrective feedback to the learner by challenging his solutions so that his logic is
questioned and it develops further.
11. This leads to the first activity viz., literature survey and conceiving a project.
12. During this phase meet the project team in a group and create a healthy competition
among the learners to search different sources and synthesise their findings in the group.
13. Aim for bringing out a workable innovative project conceived within the first eight
weeks as given in the schedule attached.
14. During these two phases and the third phase the teacher should assess the strengths and
weakness of the members of the group and allocate differential work to team members
on the remaining tasks to be carried out during the next thirty weeks.
15. This is to ensure active participation of all the members of the team.
16. By the end of the twelfth week finalise the project and a schedule of further activities for
each member indicating the time frame in which his activities are to be executed may be
made ready. A soft copy of this schedule may be collected from each learner by the
guide to follow up.
17. This schedule prepared by each learner need to be documented for checking further
progress of the project.
18. The next few phases of the project may require active guidance of the guide especially
regarding the sources of collecting data, if a sample data is to be collected the number of
units has to be decided, collating the data/fabricating, tryout/analysis and finally coming
out with meaningful conclusions or models or application.
19. Data like models, designs, technical specifications, source code, protocols and original
records need be collected from one authentic source as there will not be any variation.
The teacher may guide the learners to authentic source.
20. Data having limited variability like product/service quality, processes and standards,
procedures need to be collected from a sample as there is a variation. The number of
units from whom (source) the data is to be collected is called sample. The sample needs
to be representative of the expected variation. The decision on the size of the sample
and the number of units need guidance from the teacher. For example, data regarding
the quality of a product/service need be collected from 3 to 5 personnel at different
levels of a service provider or dealers of a product. The numbers given are suggestive
but a guide based on his experience has to make valid suggestions.
21. Data having a wide range of variation like customer satisfaction where the customers are
members of the public need a larger number of units to accommodate the diversity. A
tool like questionnaire with predetermined questions need to be prepared, tried out on a
small sample and finalise the questions. Data may be collected from at least 30 units.
This number is suggested to apply statistical analysis for meaningful conclusions.
Guides may decide on the sample size depending on the accessibility of data.
22. The intention of the above three points viz., 19, 20 and 21 is to ensure objectivity in data
collection i.e., to reduce the subjectivity of the human mind.
23. All the above activities need to be completed before three to four weeks before the end
of V semester (refer the spread sheet related to scheduling).
24. The learners may be instructed to collect data objectively with identified sample during
the next 4 to six weeks which includes the mid semester holidays. This would enable the
learners to visit the field and collect data without the constraint of reporting to institution
and attending classes on a regular basis.
25. The collected data need to be organised and entered to spread sheets or similar formats
for analysis. Qualitative data may be converted to quantitative using a rating scale or
similar data organisation procedures.
26. The result of most analysis on spreadsheet could be obtained in tables or graphs as per
the requirement.
27. Activities mentioned in points 24, 25 and 26 may be carried out by learners during 4 to 8
weeks after commencement of VI semester.
28. Interpretation of the analysed tables and graphs to arrive at meaningful inference. The
guide at this stage may defer his ideas on interpretation allowing the learners to do this.
In case the learners err in the process they may be given corrective feedback.
29. A report of the whole process of doing the project may be written, word processed and
submitted in triplicate.
30. Guides may contact industries and try to solve their problems so that the learners get a
field experience and they get ready for the industry.
31. Innovations and innovative practices may be encouraged among the learners to be
pursued as a project. Developing prototypes, (in simulation or real) trying out feasibility
of new ideas, changing existing systems by adding modules, combining, assembling new
modules and developing new systems may be given higher priority over routine bookish
projects.
32. The schedule of events proposed is for an investigative project as a model. Guides may
alter the prescribed schedule to suit the kind of innovative projects sited in point No.31
above.
33. Industry personnel may be involved in conceiving, executing and evaluating projects.
This gives credibility to the institute and acceptance of learners for absorption into the
company.

GUIDELINES TO LEARNERS TO CARRY OUT A TWO SEMESTER

PROJECT

1. Carry out the project work through the V and VI semesters. Preparation must be done
during the V semester and based on this, field work should be done during the mid
semester vacation and reporting of analysis and inferences should be done in the VI
semester.
2. You have the ability and the level of maturity needed to conceive an innovative and
meaningful project accomplishing which gives you recognition by the industry and
empowers you with the power of knowledge.
3. Understand your strength and weakness and make an effort to find the strength and
weakness of other peers in the team.
4. Complement each other‟s strength rather than compete with peers within the team. This
will enable you to complete a comprehensive and innovative project relevant to the
industrial needs rather than doing a routine copy of what others have done.
5. Seek guidance from the teacher and update him/her about the progress.
6. Be confident about your ability and that of other members of your group. Take extra
efforts to collect information, share with your peers and synthesise your knowledge.
7. Question everything including the ideas of your teacher. Accept the ideas and
instructions which are internally consistent (logical).
8. Involve actively in group activities and contribute towards the tasks.
9. Do not depend too much on the teacher as a source of information, search on your own
and build your knowledge structure. Search for authentic sources like journal articles,
books and authentic sites rather than blogs and tweets.
10. Though brief, record your thoughts and activities including searches immediately.
11. Prepare a schedule for your work on a spread sheet and encourage your peers to do the
same.
12. Show your schedule and that of others to the teacher and get his feedback.
13. Keep reviewing the schedule every fortnight and take corrective steps if needed. For
doing this keep the general guideline schedule given in the curriculum as a backdrop.
14. Tools used for data collection like instruments, testing machines, questions to be asked
and software may be tried out and standardised by the twelfth week of the project. Seek
the teacher‟s help who is experienced in doing this.
15. Collect data dispassionately or objectively (without applying your personal prejudice).
Complete this task before the VI semester begins.
16. While entering data into the spread sheet ask your peer member to verify. This will
ensure accuracy of data entry.
17. Use appropriate mathematics/statistics for calculations. Seek help from external sources
(other than your teacher) if required.
18. The results of your analysis need to be graphically represented and documented. You
may also add photographs and video clips to increase the validity.
19. This task needs to be completed within 8 weeks after commencement of VI semester.
20. Interpret the data (after analysis) and arrive at meaningful inferences on your own in
discussion with your peers. Get it ratified by your teacher. Suggestions from the teacher
may be discussed among your peers and incorporated if they are internally consistent.
21. The project report may be word processed (videos, photographs attached in soft copy)
and submitted in triplicate two weeks before the end of VI semester.
22. Involve passionately in the team work, make constructive contributions and come out
with an industry friendly project which will equip you in your professional development.
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject: Web Programming Lab

Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96

Dynamic Documents with Java Script

1 The document must have a paragraph of text that describes your

home. Choose atleast three different phrases (3 to 6 words) of this
paragraph and make them change font, font style, color and font size
when the mouse cursor is placed over them. Each of the different
phrases must change to different fonts, font styles, colors and font
sizes
2 The document must contain four short paragraphs of text stacked on
top of each other with only enough of each showing so that the mouse
cursor can also be placed over some part of them. When the cursor is
placed over the exposed part of any paragraph it should raise to the
top to become completely visible.
3 The document should have a small image of yourself, which must
appear when the mouse button is clicked at the position of the mouse
cursor, regardless of the position of the cursor at the time.
4 The document must contain the statement ―Save time with
TIMESAVER 2.2‖, which continuously moves back and forth across
the top of the display
XML
5 Design an XML document to store information about patience in a
hospital. Information about patients must include name (in 3 parts,
first name, middle name, last name), social security number (SSN),
age, room number, primary insurance company – including member
identification number, group number and address – secondary
insurance company (in the same sub parts as for the primary insurance
company), known medical problems, and known drug allergies. Both
attributes and nested tags must be included. Make up sample data of
atleast 4 patients.
6 Create a CSS style sheet for the above XML document and use it to
create a display of that document
7 Create XSLT style sheet for one patient element of the XML,
document of exercise 5 and use it to create a display of that element.
8 Modify the XSLT style sheet to format all the patient elements of the
XML, document of exercise 5 and use it to create a display of whole
element.
PHP- Write, test and debug PHP scripts for the following
specification
9 Parameter - A string of numbers separated by spaces
Return Value – The first 4 digits number in the string; false if none.
10 Parameter – A file variable of a file of text where the words are
separated by spaces or colons
Return value – The word that appears most common in the file.
11 Write an XHTML document to include an anchor tag, that calls a PHP
document also write the called PHP document which returns a
randomly choosen greeting from a list of five different greetings. The
greetings must be stored as constant strings in the script. A random
number between 0 and 4 can be computed with these line.
#set the seed for mtrand with the number of microseconds
#since the last full second of the clock
mt_strand((double) microtime() * 1000000);
$number=mtrand(0,4); #computes a random integer 0-4
12 Write the XHTML code to create the form with the following
capabilities
a) A text widget to collect the users name
b) Four check boxes, one each for the following items
i) Four 100 watt light bulbs for Rs. 20=39
ii) Eight 100 watt light bulbs for Rs 40=20
iii) Four 100 watt long life light bulbs for Rs. 30=95
iv) Eight 100 watt long life light bulbs for Rs 70=49
c) A collection of 3 radio buttons that are labeled as follows
i) Visa
ii) Master Card
iii) Discover
13 Write a PHP script that computes the total cost of the ordered light
bulbs from the exercise 12 after adding 13.5% VAT. The program
must inform the buyer of exactly what was ordered in table.
14 Write a XHTML code to create a form that collects favorite popular
songs, including the name of the song, the composer and the
performing artist or group. This document must call one PHP script
when the form is submitted and another to request a current list of
survey results.
15 Write a XHTML code to provide a form that collects names and
telephone numbers. The phone numbers must be in the format ddd-
ddd-dddd. Write a PHP script that checks the submitted telephone
number to be sure that it confirms to the required format and then
returns a response that indicates whether the number was correct.
16 Modify the PHP script of exercise 11 to count the number of visitors
and display that number for each visitor.
 Hint: Use a file to store current count.
17 Accept from the user name, phone no , mail-ed ,store in database .
retrieve same information from database using a separate PHP script.
18 Learn to install Joomla/Wordpress/Drupal . ( Not for exam)

Reference

1. Programming the World Wide Web, 4th edition, Robert W.Sebesta , Pearson Education,
ISBN- 9788131724170

2. Web Programming – Building Internet Applications, 3rd edition, Chris Bates, Wiley
publisher

3. Web Technologies— HTML,JavaScript,PHP,java,JSP,ASP.Net,XML & Ajax – Black

Book, Wiley, ISBN : 978-81-7722-997-4

Scheme of valuation

1 Record 05
2 Write one program from Java 15
scripting or XHTML
3 Writing one from program 15
from PHP
4 Executing two programs 40
5 Result 05
6 Viva Voce 20
Total 100
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject: Web Programming

Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

SN Content Hours Marks

1 Fundamentals 04 10
2 JavaScript & XHTML Documents 04 10
3 Dynamic Documents with JavaScript 06 15
4 Introduction to XML 10 25
5 Introduction to PHP 12 30
SECTION III
6 Database Access through the Web 12 30
7 Introduction to Ruby 08 15
Seminars, Guest Lectures and other 05
innovation interactions
Tests 03
Total 64 145
 Detailed Contents

1 Fundamentals
1.1 A Brief Introduction to Internet
1.1.1 Origins
1.1.2 What the Internet Is
1.1.3 Internet Protocal Addresses
1.1.4 Domain Names
1.2 The World Wide Web
1.2.1 Origins
1.2.2 Web or Internet
1.3 Web Browsers
1.4 Web Servers
1.4.1 Web Server Operations
1.4.2 General Server Characterstics
1.4.3 Apache
1.4.4 IIS
1.5 Uniform Resource Locators
1.5.1 URL Formats
1.5.2 URL Paths
1.6 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
1.6.1 Type Specification
1.6.2 Experimental Documental Types
1.7 The Hypertext Transfer Protocal
1.7.1 The Request Phase
1.7.2 The Response Phase
1.8 Security
1.9 The Web Programmer’s ToolBox
1.9.1 Overview of XML
1.9.2 Tools for creating XHTML Documents
1.9.3 Plug-Ins and Filters
1.9.4 Overview of XML
1.9.5 Overview of JavaScript
1.9.6 Overview of Java
1.9.7 Overview of Perl
1.9.8 Overview of PHP
1.9.9 Overview of Ruby
1.9.10 Overview of Rails
1.9.11 Overview of Ajax

2 JavaScript & XML Documents

2.1 The JavaScript Execution Environment
2.2 The Document Object Model
2.3 Element Access in JavaScript
2.4 Events & Event Handling
2.4.1 Basic Concepts of Event handling
2.4.2 Events, Attributes & Tags
2.5 Handling Events from Body Elements
2.6 Handling Events from Button Elements
2.7 Handling Events from Textbox & password Elements
2.7.1 The Focus Event
2.7.2 Validating from Input
2.8 The DOM 2 Event Model
2.8.1 Event Propagation
2.8.2 Event handler registration
2.8.3 An Example of the DOM 2 Event Model
2.9 The Navigator Object
2.10 DOM Tree Traversal and Modification
2.10.1 DOM Tree Traversal
2.10.2 DOM Tree Modification

3 Dynamic Documents with JavaScript

3.1 Introduction
3.2 Positioning Elements
3.2.1 Absolute Positioning
3.2.2 Relative Positioning
3.2.3 Static Positioning
3.3 Moving Elements
3.4 Element Visibility
3.5 Changing Colors & Fonts
3.5.1 Changing Colors
3.5.2 Changing Fonts
3.6 Dynamic Contents
3.7 Stacking Elements
3.8 Locating the Mouse Cursor
3.9 Reacting to the Mouse Click
3.10 Slow Movement of Elements
3.11 Dragging & Dropping Elements

4 Introduction to XML
4.1 Introduction
4.2 The Syntax of XML
4.3 XML Document Structure
4.4 Document Type Definitions
4.4.1 Declaring Elements
4.4.2 Declaring Attributes
4.4.3 Declaring Entities
4.4.4 A Sample DTD
 4.4.5 Internal & External DTDs
4.5 Namespaces
4.6 XML Schemas
4.6.1 Schemas Fundamentals
4.6.2 Defining the Schema
4.6.3 Defining the Schema Instances
4.6.4 An Overview od Data types
4.6.5 Simple Types
4.6.6 Complex Types
4.7 Displaying Raw XML Documents
4.8 Displaying XML Documents with CSS

5 Introduction to PHP
5.1 Origins and Uses of PHP
5.2 Overview of PHP
5.3 General Syntactic Characteristics
5.4 Primitives, Operations and Expressions
5.4.1 Variables
5.4.2 Integer Type
5.4.3 Double Type
5.4.4 String Type
5.4.5 Boolean Type
5.4.6 Arithmetic Operations & Expressions
5.4.7 String Operations
5.4.8 Scalar Type conversions
5.5 Output
5.6 Control statements
5.6.1 Relational Operators
5.6.2 Boolean Operators
5.6.3 Selection Statements
5.6.4 Loop statements
5.6.5 An Example
5.7 Arrays
5.7.1 Array Creation
5.7.2 Accessing array Elements
5.7.3 Functions for Dealing with Arrays
5.7.4 Sequential Access to Array Elements
5.7.5 Sorting Arrays
5.8 Functions
5.8.1 General Characteristics of Functions
5.8.2 Parameters
5.8.3 The scope of Variables
5.8.4 The Lifetime of Variables
5.9 Pattern Matching
5.10 Form Handling
5.11 Files
5.11.1 Opening and Closing Files
5.11.2 Reading from a File
5.11.3 Writing to a File
5.11.4 Locking Files
5.12 Cookies
5.12.1 Introduction to Cookies
5.12.2 PHP Support for Cookies
5.13 Session Tracking

6 Database Access through the Web

6.1 Database Access with PHP & MySQL
6.1.1 Potential Problems with Special Characters
6.1.2 Connecting to MySQL & Selecting the Database
6.1.3 Requesting MySQL Operations
6.1.4 A PHP/ MySQL Examples
6.2 Database Access with JDBC & MySQL
6.2.1 JDBC & MySQL
6.2.2 Metadata
6.2.3 Examples

7 Introduction to Ruby
7.1 Origins and Uses of Ruby
7.2 Scalar Types & their Operations
7.2.1 Numeric & String Literals
7.2.2 Variables and Assignment Statements
7.2.3 Numeric Operators
7.2.4 String Methods
7.3 Simple Input & Output
7.3.1 Screen Output
7.3.2 Keyboard Input
7.4 Control Statements
7.4.1 Control Expressions
7.4.2 Selection & Looping Statements
7.5 Fundamentals of Arrays
7.5.1 The For – in Statement
7.5.2 Built-in Methods for arrays and Lists
7.5.3 Examples
7.6 Hashes
7.7 Methods
7.7.1 Fundamentals
7.7.2 Local variables
7.7.3 Parameters
7.8 Classes
7.8.1 The basics of Classes
 7.8.2 Access Control
7.8.3 Inheritance
7.9 Code blocks & Iterators
7.10 Pattern matching
7.10.1 Basics of Pattern Matching
7.10.2 Remembering matches
7.10.3 Substitutions

Text book:

1. Programming the World Wide Web, 4th edition, Robert W.Sebesta , Pearson Education,
ISBN- 9788131724170

2. Web Programming By Niranjan A, Sapna Publications.

Reference Books:

1. Web Programming – Building Internet Applications, 3rd edition, Chris Bates, Wiley
publisher

2. Web Technologies— HTML,JavaScript,PHP,java,JSP,ASP.Net,XML & Ajax – Black

Book, Wiley, ISBN : 978-81-7722-997-4

3. PHP A Begineer’s Guide --- Vikram Vaswami , TMH publishers. ISBN: 13:978-0-07-
014069-1

General Objectives:

1. Understand the concepts of Internet, WWW, Web Browsers, Web Servers, URL’s
,HTTP, Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions & Security.
2. Comprehend the concepts of JavaScript & XHTML Documents
3. Appreciate the concepts of Dynamic Documents with JavaScript
4. Understand the concepts of XML
5. Understand the concepts of PHP
6. Understand the concepts Database Access through the Web
7. Comprehend the concepts of Ruby & their applications.

Specific Objectives:

1 Fundamentals
A Brief Introduction to Internet
Origins
What the Internet Is
 Internet Protocal Addresses
Domain Names
The World Wide Web
Origins
Web or Internet
Web Browsers
Web Servers
Web Server Operations
General Server Characterstics
Apache
IIS
Uniform Resource Locators
URL Formats
URL Paths
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
Type Specification
Experimental Documental Types
The Hypertext Transfer Protocal
The Request Phase
The Response Phase
Security
The Web Programmer’s ToolBox
Overview of XML
Tools for creating XHTML Documents
Plug-Ins and Filters
Overview of XML
Overview of JavaScript
Overview of Java
Overview of Perl
Overview of PHP
Overview of Ruby
Overview of Rails
Overview of Ajax
2 JavaScript & XML Documents
Learn the JavaScript Execution Environment, DOM & Element Access Using
XHTML.
Learn the Basic Concepts of Event Handling, Events, Attributes & Tags.
Know about Handling Events from Body Elements, Button Elements ,Textbox
& password Elements like Focus Event, blur Event, Change Event & Select
Event
Learn the DOM 2 Event Model ,Event Propagation & Event handler registration
with an Example.
Know the Concept of The Navigator Object, DOM Tree Traversal and
Modification
3 Dynamic Documents with JavaScript
 Introduction to Dynamic Documents with JavaScript
Lear about Positioning Elements & their possible values like Absolute, Relative
& Static Positioning.
Learn the concepts of Moving Elements, Element Visibility, Changing Colors &
Fonts, Dynamic Contents, Stacking Elements, Locating the Mouse Cursor,
Reacting to the Mouse Click, Slow Movement of Elements & Dragging &
Dropping Elements.
4 Introduction to XML
Learn the Concepts of XML, the Syntax of XML & XML Document Structure
Know about how to Declare Elements, Declaring Attributes & Declaring
Entities in Document Type Definitions
Learn about A Sample DTD, Internal & External DTDs & Namespaces
Learn the Concepts of XML Schemas: Definition, Fundamentals, , Defining the
Schema Instances , Data types ,Simple Types, Complex types & Validating the
Instances of Schemas.
Learn to Display raw XML Documents & also to display XML Documents with
CSS.
5 Introduction to PHP
Know about the Origins and Uses of PHP, General Syntactic Characteristics,
Primitives, Operations and Expressions, Output from an PHP Script.
Learn the Concepts of Control statements, Arrays, Functions, Pattern Matching,
Form Handling,
Learn about file Handling like Open, close, read, write and locking files.
A study of Cookies: Introduction to cookies, Support of PHP & also Session
tracking in PHP.
6 Database Access through the Web
Learn to Access the Database with PHP & MySQL: Potential Problems with
Special Characters, Connecting to MySQL & Selecting the Database, Requesting
MySQL Operations, A PHP/ MySQL Examples
Learn to Access the Database with JDBC & MySQL, Metadata, with an
Examples.
7 Introduction to Ruby
Know about the Origins and Uses of Ruby.
Understand the Concepts of Scalar Types & their Operations: Numeric & String
Literals, Variables and Assignment Statements, Numeric Operators, String
Methods.
Learn about the Simple Input & Output like Screen Output & Keyboard Input
Learn the concepts of Control Statements, Control Expressions, Selection &
Looping Statements,
Understand the Fundamentals of Arrays, Hashes, Methods, Classes, Code blocks
& Iterators & Pattern matching
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education

Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject: Web Programming

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

3. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.
Marks
Section – I

1. a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/s 5x1=5

i.

ii.

iii

iv.

v.

b) Write a note on XHTML document 5

Section – II

2. a) Explain the phases of HTML 10

b) What are the advantages of assigning event handlers to event properties 05

3. a) Explain the Document Object Model 5

b) Explain the three possible values of the positioning property 10

4. a) Discribe the parameters and action of the setTimeout function 5

b) Explain the structure of the XML structure 5

c) Define schema & schema instance with an example 5

Section – III

5. a) Describe the roles of web services 5

b) How does an XSLT processor use an XSLT style sheet with an XML document? Explain 10

6. a) Explain the various string functions used in PHP 10

b) Write a PHP script to compute the sum & average of N numbers 5

7. a) Explain array_keys & array_values function 5

b) Create a form containing information sl.no, title of the book, publishers, quantity, price,
read the data from the form & write onto a file using PHP script 10

Section – IV

8. a) Explain the three-tier architecture of web site supported by a data base 8

b) Define metadata 2

c) Explain the two ways of using JDBC 5

9. a) Write a PHP script to create a new database table with 4 fields of your choice perform the
following database operations 10

i) insert a record

ii) update a record

iii) delete a record

b) Write a note on DBI module 5

10. a) Explain how multiple selection constructs are implemented in Ruby 8

b) Write a ruby program that inputs a list of numbers from the keyboard and finds the second
smallest number in the list, along with its position in the list 7
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject: Network Security Lab

Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96

Note:
1) For all experiments the student must and should install software’s.
After the demonstrate the same be uninstalled. Each batch has to learn to
install and use the tools. You ca use any other equivalent softwares other
then the mentioned one.
2)The lab should have structured network with 2 mbps internet line.
Using Virutal Box, Two OS can be installed on one machine, where in
one OS acts as a client and other acts a server.
SN TOPIC

1 Learn to install Wine/Virtual Box/ or any other equivalent s/w on the host OS

2 Perform an experiment to grab a banner with telnet and perform the task using
Netcat
3 Perform an experiment for Port Scanning with nmap, superscan or any other
equivalent software
4 Using nmap 1)Find Open ports on a system 2) Find machines which are active
3)Find the version of remote OS on other systems 4)Find the version of s/w
installed on other system (using nmap or any othe software)
5 Perform an experiment on Active and Passive finger printing using XProbe2 and
nmap
6 Performa an experiment to demonstrate how to sniff for router traffic by using
the tool Cain and Abel / wireshark / tcpdump
7 Performa an experiment how to use DumpSec.
8 Perform an wireless audit of an access point / router and decrypt WEP and WPA
(softwares netstumbler or airsniff)
9 Perform an experiment to sniff traffic using ARP poisoning
10 Install IPCop on a linux system and learn all the function available on the
software.
11 Install JCrypt tool (or any other equivalent) and demonstrate Asymmetric,
Symmetric crypto algorithm, Hash and Digital/PKI signatures studied in theory
Network Security and Management
12 Demonstrate Intrusion Detection System (IDS) using any tool eg. Snort or any
other s/w
13 Install RootKits and study variety of opt
14 Generate minimum 10 passwords of length 12 characters using open ssl
command
15 Setup a honey pot and monitor the honey pot on network

Text:
1. Build Your Own Security Lab: A field guide for network Testing, Michael
Gregg, Wiley India edition, ISBN: 9788126516919

Scheme of Valuation

1 Record 05
2 Installation of tool 30
(Any two)
3 Demonstration 45
4 Viva Voce 20
Total 100
 Lab requirements

SN Item Quantity
1 Computers with wireless network card 20
2 Internet Connection : Minimum 2 Mbps Shared for 20
3 Switch – 32 port 01
4 Wireless router 01

Open Source Software may be encouraged

 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject: Network Security & Management

Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents
SN Content Hours Marks
1 Introduction 2 5
2 Organizational Policy and Security 4 10
3 Security infrastructure 2 5
4 Cryptography 12 30
5 Hardware & Software Security 6 15
6 Intrusion Detection System 6 15
7 Network Security 12 30
8 Wireless Security 6 15
9 Security & law 2 5
10 Internet governance and electronics mail policy 4 10
Seminars, Guest Lectures, Industry Visit and other
5
Innovations
Tests 3
Total 140+5
64
Objectives
 Detailed Contents

1 Introduction
1.1 Why Network Security is Needed
1.2 Management principles
1.3 Security principles
1.4 Network Management
1.5 Security Attacks
1.5.1 Denial-of-Service (DoS)
1.5.2 Information leakage
1.5.3 Regular file access
1.5.4 Misinformation
1.5.5 Special File/Database access
1.5.6 Remote arbitrary code execution
1.5.7 Elevation of Principles
1.6 Qualities of Good Network
1.7 Internet Standards and the Internet Society (Ref page 267 of reference text)

2 Organization Policy and Security

2.1 Security Polices, Standards and Guidelines
2.2 Information Policy
2.3 Security Policy
2.4 Physical Security
2.5 Social Engineering
2.6 Security procedures
2.7 Building a Security Plan
2.7.1 Elements of Security Plan
2.7.2 Network Security Planning

3 Security Infrastructure
3.1 Infrastructure Components
3.1.1 Network Category
3.1.2 Platform category
3.1.3 Physical Components
3.1.4 Process Category
3.2 Goals of Security Infrastructure
3.2.1 Data Confidentiality
3.2.2 Data Integrity
3.2.3 Data Availability
3.3 Design Guidelines
3.3.1 Authentication
3.3.2 Authorization
3.3.3 Accounting
3.3.4 Physical Access Controls
3.3.5 Logical Access Controls
4 Cryptography (Ref: Text 2)
4.1 Symmetric Encryption Principles
4.2 Symmetric Block Encryption Algorithms
4.3 Random and Pseudorandom Numbers
4.4 Stream Ciphers and RC4
4.5 Cipher Block Modes of Operation
4.6 Approaches to Message Authentication
4.7 Secure Hash Function
4.8 Message Authentication Codes
4.9 Public Key Cryptography Principles
4.10 Public-Key Cryptography Algorithms
4.11 Digital Signatures

5 Hardware and Software Security

5.1 Hardware Security
5.2 Smart Cards
5.3 Biometrics
5.4 Virtual Private Networks
5.4.1 Types of VPN’s
5.5 Trusted Operating Systems
5.6 Pretty Good Privacy (PGP)
5.7 Security Protocols
5.7.1 Security Socket Layer
5.7.2 Transport Layer Security
5.7.3 IPSec
5.7.4 S/MIME(Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension)

6 Intrusion Detection System

6.1 What is not an IDS?
6.2 Infrastructure of IDS
6.3 Classification of IDS
6.4 Host-based IDS
6.5 Network based IDS
6.6 Anomaly Vs Signature Detection
6.6.1 Normal Behavior Patterns-Anomaly Detection
6.6.2 Misbehavior Signatures-Signature Detection
6.3.3 Parameter Pattern Matching
6.7 Manage an IDS

7 Network Security
7.1 Fundamental Concepts
7.1.1 Objectives
Assets
Threats
 Vulnerability
Safe Guards
Attack
7.2 Identification and Authentication
7.2.1 Proof by knowledge
Proof by Possession
Proof by Property
Strong Authentication
7.3 Access Control.
7.3.1 Identity - Based Policies
Rule based Policy
Security Requirements
Mandatory Access Control
Discretionary Access Control
Labeling
Auditing
Convert Channel Analysis
7.4 A model of Network Security
7.4.1 General Vulnerabilities
Attacks on Internet Protocol
Attacks on Internet Service
7.5 Malicious Software
7.5.1 Safeguards
7.6 Firewalls
7.6.1 Packet-Filtering Firewalls
Stateful Inspection Firewalls
Proxy firewalls
Guard
Personal Firewalls
Limitations of Firewalls

8 Wireless Security
8.1 Wireless Application Protocol
8.2 WAP Security
8.2.1 Authentication
8.2.2 Integrity
Confidentiality
8.3 Security Issues with Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS)
8.4 Wireless LAN
8.4.1 WLAN Configuration
WLAN Technology consideration
8.5 Wireless LAN Security
8.5.1 Access Point Security
8.5.2 Work Station Security
8.5.3 Safeguarding Wireless LAN’s
9 Security and Law
9.1 Regulations in India
9.2 Information Technology Act, 2000
9.2.1 Cyber Crime and the IT Act, 2000
9.3 Indian Contract Ac, 1872
9.4 Indian Penal Code
9.5 Indian Copyright Act
9.6 Consumer Protection Act, 1986
9.7 Specific Relief Act, 1963
9.8 Government Initiatives
9.9 Future Trends-Law of Convergence

10 Internet Governance and Electronic Mail Policy

10.1 Internet Governance
10.1.1 The Infrastructure and Standardization
Legal
Economic
Development
10.2 Network Security Aspects in E-Governance
10.2.1 Why Securing E-Governance
Security Measures and Threats
10.3 Security Monitoring Tools
10.3.1 Vulnerability Assessment
Security Policy Development
Wireless Network Analysis
Successful Identify Authentication
10.4 Electronic Mail
10.4.1 Electronic Mailboxes and Addresses
Mail Transfer
How does E-mail work?
Internet Mail Protocols
10.5 What are the E-mail Threats that Organization’s Face?
Legal Liability
Confidentiality Breaches
Damage to Reputation
Loss of Productivity
Network Congestion and Down Time
Email Retrieval on Court Order
10.6 Why do you Need an E-mail Policy?
10.7 How do you Create E-mail Polciy?
10.7.1 E-mail Risks
Best Practices
Personal usage
Wastage of Resources
 Prohibited Content
Documentation Retention Policy
Treatment of Confidential Data
E-mail Monitoring
10.8 Publishing the E-mail Policy
10.9 University E-mail Policy
10.9.1 Purpose and Scope
Specific Provisions
Campus Responsibilities and Discretion

Text Books:

1. Network Security and Management,2nd edition, Brijendra Sing, PHI, ISBN:

9788120339101 (Chap: 1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,10)
2. Network Security Essentials: Applications and Standards, 3/e, William Stallings,
Pearson, ISBN: 9788131716649 (Chap 4)

Reference:

1. Network Security Bible, 2nd edition, Eric Cole, Wiley Publisher, ISBN: 9788126523313

General Objectives:
After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to

1. Knows the concepts & basic vocabulary of network security, organization policy &
security infrastructures .
2. Knows the various cryptographic algorithms & protocols along with hardware &
software security
3. Knows how intursion detection systems works
4. Knows about WAP security & security issues with WTLS
5. Knows about the laws involved in security and polices

Specific Objectives:

1 Introduction
Need for network security
Learn the management and security principles
Learn the various security attacks
Learn the qualities of a good network
2 Organization policy & security
learn the various policies and standard
Design a security plan
3 Security Infrastructures
Learn about the infrastructure components & category
 Learn the goals of security
Design guidelines for providing security
4 Cryptography
Learn the various terminologies used in cryptography
Know the various encryption methods & how they work
Learn various methods used in secret key cryptography, secret key
cryptography, Hashing, public key cryptography and digital signatures
5 Hardware and Software security
Learn how to provide a secure System
Comprehend Hardware security features
Learn the various Hardware security devices
Learn the types of VPNs
Learn the feature required for having a trusted OS
Learn PGP
Learn the various Protocols
6 Intrusion and Detection System
Learn to differentiate between what is not an IDS and IDS
Learn the infrastructure of IDS
Learn the classification of IDS
Learn about various IDS
Disingvish between Anomaly and signature detection
Learn the classification of detection
7 Network Security
Learn the fundamental concepts of security
Learn to identify and aunthenticate
Learn the ways of Aunthenticated user identity
Learn the policy involved in access control
Learn security requirement
Learn the model for network security
Learn the general vulnerabilities
Comprehend the attacks on internet protocol and internet services
Know the catagories of malicious softwares
Understand concepts of firwalls and their types
8 Wireless security
Learn about WAP
Learn the goals of WAP security
Learn the security issues WTLS
Learn wireless network architecture and various configuration
Learn to use the technology concern to WLAN and its security
9 Security and Law
Learn the regulation made by india
Learn the IT act Contract act , Copy right act, protection act and relief act
Comprehend the initiatives taken by GOVT
10 Internet Governance and Electronic Mail policy
Learn the various network security acpects in E governance
Learn security monitoring tools
Understand how E mail works
Learn the various internet Mail protocol
Learn the E mail Threads and an organastion faces
Comprehend the need for E mail policy
Learn to create and publish Email policy
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education

Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject: Network Security and Management

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

1. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.
Marks
Section – I

1. a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/s 5x1=5

i.

ii.

iii

iv.

v.

b) Describe the Trusted OS 5

Section – II

2. a) Why network security is needed and How to maintain 5

b). Explain Information policy and their Classification 10

3. a) Explain the Goals of security infrastructure 5

 b) With a neat diagram explain Feistel Cipher Structure and its design elements 10

4. a) What are the requirements of Hash function 5

b) Explain RSA algorithm with example 10

Section – III

5. a) Write a short note MD5 message digest 5

b) Explain the various hardware securities 10

6. a) Explain pretty good privacy 5

b) Describe the classification of IDS 10

7. a) Write a note on Signature detection 5

b) Explain pocket filtering Firewall 10

Section – IV

8. a) Explain limitation of Firewall 5

b) Explain the model for Network security 10

9. a) What is access point? Explain access point security 5

b) Explain several ways to configure WLAN 10

10. a) Explain indian copy right act 5

b) Explain how to publish an E mail policy for an organization 10

 PROJECT WORK - SCHEDULING
I II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIV XV XVI
FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT FORT
NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH VACA NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH NIGH
TASKS RESOURCE NEEDED T T T T T T T T TION T T T T T T T T
Internet / library /
industry / Research
Literature survey for project Centres

Finalisation of the Area in which Internet / library /

the project has to be done industry

Laboratory /
Finding out Facility to do the Industry/ Project
project Sites
Laboratory /
Collecting Data / Doing Industry/ Project
experiments / writing of code Sites
Using relevent
Analysis of Data software

Results and Fine tuning the Laboratory /

experiment using the Data Industry/ Project
Analysis Sites

Report writing
Submission of Project Report and
Viva voce
 Department of Technical Education, Karnataka
DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER SCIEBNCE & ENGINEERING
FIFTH & SIXTH SEMESTER
(Final end examination will be in Sixth Semester)
SUBJECT: PROJECT WORK I & II

PROJECT WORK – II

PHASE – II- VI Semester

Contact Hrs/Week: 3 Hrs Total : 48 Hrs

PROJECT REPORT FORMULATION

Items to be included in the Project Report

The following items should be included in the Project Report:

1. The project report must contain the following:

 Introduction
 Objectives
 Tools/Environment Used
 Analysis Document (This should include SRS in proper structure based on Software
Engineering concepts, E-R diagrams/Class diagrams/any related diagrams (if the
former are not applicable), Data flow diagrams/other similar diagrams (if the former
is not applicable), Data dictionary)
 Design Document (Modularization details, Data integrity & constraints including
database design, Procedural design, User interface design)
 Program code (Complete code (well indented)/Detailed specification instead of
code*, Comments & Description. The program code should always be developed in
such a way that it includes complete error handling, passing of parameters as
required, placement of procedure/function statements as needed.)
 Testing (Test case designs are to be included separately for Unit testing, Integration
testing, System testing; Reports of the outcome of Unit testing, Integration testing,
System testing are to be included separately. Also, details of debugging and code
improvement are to be included.)
 Input and Output Screens
 Implementation of Security for the Software developed (In case, you have set up a
User Name and Password for your software, you should ensure the security of User
Name and Password during transmission to server)
 Limitations of the Project
 Future Application of the Project
 References and Bibliography
1. Project reports should be typed neatly in Times New Roman letters with font size 14 for titles
and 12 for text on both sides of the paper with 1.5 line spacing on a A4 size paper (210 x
297 mm). The margins should be: Left - 1.5", Right - 1", Top and Bottom - 0.75".
2. The total number of reports (Soft bound) to be prepared are
 One copy to the department library
 One copy to the concerned guide(s)
 One copy to the candidate.
3. Before taking the final printout, the approval of the concerned guide(s) is mandatory and
suggested corrections, if any, must be incorporated.
4. Every copy of the report must contain
 Inner title page (White)
 Outer title page with a plastic cover
 Candidate declaration and Certificate in the format enclosed both from the institution
and the organization where the project is carried out.
 An abstract (synopsis) not exceeding 100 words, indicating salient features of the work.
5. The organization of the report should be as follows

1. Inner title page

2. Abstract or Synopsis
3. Acknowledgments Usually numbered in
roman
4. Table of Contents
5. List of table & figures (optional)
Chapters (to be numbered in Arabic) containing Introduction-, which usually specifies
the scope of work and its importance and relation to previous work and the present
developments, Main body of the report divided appropriately into chapters, sections and
subsections.
The chapters, sections and subsections may be numbered in the decimal form for e.g.
Chapter 2, sections as 2.1, 2.2 etc., and subsections as 2.2.3, 2.5.1 etc.
The chapter must be left or right justified (font size 16). Followed by the title of
chapter centered (font size 18), section/subsection numbers along with their headings must
be left justified with section number and its heading in font size 16 and subsection and its
heading in font size 14. The body or the text of the report should have font size 12.
The figures and tables must be numbered chapter wise
The last chapter should contain the summary of the work carried, contributions if any,
their utility along with the scope for further work.
 Reference and Bibliography: The references should be numbered serially in the order
of their occurrence in the text and their numbers should be indicated within square brackets for
e.g. [3]. The section on references should list them in serial order in the following format.
1. For textbooks –R S Khandpur, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill.
2. For papers – Y.Javadi and I. Sattari, Welding distortion in pipes, Journal of pressure
vessels and piping, Vol 85, Aug 2008, pp 337-343

Separator sheets, used if any, between chapters, should be of thin paper

SOFTWARE TOOLS:

Only Open Source Software‟s Should Be Used to Carry out the Project Code in Project Phase –
II

FORMAT OF LOG SHEETS (To be verified during IA verification and bounded with the
project synopsis)

To be filled as per Project Work Schedule given in the spread sheet

Sl.No. Date Task Progress of Task Initials of staff Evaluation

in charge (10 Marks

I A Marks:

Scheme of Evaluation

1 Log record 05
2 Synopsis & Report 10
3 Presentation 10
Total 25
 END EXAM PROJECT WORK – II EVALUATION
( End of 6th semester only)

1 Report 25
2 Presentation 25
3 Demonstration 25
4 Viva-Voce 25
TOTAL 100

Laboratory Equipments

A separate lab dedicated to CASP and Project work should be established

CANDIDATE’S DECLARATION

I, ------------------------------------------ the student of Diploma in -----------------------------

Department bearing Reg No---------------------------------------of ---------------------------------------
------- hereby declare that I own full responsibility for the information, results and conclusions
provided in this project work titled “------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------- “submitted to Board of Technical Examinations, Government of Karnataka for
the award of Diploma in ______________________
To the best of my knowledge, this project work has not been submitted in part or full
elsewhere in any other institution/organization for the award of any certificate/diploma/degree. I
have completely taken care in acknowledging the contribution of others in this academic work. I
further declare that in case of any violation of intellectual property rights and particulars
declared, found at any stage, I, as the candidate will be solely responsible for the same.

Date:
Place: Signature of candidate
Name: --------------------
Reg No-------------------
 DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION
NAME OF THE INSTITUTION
Address with pin code
Department of ……………………………………………………..
Year _________

CERTIFICATE

Certified that this project report entitled “ --------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------” which is being

submitted by Mr./Ms. ………………………….……………….., Reg. No…..……………, a bonafide
student of …………………………………….in partial fulfillment for the award of Diploma in
________ Engineering during the year ……………………... is record of students own work carried
out under my/our guidance. It is certified that all corrections/suggestions indicated for internal
Assessment have been incorporated in the Report and one copy of it being deposited in the polytechnic
library.

The project report has been approved as it satisfies the academic requirements in respect of
Project work prescribed for the said diploma.

It is further understood that by this certificate the undersigned do not endorse or approve
any statement made, opinion expressed or conclusion drawn there in but approve the project
only for the purpose for which it is submitted.

Guide(s) Head of Department Principal

Name and signature

Examiners
1. 2
 Laboratory Equipments
A separate lab should be established and dedicated to carry out project work for the students.

SN Item Qty
1 Computers with latest configuration 20
2 Switch – 32 port 01
3 I/O boxes 20
4 Structured Networking For all systems
5 Internet Connection For all 20 systems
6 Software‟s As required

ROADMAP FOR PROJECT GUIDES

1. The project work is proposed to be carried out during the V and VI semesters so that
learners prepare during the V semester, do some field work based on the preparation
during the mid semester vacation and report the analysis and inferences during the VI
semester.
2. The learners would reach a level of maturity by the time they reach V semester and so a
meaningful project lasting for a year can be executed by them.
3. To execute the project with involvement needs constant guidance and monitoring of the
progress of the learners by the guide.
4. This does not mean teacher has to advice learners.
5. Be confident about the ability of the learner and “intellectually provoke” them with
challenging questions. These questions should prompt the learners to search information
and update themselves (to be carried out during the first two weeks).
6. Do not feed information to learners. Instead crate a „cognitive dissonance‟ (a
challenging question or situation that the learner is not able to find an immediate answer
but feels the need to search for information to find a solution).
7. Defer judgement on learners and give them identified sources if required like a journal
article, book or a web site.
8. Even if the learners report their inability to solve do NOT give or prescribe a solution.
9. Be patient and give time for the learner to construct his knowledge.
10. Give corrective feedback to the learner by challenging his solutions so that his logic is
questioned and it develops further.
11. This leads to the first activity viz., literature survey and conceiving a project.
12. During this phase meet the project team in a group and create a healthy competition
among the learners to search different sources and synthesise their findings in the group.
13. Aim for bringing out a workable innovative project conceived within the first eight
weeks as given in the schedule attached.
14. During these two phases and the third phase the teacher should assess the strengths and
weakness of the members of the group and allocate differential work to team members
on the remaining tasks to be carried out during the next thirty weeks.
15. This is to ensure active participation of all the members of the team.
16. By the end of the twelfth week finalise the project and a schedule of further activities for
each member indicating the time frame in which his activities are to be executed may be
made ready. A soft copy of this schedule may be collected from each learner by the
guide to follow up.
17. This schedule prepared by each learner need to be documented for checking further
progress of the project.
18. The next few phases of the project may require active guidance of the guide especially
regarding the sources of collecting data, if a sample data is to be collected the number of
units has to be decided, collating the data/fabricating, tryout/analysis and finally coming
out with meaningful conclusions or models or application.
19. Data like models, designs, technical specifications, source code, protocols and original
records need be collected from one authentic source as there will not be any variation.
The teacher may guide the learners to authentic source.
20. Data having limited variability like product/service quality, processes and standards,
procedures need to be collected from a sample as there is a variation. The number of
units from whom (source) the data is to be collected is called sample. The sample needs
to be representative of the expected variation. The decision on the size of the sample
and the number of units need guidance from the teacher. For example, data regarding
the quality of a product/service need be collected from 3 to 5 personnel at different
levels of a service provider or dealers of a product. The numbers given are suggestive
but a guide based on his experience has to make valid suggestions.
21. Data having a wide range of variation like customer satisfaction where the customers are
members of the public need a larger number of units to accommodate the diversity. A
tool like questionnaire with predetermined questions need to be prepared, tried out on a
small sample and finalise the questions. Data may be collected from at least 30 units.
This number is suggested to apply statistical analysis for meaningful conclusions.
Guides may decide on the sample size depending on the accessibility of data.
22. The intention of the above three points viz., 19, 20 and 21 is to ensure objectivity in data
collection i.e., to reduce the subjectivity of the human mind.
23. All the above activities need to be completed before three to four weeks before the end
of V semester (refer the spread sheet related to scheduling).
24. The learners may be instructed to collect data objectively with identified sample during
the next 4 to six weeks which includes the mid semester holidays. This would enable the
learners to visit the field and collect data without the constraint of reporting to institution
and attending classes on a regular basis.
25. The collected data need to be organised and entered to spread sheets or similar formats
for analysis. Qualitative data may be converted to quantitative using a rating scale or
similar data organisation procedures.
26. The result of most analysis on spreadsheet could be obtained in tables or graphs as per
the requirement.
27. Activities mentioned in points 24, 25 and 26 may be carried out by learners during 4 to 8
weeks after commencement of VI semester.
28. Interpretation of the analysed tables and graphs to arrive at meaningful inference. The
guide at this stage may defer his ideas on interpretation allowing the learners to do this.
In case the learners err in the process they may be given corrective feedback.
29. A report of the whole process of doing the project may be written, word processed and
submitted in triplicate.
30. Guides may contact industries and try to solve their problems so that the learners get a
field experience and they get ready for the industry.
31. Innovations and innovative practices may be encouraged among the learners to be
pursued as a project. Developing prototypes, (in simulation or real) trying out feasibility
of new ideas, changing existing systems by adding modules, combining, assembling new
modules and developing new systems may be given higher priority over routine bookish
projects.
32. The schedule of events proposed is for an investigative project as a model. Guides may
alter the prescribed schedule to suit the kind of innovative projects sited in point No.31
above.
33. Industry personnel may be involved in conceiving, executing and evaluating projects.
This gives credibility to the institute and acceptance of learners for absorption into the
company.

GUIDELINES TO LEARNERS TO CARRY OUT A TWO SEMESTER

PROJECT

1. Carry out the project work through the V and VI semesters. Preparation must be done
during the V semester and based on this, field work should be done during the mid
semester vacation and reporting of analysis and inferences should be done in the VI
semester.
2. You have the ability and the level of maturity needed to conceive an innovative and
meaningful project accomplishing which gives you recognition by the industry and
empowers you with the power of knowledge.
3. Understand your strength and weakness and make an effort to find the strength and
weakness of other peers in the team.
4. Complement each other‟s strength rather than compete with peers within the team. This
will enable you to complete a comprehensive and innovative project relevant to the
industrial needs rather than doing a routine copy of what others have done.
5. Seek guidance from the teacher and update him/her about the progress.
6. Be confident about your ability and that of other members of your group. Take extra
efforts to collect information, share with your peers and synthesise your knowledge.
7. Question everything including the ideas of your teacher. Accept the ideas and
instructions which are internally consistent (logical).
8. Involve actively in group activities and contribute towards the tasks.
9. Do not depend too much on the teacher as a source of information, search on your own
and build your knowledge structure. Search for authentic sources like journal articles,
books and authentic sites rather than blogs and tweets.
10. Though brief, record your thoughts and activities including searches immediately.
11. Prepare a schedule for your work on a spread sheet and encourage your peers to do the
same.
12. Show your schedule and that of others to the teacher and get his feedback.
13. Keep reviewing the schedule every fortnight and take corrective steps if needed. For
doing this keep the general guideline schedule given in the curriculum as a backdrop.
14. Tools used for data collection like instruments, testing machines, questions to be asked
and software may be tried out and standardised by the twelfth week of the project. Seek
the teacher‟s help who is experienced in doing this.
15. Collect data dispassionately or objectively (without applying your personal prejudice).
Complete this task before the VI semester begins.
16. While entering data into the spread sheet ask your peer member to verify. This will
ensure accuracy of data entry.
17. Use appropriate mathematics/statistics for calculations. Seek help from external sources
(other than your teacher) if required.
18. The results of your analysis need to be graphically represented and documented. You
may also add photographs and video clips to increase the validity.
19. This task needs to be completed within 8 weeks after commencement of VI semester.
20. Interpret the data (after analysis) and arrive at meaningful inferences on your own in
discussion with your peers. Get it ratified by your teacher. Suggestions from the teacher
may be discussed among your peers and incorporated if they are internally consistent.
21. The project report may be word processed (videos, photographs attached in soft copy)
and submitted in triplicate two weeks before the end of VI semester.
22. Involve passionately in the team work, make constructive contributions and come out
with an industry friendly project which will equip you in your professional development.
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject: Software Testing

Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

SN Chapter Hours Marks

1 Introduction 2 5

2 Fundamentals of testing 10 25

3 Testing levels and types 10 25

4 Static testing techniques 10 25

5 Dynamic testing and test case 10 25

design techniques

6 Managing the testing process 8 20

7 Software testing tools 4 10

8 Code of ethics for software 2 5

professionals

Seminars, Guest Lectures and 5

other innovation interactions
Tests 3
64 140+5
Total (Objective Type)
 Detailed Contents

1 Introduction
1.1 Power of software
1.2 Challenges in software projects
1.3 Software Fiascos
1.3.1 Ariane 5
1.3.2 Patriot Missile
1.3.3 Mars Pathfinder
1.3.4 CT Scanner
1.3.5 The great bank robbery
1.3.6 FBI Virtual case file
1.4 Reasons for software failure
1.5 What is the solution?
1.5.1 Software Quality Assurance
1.5.2 Software Testing
1.5.3 Code of Ethics
1.6 Software Testing Professionals
1.6.1 Skill sets for Testing Professionals
1.6.2 Tasks handled by Testing Professionals

2 Fundamentals of Testing
2.1 What is Testing?
2.1.1 Testing versus Debugging
2.1.2 Testing and Bebugging
2.1.3 Verification and Validation
2.1.4 Root Cause Analysis
2.2 Significance of Testing
2.2.1 Cost of Quality
2.3 Psychology of Testing
2.4 Testing Choices
2.4.1 In-house Testing
2.4.2 Outsourcing
2.5 Who does the testing?
2.5.1 Developers as Testers
2.5.2 Independent team Testing
2.5.3 Buddy Testing
2.6 Testing Phases
2.6.1 V Model
2.6.2 Testing and Life cycle models
2.7 Testing the Systems
2.8 Testing the Strategies
2.8.1 Static Testing
2.8.2 Dynamic Testing
2.8.3 Why testing is difficult?
2.8.4 Test Case
2.8.5 Test Oracle
 2.8.6 Test Software
2.8.7 Manual versus Automated Testing
2.8.8 Testing Software of different Technologies
2.9 Metrics in Testing Phase
2.10 When Testing is Complete?
2.10.1 Criteria for Completion of Testing
2.11 Risk-based Testing
2.11.1 Types of risks
2.12 The Myths and Realities of Testing

3 Testing Levels and Types

3.1 Testing Levels
3.1.1 Unit/Component Testing
3.1.2 Module Testing
3.1.3 Integration Testing
3.1.4 System Testing
3.1.5 Acceptance Testing
3.2 Testing Approaches
3.2.1 Static Testing vs Dynamic Testing
3.2.2 Positive Testing vs Negative Testing
3.2.3 Top-down Testing vs Bottom-up Testing
3.2.4 Functional Testing vs Structural Testing
3.2.5 Mutation Testing
3.2.6 Confirmation Testing
3.2.7 Regression Testing
3.3 Types of Testing
3.3.1 Smoke Testing
3.3.2 Black Box Testing
3.3.3 White Box Testing
3.3.4 Interface Testing
3.3.5 Use Case Testing
3.3.6 Gorilla Testing
3.3.7 Alpha Testing
3.3.8 Beta Testing
3.3.9 Field Trail / Operational Testing
3.3.10 Performance Testing / Load Testing
3.3.11 Stress Testing
3.3.12 Accessibility Testing
3.3.13 Conformance Testing
3.3.14 Internationalization Testing
3.3.15 Security Testing
3.3.16 Maintenance Testing
3.3.17 Acceptance Testing
3.3.18 Documentation Testing

4 Static Testing Techniques

4.1 Static Testing
4.1.1 Advantages of Static Testing
 4.2 Manual Reviews
4.2.1 Formal Review Process
4.2.2 Informal Reviews
4.2.3 Walkthroughs
4.2.4 Inspections
4.2.5 Making Reviews Successful
4.2.6 Checklists
4.3 Formal Code Reviews
4.3.1 Coding Guidelines
4.3.2 Programming style
4.3.3 C Coding Guidelines
4.3.4 Code Optimization
4.3.5 Java Coding Guidelines
4.4 Static Analysis using Tools
4.4.1 Tool for Readability Improvement / Indenting
4.4.2 Portability Testing Tool
4.4.3 Symbolic Execution

5 Dynamic Testing and Test case design

Techniques
5.1 Dynamic Testing
5.2 Review work products
5.3 Identify Test Objectives
5.4 Test Specifications and Test Design
5.5 Design Test Cases
5.5.1 Black Box Test Case Design Techniques
5.5.2 White Box Test Case Design Techniques
5.5.3 Experience-based Test Case Design Techniques
5.5.4 Case Study #1 : Test Cases for an IVR System
5.5.5 Case Study #2 : Test Case for Finger Print
Recognition System
5.6 Document Test Cases
5.7 Execute Test Cases
5.8 Generate Incident Report / Anomaly Report
5.9 Log the Defects
5.10 Test Documentation Standards
5.11 Formal Methods of Testing

6 Managing the Testing Process

6.1 Management Commitment
6.1.1 Organization Structure
6.2 Testing Process management
6.2.1 Options for Managers
6.2.2 Testing Process Management Activities
6.3 Planning, Budgeting and Scheduling the Testing
Phase
6.3.1 Test Plan
6.4 Alignment of the Process to the Project
 6.5 Team Formation
6.6 Infrastructure
6.6.1 Testing Tools
6.7 Reviewing, Monitoring and Risk Management
6.7.1 Risk Management
6.7.2 Test Reports
6.8 Metrics
6.8.1 Software Reliability
6.9 Defect tracking
6.9.1 Classification of Defects
6.10 Configuration Management
6.11 Test Closure and Process Improvement
6.11.1 Software testing Maturity Model (SW-TMM)
6.12 Information Security

7 Software Testing Tools

7.1 Need for Tools
7.2 Classification of Tools
7.2.1 Functional / Regression Testing Tools
7.2.2 Performance / Load Testing Tools
7.2.3 Testing Process Management Tools
7.3 Benefits of Tools
7.4 Risks Associated with the Tools
7.5 Does your Organization Need Tools?
7.6 Selecting Tools
7.7 Introducing the tools in the Testing Process

8 Code of Ethics for Software Professionals

8.1 Human Ethics
8.2 Professional Ethics
8.3 Ethical Issues in Software Engineering
8.4 Code of Ethics and Professional Practice
8.4.1 Software Engineering Code of Ethics and
Professional Practice
8.5 Ethical issues: Right versus Wrong

Text book:

ISTQB Certification Study Guide, Dr. K.V.K.K. Prasad, Wiley-Dreamtech Press, ISBN:
9788177227116

Reference Books:

1. Software Testing Principles and Practices, Srinivasn desikan, Goplaswamy Ramesh,

Pearson, ISBN: 9788177581218
2. Software Testing Tools, Dr. K.V.K.K. Prasad, Wiley- Dreamtech Press, ISBN 10:
8177225324
 ISBN 13: 9788177225327
3. Software Testing Concepts and Tools, Nageshwara Rao Pusuluri, DreamTech, ISBN
10: 8177227122 ISBN 13: 9788177227123

General Objectives:
After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to

1. Importance of developing quality software and how software testing helps in

achieving this goal.
2. Foundations of software testing, important concepts and the testing process
3. Understand Testing levels and testing methods
4. Study Static testing – how to carry out testing without executing the code
5. Learn about dynamic testing and Test case design techniques. How to do the testing
after executing the program and how to design test cases with examples
6. Know the details of Managing the testing Process
7. Know the need for testing tools and how to select a tool.

Specific Objectives

1 Introduction
Importance of software
The challenges in Software development
The software fiascos
Reasons for software failures
How to avoid software failures?
Testing professional’s role
Skills required for testing professionals

2 Fundamentals of testing
What is testing?
Psychology of testing
When to test and where to test?
How to test?
Test case and test oracles
Metrics in testing phases
Criteria for completion of testing
Myths and realities of testing

3 Testing Levels and Types

Levels of Testing
Testing approaches
Types of testing
4 Static Testing Techniques
What is static testing?
Advantages of static testing
Difference between static testing and dynamic testing
Review mechanisms and formal review process
Checklists
Static code review and coding guidelines for C and Java

5 Dynamic Testing and Test case design Techniques

Dynamic testing methodology
Test specifications and test design
Techniques for test case design
Test case documentation
Test case execution and incident reporting
Defect logs

6 Managing the Testing Process

Testing process management activities
Project planning, budgeting and scheduling
Testing team formation
Reviews and monitoring of projects
Risk management
Metrics in testing phase
Defect racking
Configuration management
Testing process improvement
Testing standards and information security testing

7 Software Testing Tools

Appreciate the need for automated testing tools
Understand the requirements of testing tools
Get to know the various categories of testing tools and their functionality
Learn how to select a testing tool
Learn the process of introducing the tools in an organization

8 Code of Ethics for Software Professionals

What is Professional ethics?
Ethical issues for software professionals
Code of ethics and professional practices for software professionals
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Sixth Semester
Subject: Software Testing

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.

Section - I
1 a. Fill in the blanks 5x1=5
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v
b. Write a short note on challenges in software projects 5

Section – II
2. a).. What is the significance of testing? Explain 5
b).Explain the strategy of developers as a Tester 5
c).Write a note on V model 5
3 a).Differentiate static v/s Dynamic Testing 5
b). What is a Test case? Explain the concept of Testing Process using test case 5
c). What is the significance of Mutation Testing ? 5
4 a). Describe the different levels of Testing 10
b). Compare Top down v/s Bottom up Testing 5

Section-III
5 a). Write a note on Beta Testing 5
b). Explain The different Check list in Static Testing 10
6 a). Write a note on formal review process 5
b). Explain the concept of Code optimization 5
 c). What are the Guidelines for Programming style? 5
7. a). Write a note on Boundary value Analysis 5
b). Compare Structural Testing at Module level v/s System level 5

Section -IV
8. a).Write a note on Cost effect Analysis 5
b). Explain Equivalence Partitioning 5
c) Write a note on Formal method of Testing 5
9. a). Classify the testing tools 5
b). Writer a note on Software Reliability 5
c). Explain Configuration management 5

10. a).Explain the different classes of Testing Tools 10

b). Write a note on Ethical issues in Software engineering 5
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Sixth Semester

Subject: Software Testing Lab

Contact Hrs / week: 6 Total hrs: 96

Note: Select the programming languages learnt in previous semesters.
(Such as java, PHP, Ruby etc.) .
Testing open source Tools may be used ( Eg. Selenium)
SN TOPIC

1 Understand The Automation Testing Approach (Theory Concept )

2 Using Selenium IDE, Write a test suite containing minimum 4 test cases
3 Conduct a test suite for nay two web sites
4 Install Selenium server and demonstrate it using a script in Java/PHP
5 Write and test a program to login a specific web page
6 Write and test a program to update 10 student records into table into Excel file
7 Write and test a program to select the number of students who have scored more
than 60 in any one subject ( or all subjects )
8 Write and test a program to provide total number of objects present / available on
the page
9 Write and test a program to get the number of list items in a list / combo box
10 Write and test a program to count number of items present on a desktop

References
1. Testing in 30+ Open Source Tools, Rahul Shende, Shroff Publishers &
Distributor Pvt. Ltd, ISBN 13: 9789350231005

( page numbers from 15 to 117 )

2. http://seleniumhq.org/

3. http://sourceforge.net/projects/sahi/

4. http://testng.org/doc/index.html
 Scheme of Valuation
1 Record 05
2 Procedure writing 30
3 Execution 40
4 Results 05
5 Viva Voce 20
Total 100

Lab requirements

SN Item Quantity
1 Computers 20
2 Internet Connection : Minimum 2 Mbps Shared for 20
3 Switch – 32 port 01

Open Source Software may be encouraged

 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science
Sixth Semester

Subject: Embedded and Real-Time Systems

Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

Slno Chapters Hours Marks

1 Introduction to Embedded Systems 4 10
2 Architecture of Embedded Systems 10 25
3 Programming for Embedded Systems 10 25
4 Hardware Platforms 4 10
5 Communication Interfaces 8 20
6 Embedded / RTOS Concepts 8 20
7 Overview of Embedded / Real-Time 6 15
Operating Systems
8 Representative Embedded Systems 4 10
9 Future Trends 2 5
Seminar, Guest Lectures and Industry 5
Innovation
Tests 3
64 140 + 5
Objectives

Details of Contents

1 Introduction to Embedded Systems

1.1 What is an Embedded System?
1.2 Application Areas
1.3 Categories of Embedded Systems
1.3.1 Standalone Embedded Systems
1.3.2 Real-Time Systems
1.3.3 Networked Information Appliances
1.3.4 Mobile Devices
1.4 Overview of Embedded System Architecture
1.5 Specialties of Embedded Systems
1.5.1 Reliability
1.5.2 Performance
1.5.3 Power Consumption
1.5.4 Cost
 1.5.5 Size
1.5.6 Limited User Interface
1.5.7 Software Upgradation capability
1.6 Recent trends in Embedded Systems
1.6.1 Processor Power
1.6.2 Memory
1.6.3 Operating System
1.6.4 Communication Interfaces and Networking Capability
1.6.5 Programming Languages
1.6.6 Development Tools
1.6.7 Programmable Hardware

2 Architecture of Embedded Systems

2.1 Hardware Architecture
2.1.1 Central Processing Unit
2.1.2 Memory
2.1.3 Clock Circuitary
2.1.4 Watch Dog Timer / Reset Circuitry
2.1.5 Chip Select
2.1.6 Input / Output Devices
2.1.7 Debugg Port
2.1.8 Communication Interfaces
2.1.9 Power Supply Unit
2.2 Software Architecture
2.2.1 Services Provided by an OS
2.2.2 Architecture of an Embedded OS
2.2.3 Categories of Embedded OS
2.3 Application Software
2.4 Communication Software
2.4.1 TCP/IP Protocol Suite
2.5 Process of Generating Executable Image
2.5.1 Cross Platform Development
2.5.2 Boot Sequence
2.6 Development / Testing Tools
2.6.1 Hardware Development Testing Tools
2.6.2 Software Development Testing Tools

3 Programming for Embedded Systems

3.1 Overview of ANSI C
3.2 GNU Development Tools
3.3 Bit Manipulation Using C
3.2.1 Calculation of CRC
3.4 Memory Management
3.5 Timing of Programmes
3.6 Device Drivers
3.6.1 Tools for Device Driver Development
3.7 Productivity Tools
 3.7.1 Make file
3.7.2 Debugger
3.7.3 Profiler
3.7.4 Indenting
3.7.5 Revision Control
3.8 Code Optimization
3.9 C Coding Guidelines
3.10 Programming in C++
3.11 Programming in Java
3.11.1 Java 2 Micro Edition (J2ME)
3.11.2 Server Side Programming
3.11.3 Java Development Tool

4 Hardware Platforms
4.1 Types of Hardware Platforms
4.1.1 Single Board Computer
4.1.2 PC Add On Cards
4.1.3 Custom Built Hardware Platform
4.2 89C51 Microcontroller Development Board
4.2.1 Development Board Features
4.2.2 Hardware Description

5 Communication Interfaces
5.1 Need for Communication Interfaces
5.2 RS232/UART
5.2.1 RS232 Communication Parameters
5.2.2 RS232 Connector Configurations
5.2.3 UART
5.2.4 NULL Modem Cable Connection

5.3 RS422/RS485
5.4 USB
5.4.1 USB Physical Interface
5.4.2 Features of USB
5.5 Infrared
5.6 IEEE 1394 Fire wire
5.7 Ethernet
5.8 IEEE 802.11
5.9 Bluetooth
5.9.1 Bluetooth System java Specification
5.9.2 Bluetooth Protocol Architecture

6 Embedded / RTOS Concepts

6.1 Architecture of Kernel
6.2 Tasks and task Schedulers
6.2.1 Task States
6.2.2 Context Switching
6.2.3 Scheduling Algorithm
 6.2.4 Rate Monotonic Analysis
6.2.5 Task management Function Calls
6.3 Interrupt service Routines
6.4 Semaphores
6.4.1 Semaphore Management Function Calls
6.5 Mutex
6.5.1 Mutex Management Function Calls
6.6 Mail Boxes
6.6.1 Mail Box Management Function Calls
6.7 Message Queues
6.7.1 Message Queue Management Function Calls
6.8 Event registers
6.8.1 Event Register Management Function Calls
6.9 Pipes
6.9.1 Pipe Management Function Calls
6.10 Signals
6.10.1 Signal Management Function Calls
6.11 Timers
6.11.1 Timer Management Function Calls
6.12 Memory Management
6.13 Priority Inversion Problem
6.13.1 Priority Inheritance
6.13.2 Pathfinder Problem Revisted

7 Overview of Embedded / ROT System

7.1 Off-the-Shell Operating Systems
7.1.1 Commonalities of the OS
7.1.2 Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX)
7.1.3 Difference in OS
7.2 Embedded OS
7.2.1 Embedded NT
7.2.2 Windows XP Embedded
7.2.3 Embedded Linux
7.3 RTOS
7.3.1 QNX Neutrino
7.3.2 VxWorks
7.3.3 MicroC/OS_II
7.3.4 RTLinux
7.4 Handheld OSs
7.4.1 Palm OS
7.4.2 Symbian OS
7.4.3 Windows CE
7.4.4 Windows CE.NET
8 Representative embedded Systems
8.1 Digital Thermometer
8.2 Handheld Computer
8.3 Navigation System
 8.4 IP Phone
8.5 Software-defined Radio
8.6 Smart Cards
8.7 RF Tags
9 Future Trends
9.1 Emerging Technologies
9.1.1 Pervasive / Ubiquitous
9.1.2 Java for Embedded Systems
9.1.3 Security of Embedded systems
9.1.4 Embedding Intelligence
9.2 Emerging Applications
9.3 The greatest songs are still unsung

Text book:
1. Embedded / Real-Time Systems : Concepts, Design And Programming, Black
Book , Dr. K V K K Prasad , DreamTech Press, ISBN: 9788177224610

Reference
1. Embedded System Design , Frank Vahid / Tony Givargis, Wiley, ISBN:
9788126508372

General Objectives:

1. To know the important features, specialties and simple architecture of ES

2. An overview of the S/W architecture and the tools required for development of
systems
3. To Understand the H/w platforms and communication interfaces for embed
systems
4. To understand the concepts of Embedded / RTOS.
5. To know the architectures of representative embedded systems

Specific Objectives:

1 Introduction to Embedded System

Understand what is an embedded systems
List the various application areas in which embedded system are used
Categorize embedded system
Gain knowledge of the architecture of the embedded systems
Understand the requirements of embedded systems
Learn about the recent trends in embedded system development
2 Architecture of Embedded Systems
Learn the hardware architecture of an Embedded system
Gain knowledge of the software architecture of an embedded system
Get an overview of the TCP/IP protocol architecture
Understand the process of creating an executable image for the embedded
system
Grasp the details of Cross platform development
Know the various tools required for Hardware/software development

3 Programming for Embedded Systems

Understand the important features of ANSI standard for C language
Learn the intricacies of C programming for Embedded Systems through
examples in bit manipulations
Learn Function calls for FILE I/O & memory management
Understand the importance of code Optimization
Gain knowledge of coding guidelines
Appreciate the importance of C++ & JAVA programming languages for
Embedded software development

4 Hardware Platforms
Gain knowledge of different types of hardware platforms
Learn in brief about a simple 89C51 based development board

5. Communication Interfaces
Appreciate the need for communication interface
Understand the Ethernet & Wireless LAN interfaces
Grasp the details of IEEE 1394 Interface
Gain knowledge of Infrared & Bluetooth wireless interfaces

6 Embedded /RTOS Concepts

Understand the architecture of the Kernel of an OS
Learn the details of Task scheduling algorithm
Gain knowledge of inter-task communication
Understand the details of Kernel objects such as tasks, task scheduler, ISR,
Semaphores, Mutexes, Mail Boxes, Message Queues, Event Registers, Pipes,
Signals & timers

7 Overview of Embedded / Real Time Operating Systems

Understand the commonalities & differences in the operating systems available
off – the – shelf
Get a good understanding of commercial & open source OS used in embedded /
real time systems as well as hand held/ mobile devices

8 Representative Embedded System

Understand the architecture of Representative Embedded systems viz., digital
thermometer, hand held computer, navigation system, IP Phone and software-
defined Radio
9 Future trends
Gain & understanding of the emerging Technologies
Learn about new applications of these Technologies
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Sixth Semester
Subject: Embedded and Real Time Systems

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.

Section - I
1 a. Fill in the blanks 5x1=5
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v
b). Explain the building blocks of navigation system 5

Section – II
2. a). what is an Embedded system? List the various applications of embedded
systems 5
b). Differentiate between hard real time system & soft real time system. 5
c) Explain the internal architecture of a processor 5
3 a). Differentiate between an embedded OS and a real time OS 5
b). What is cross platform development? List its tools 5
c). Explain the process of generating an executable image for embedded
software 5
4 a). Explain the boot sequence of an embedded system 5
b) Write a C functions i) to demonstrate bit wise operators?
ii) to check whether the bit is set to 1 or not 10
 Section-III
5 a). Write a C program to implement CRC 32 algorithm 15

6 a).List the important features of 89C51 development board 5

b). List the important features of ATmega 128 microcontroller 5
c). What are the reasons for the need of communication interfaces 5

7. a). What are the advantages of USB over RS 232 5

b). Explain the protocol architecture of Ethernet LAN 5
c). What is IrDA interface? What are its advantages & limitations 5
Section -IV
8. a). What are the objects of an OS kernel 5
b). Explain the difference between semaphore & mutex 5
c) Differentiate between preemptive & non preemptive OS 5

9. a). What are the memory management services provided by the kernel 5
b). List the various mobile / handheld OS and explain their features in brief
10
10. a). what is a smart card? List the various applications of smart card 5
b). Explain applications of pervasive computers and ubiquitous computers
5
c). Write a short note on embedded intelligence 5
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science
Sixth Semester

Subject: Information Storage and Management

Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

Slno Chapters Hours Marks

1 Introduction to Information Storage and 4 10
Management
2 Direct-Attached Storage & Introduction 4 10
to SCSI
3 Storage System Environment 6 15
4 Data Protection: RAID 6 15
5 Intelligent Storage System 6 15
6 Storage Area Networks 8 20
7 Network-Attached Storage 6 15
8 Content Addressed Storage 4 10
9 Storage Virtualization 8 20
10 Backup and Recovery 6 15
Seminar, Guest Lectures and Industry 3
Innovation
Tests 3
64 140 + 5
Objectives

Details of Contents

1 Introduction to Information Storage and

Management
1.1 Information Storage
1.1.1 Data
1.1.2 Types of Data
1.1.3 Information
1.1.4 Storage
1.2 Evolution of Storage Technology and
Architecture
1.3 Data Center Infrastructure
1.3.1 Core Elements
1.3.2 Key Requirements for Data Center Elements
 1.3.3 Managing Storage Infrastructure
1.4 Key Challenges in Managing Information
1.5 Information Lifecycle
1.5.1 Information Lifecycle Management
1.5.2 ILM Implementation
1.5.3 ILM Benefits

2 Direct-Attached Storage and Introduction

to SCSI
2.1 Types of DAS
2.1.1 Internal DAS
2.1.2 External DAS
2.2 DAS Benefits and Limitations
2.3 Disk Drive Interfaces
2.3.1 IDE/ATA
2.3.2 SATA
2.3.3 Parallel SCSI
2.4 Introduction to parallel SCSI
2.4.1 Evolution of SCSI
2.4.2 SCSI interfaces
2.4.3 SCSI -3 Architecture
2.4.4 Parallel SCSI Addressing
2.5 SCSI Command model
2.5.1 CDB Structure
2.5.2 Operation Code
2.5.3 Control Field
2.5.4 Status

3 Storage System Environment

3.1 Components of a Storage System Environment
3.1.1 Host
3.1.2 Connectivity
3.1.3 Storage
3.2 Disk Drive Components
3.2.1 Platter
3.2.2 Spindle
3.2.3 Read/Write Head
3.2.4 Actuator Arm Assembly
3.2.5 Controller
3.2.6 Physical Disk Structure
3.2.7 Zoned Bit Recording
3.2.8 Logical Block Addressing
3.3 Disk Drive Performance
3.3.1 Disk Service Time
3.4 Logical Components of the Host
3.4.1 Operating System
3.4.2 Device Driver
3.4.3 Volume Manager
 3.4.4 File System
3.4.5 Application

4 Data Protection: RAID

4.1 Implementation of RAID
4.1.1 Software RAID
4.1.2 Hardware RAID
4.2 RAID Array Components
4.3 RAID Levels
4.3.1 Striping
4.3.2 Mirroring
4.3.3 Parity
4.3.4 RAID 0
4.3.5 RAID 1
4.3.6 Nested RAID
4.3.7 RAID 3
4.3.8 RAID 4
4.3.9 RAID 5
4.3.10 RAID 6
4.4 RAID Comparison
4.5 RAID Impact on Disk Performance
4.5.1 Application IOPS and RAID Configurations
4.6 Hot Spares

5 Intelligent Storage System

5.1 Components of an Intelligent Storage System
5.1.1 Front End
5.1.2 Cache
5.1.3 Back End
5.1.4 Physical Disk
5.2 Intelligent Storage Array
5.2.1 High-end Storage Systems
5.2.2 Midrange Storage System

6 Storage Area Networks

6.1 Fibre Channel: Overview
6.2 The SAN and Its Evolution
6.3 Components of SAN
6.3.1 Node Ports
6.3.2 Cabling
6.3.3 Interconnect Devices
6.3.4 Storage Arrays
6.3.5 SAN Management Software
6.4 FC Connectivity
6.4.1 Point-to-Point
64.2 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop
6.4.3 Fibre Channel Switched Fabric
6.5 Fiber Channel Ports
 6.6 Fibre Channel Architecture
6.6.1 Fibre Channel Protocol Stack
6.6.2 Fibre Channel Addressing
6.6.3 FC Frame
6.6.4 Structure and Organization of FC Data
6.6.5 Flow Control
6.6.6 Classes of Service
6.7 Zoning
6.8 Fibre Channel Login Types
6.9 FC Topologies
6.9.1 Core-Edge Fabric
6.9.2 Mesh Topology

7 Network-Attached Storage
7.1 1General-Purpose Servers vs. NAS Devices
7.2 Benefits of NAS
7.3 NAS File I/O
7.3.1 File Systems and Remote File Sharing
7.3.2 Accessing a File System
7.3.3 File Sharing
7.4 Components of NAS
7.5 NAS Implementations
7.5.1 Integrated NAS
7.5.2 Gateway NAS
7.5.3 Integrated NAS Connectivity
7.5.4 Gateway NAS Connectivity
7.6 NAS File-Sharing Protocols
7.6.1 NFS
7.6.2 CIFS
7.7 NAS I/O Operations
7.7.1 Hosting and Accessing Files on NAS
7.7.2 Factors Affecting NAS Performance and
Availability

8 Content Addressed Storage

8.1 Fixed Content and Archives
8.2 Types of Archives
8.3 Features and Benefits of CAS
8.4 CAS Architecture
8.5 Object Storage and Retrieval in CAS
8.6 CAS Example
8.6.1 Health Care Solution: Storing Patient Studies

9 Storage Virtualization
9.1 Forms of Virtualization
9.1.1 Memory Virtualization
9.1.2 Network Virtualization
9.1.3 Server Virtualization
 9.1.4 Storage Virtualization
9.2 SNIA Storage Virtualization Taxonomy
9.3 Storage Virtualization Configurations
9.4 Storage Virtualization Challenges
9.4.1 Scalability
9.4.2 Functionality
9.4.3 Manageability
9.4.4 Support
9.5 Types of Storage Virtualization
9.5.1 Types of Storage Virtualization
9.5.2 Block-Level Storage Virtualization
9.5.3 File-Level Virtualization

10 Backup and Recovery

10.1 Backup Purpose
10.1.1 Disaster Recovery
10.1.2 Operational Backup
10.1.3 Archival
10.2 Backup Considerations
10.3 Backup Granularity
10.4 Recovery Considerations
10.5 Backup Methods
10.6 Backup Process
10.7 Backup and Restore Operations
10.8 Backup Topologies
10.8.1 Serverless Backup
10.9 Backup in NAS Environments
10.10 Backup Technologies
10.10.1 Backup to Tape
10.10.2 Physical Tape Library
10.10.3 Backup to Disk
10.10.4 Virtual Tape Library

Text book:
1. Information Storage and Management Storing, EMC education Servies, Wiley
India Edition, ISBN: 9788126521470

Reference
1. Storage Networks Explained, Ulf Tropan, Rainer Erkens, Wofgang Muller,
Wiley, ISBN: 9788126518326
General Objectives:

1. To Understand the Concept of Information Storage, Environment & Protection

2. To Know Direct Attached Storage & Intelligent Storage System
3. To Understand SAN with NAS & CAS
4. To Understand Storage Virtualization
5. To Know the Back up Recovery Technologies

Specific Objectives:

1 Introduction to Information Storage and Management

Learn information storage types
Evolution storage technologies
What is the data center infrastructure
To learn Challenges information management and Life cycle

2 Direct-Attached Storage & Introduction to SCSI

Learn the Different types of DAS
Narrate benefits & limitations DAS
Classification of Disk Drive Interfaces
Learn parallel SCSI with its Types & Command model

3 Storage System Environment

Listing out Components of Storage System Environment
Elaborate Disk Drive Component
Learn the fundamentals Laws of governing Laws of Disk Performance
Illustrates logical components of the host

4 Data Protection: RAID

Learn implementation of RAID
Classification RAID Levels
RAID impact performance Analysis

5 Intelligent Storage System

Learn component of Intelligent Storage System
List the Intelligent Storage Array

6 Storage Area Networks

Learn SAN its Evolution
Learn Components of SAN
FC connectivity
Learn Fiber Channel Architecture
FC Topologies

7 Network-Attached Storage
General Purpose Server
 Benefits of NAS
NAS file I/O
What are the Components of NAS
Different Types of NAS implementation
Types of NAS , File Sharing Protocols
I/O Operation of NAS

8 Content Addressed Storage

Learn the types of Archives
Learn features & Benefits of CAS
Architecture of CAS
Learn Object Storage & Retrieval in CAS
AN Example case Study on CAS

9 Storage Virtualization
Learn Different forms of Virtualization
Virtualization Taxonomy
Virtualization Configuration
Virtualization Challenges
Storage Virtualization Types

10 Backup and Recovery

Learn Purpose of Back up
Back up consideration & Granularity
Recovery consideration , methods & Process
Restore operation
Topologies of Back up
NAS Environment Back up
Learn Backup Technologies
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Sixth Semester
Subject: Information Storage and Management

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.

Section - I
1 a. Fill in the blanks
5x1=5
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v
b).Write a note on Key requirement for data center elements 5

Section – II
2. a).What are the characteristics of ILM? Explain. 5
b).What are the Benefits & limitation of DAS 5

c).Explain SCSI-3 Architecture 5

3 a). Write a note on the Physical component of Connectivity 5
b). What is meant by Zoned bit Recording? 5
c). How to measure the Disk Drive Performance? Explain 5
4 a). Explain the concept of mirroring in RAID 5
b). what is the significance of Parity in RAID ? 5
c). Explain how RAID 4 is different from RAID 3 5
 Section-III
5 a). Explain the components of Intelligent storage System 10
b). Write a note on Mid range storage System 5

6 a). Define SAN. Explain its Evolution 5

b). Write a note on Fiber Channel Arbitrated loop 5
c). What is meant by Zoning ? Explain 5

7. a). Explain Fiber Channel Protocol Stack 10

b). What are the Benefits of NAS ? Explain 5
c). Compare NFS with CIFS 5
Section -IV
8. a). Explain the steps involved in hosting & accessing files on NAS 5
b). Explain CAS Architecture 10

9. a). Write a note on Server Virtualization 7

b). Explain file level Virtualization 8
10. a).Explain three Back up Topologies 10
b). Write a note on Virtual tape library 5
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science
Sixth Semester

Subject: Mobile Computing

Contact Hrs / week: 4 Total hrs: 64

Table of Contents

SN Topic Hours Marks

1 Introduction 6 15
2. Mobile Computing Architecture 6 15
3. Mobile computing through telephony 2 5
4. Emerging Technologies 4 10
5. Global Systems for Mobile Communications (GSM) 4 10
6. Short Message Service 4 10
(SMS)
7. General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) 4 10
8. Wireless Application Protocol 6 15
9. CDMA & 3G 6 15
10. Wireless LAN 8 20
11. Intelligent Networks & Internet Working 2 5
12. Next Generation Networks 4 10
13. Seminars, Guest Lectures & other Industry Innovations 5 0
14. Tests 3 0
Total 64 140 + 5
Objectives
 Detailed Contents

1 Introduction
1.1 Mobility of Bits & Bytes
1.1.1 The Convergence leading to ICT
1.2 Wireless- The Beginning
1.2.1 Evolution of Wireless Networks
1.2.2 Evolution of Wireless Data
1.2.3 Evolution of Wireless LAN
1.2.4 Evolution of Wireless PAN
1.3 Mobile Computing
1.3.1 Mobile Computing Functions
1.3.2 Mobile Computing Devices
1.4 Dialog Control
1.5 Networks
1.5.1 Wireline Network
1.5.2 Wireless Networks
1.5.3 Ad hoc Networks
1.5.4 Bearers
1.6 Middleware & Gateways
1.6.1 Communication Middleware
1.6.2 Transaction processing Middleware
1.6.3 Behaviour Management Middleware
1.6.4 Communication Behaviour
1.7 Applications And Services(Contents)
1.8 Developing Mobile computing Applications
1.8.1 New Mobile Applications
1.8.2 Making Legacy Application Mobile
1.9 Security Mobile Computing
1.10 Standards- Why are they necessary?
1.10.1 Who makes the standards?
1.11 Standard Bodies
1.12 Players in the Wireless Space

2 Mobile Computing Architecture

2.1 History Of Computers & Internet
2.2 Internet- The Ubiquitous Network
2.3 Architecture for Mobile Computing
2.4 3-Tier Architecture
2.4.1 Presentation (Tier-1)
2.4.2 Application (Tier-2)
2.4.3 Data (Tier-3)
2.5 Design Consideration for Mobile Computing(Page 41 only)
2.5.1 Client Context manager (Page 42-43 only)
2.5.2 Context Aware Systems
2.6 Mobile Computing Through Internet
2.7 Making Existing Applications Mobile Enabled

3 Mobile Computing Through Telephony

3.1 Evolution Of Telephony
 3.2 Multiple Access Procedures
3.2.1 FDMA
3.2.2 TDMA variants
3.2.3 CDMA
3.2.4 SDMA
3.3 Satellite Communication Systems
3.3.1 Communicating Through Satellite
3.3.2 Low Orbit Satellite
3.3.3 Medium Orbit satellite
3.3.4 Geo Stationary Satellite
3.3.5 Satellite Phones
3.4 Mobile Computing through Telephone (Page No. 66 to 68
only)
3.5 Computer Supported Telecommunications Applications

4 Emerging Technologies
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Blue-Tooth
4.2.1 Blue-tooth Protocol
4.2.2 Blue-Tooth Protocol Stack
4.2.3 Blue-Tooth Security
4.2.4 Blue-Tooth Application Models
4.3 Radio-Frequency Identification(RFID)
4.3.1 Areas of Applications for RFID
4.4 Wireless Broadband (Page no 91 to 93 only)
4.4.1 Broadband Applications
4.5 Mobile IP
4.5.1 How does Mobile IP work?

5 Global System For Mobile Communications (GSM)

5.1 Introduction
5.2 GSM Architecture
5.3 GSM Entities (Page No. 119 & 120—Basics only)

6 Short Message Service (SMS)

6.1 Mobile Computing Over SMS
6.2 Short Message Service
6.2.1 Strength of SMS
6.2.2 SMS Architecture
6.3 Value Added Services Through SMS
6.3.1 VAS Examples

7 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)

7.1 Introduction
7.2 GPRS Packet Data Network
7.2.1 Capacity & Other End User Aspects
7.2.2 Quality of Service (QoS)
7.2.3 Integral part of the future 3G Systems
7.3 GPRS Network Architecture
 7.3.1 GPRS Network Enhancements
7.4 Applications for GPRS
7.4.1 Generic Applications
7.4.2 GPRS Specific Application
7.5 Limitations of GPRS
7.6 Billing & Charging in GPRS
7.6.1 Tariffing
7.6.2 Billing

8 Wireless Application Protocol (WAP)

8.1 Introduction
8.1.1 Evolution of Wireless Data and WAP
8.1.2 Networks for WAP
8.2 WAP
8.2.1 WAP Application Environment (WAE)
8.2.2 User Agent
8.2.3 User Agent Profile
8.2.4 Wireless Mark-up Language (WML)
8.2.5 WML Script
8.2.6 Wireless Telephony Application (WTA, WTAI)
8.2.7 WAP Push Architecture
8.2.8 The Push Frame Work
8.2.9 Wireless Session Protocol (WSP)
8.2.10 Wireless Transaction Protocol (WTP)
8.2.11 Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS)
8.2.12 Wireless Data Protocol (WDS)
8.2.13 WAP gateway
8.3 MMS
8.3.1 MMS Architecture
8.3.2 MMS Transaction Flows
8.3.3 SMIL (Synchronised Multimedia Integration Language)
8.3.4 MMS Interconnection, Inter Operability and roaming
8.3.5 MMS Device Management and Configuration
8.4 GPRS Applications
8.4.1 Digital Rights Management
8.4.2 OMA Digital Rights Management

9 CDMA and 3G
9.1 Introduction
9.1.1 How it started
9.2 Spread Spectrum Technology (upto Page 220)
9.3 CDMA Vs GSM
9.4 Wireless Data
9.4.1 Short Message Service (SMS)
9.5 Third Generation Networks
9.5.1 International Mobile Telecommunications - 2000
9.5.2 CDMA – 2000
9.5.3 UMTS / WCDMA
9.5.4 Fixed Wireless
9.6 Applications on 3G
 9.6.1 3G Specific Applications

10 Wireless LAN
10.1 Introduction
10.2 Wireless LAN Advantages
10.2.1 Wireless LAN Evolution
10.2.2 Wireless LAN Applications
10.3 Mobile Adhoc networks and Sensor Networks
10.3.1 Wireless Sensor Networks
10.4 Wireless LAN Security
10.4.1 Limiting RF Transmission
10.4.2 Service Set Identifier (SSID)
10.4.3 MAC Address Access Control
10.4.4 Authentication Modes
10.4.5 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
10.4.6 Possible Attacks
10.5 Wireless Local Loop
10.5.1 WLL Architecture
10.6 Hiper LAN
10.7 WiFi Versus 3G

11 Intelligent Networks and Interworking

11.1 Introduction
11.2 Fundamentals of Call Processing
11.3 Intelligence in the networks
11.3.1 Standards for Intelligent Networks

12 Next Generation Networks

12.1 All In One – The Converged Scenario
12.1.1 Convergence of Voice and Data
12.1.2 Convergence Wireline and Wireless
12.1.3 Convergence of Circuit Switching and Packet Switching
12.1.4 Convergence of IT and CT
12.1.5 Convergence of OSS and DSS
12.2 Narrow band to Broadband
12.2.1 DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) Broadband Networks
12.2.2 WiMAX Broadband Wireless Networks
12.2.3 High Speed Broadband Cellular Networks
12.2.4 WiBro
12.3 All IP and B3G Network
12.4 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
12.5 FAMA / DAMA
12.6 Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS)
12.7 Wireless Asynchronous Mode
12.8 Multimedia Broadcast Services
12.8.1 Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB)
12.8.2 Digital Video Broadcast
12.8.3 IP TV
12.8.4 Internet TV
12.9 Multiple Play
 12.9.1 Triple Play
12.9.2 Quadruple Play
12.10 Future trends
12.10.1 3GPP Long Term Evolution
12.10.2 iBurst

Text Book:
1. Mobile Computing Technology,Applications & service creation---- Asoke K Talukder,
Hasan Ahmed, Roopa R Yavagal - Tata Mc Graw Hill ISBN: 139780070144576, ISBN:
100070144575

Reference Books:

1. Wireless & Mobile Networks Concepts & Protocols --- Dr. Sunilkumar S Manvi &
Mahabaleshwar S Kakkasageri ----Wiley Publish ISBN: 9788126520695

2. Mobile Communications 2nd edition --- Jochen Schiller , pearson publish, ISBN:
9788177582635

General Objectives
1. To learn Mobile Computing Principles and Architecture
2. To understand Mobility Management, GSM, and GPRS networks
3. To know Short Message Service (SMS) technology, GPRS, WAP, CDMA, 3G
4. Understand Wireless LAN, WiFi, and WLL (Wireless Local Loop) Architecture
5. Learn Bluetooth, RFID, and Satellite Communications.
6. To Know Next Generation Networks (NGN)

Specific Objectives

1 Introduction
Know the various definitions and significance of terms and technologies
Understand the concept of How Mobile Computing help business to use
information
Discuss mobile computing functions and devices
Discuss the various types of networks used in mobile computing
Learn the Application Services
Understand the role of different standard bodies

2 Mobile Computing Architecture

Learn the general architecture of mobile computing
Briefly discuss various types of middle ware, their functions, roles
Briefly discuss client context manager and context aware systems

3 Mobile Computing Through Telephony

Learn the concepts behind telephony system
Understand how to access information using telephone as a client device
Learn how communication is established through satellites

4 Emerging Technologies
Learn the technolgies related to mobile computing : Bluetooh, RFID,
WiMAX,
 Study basic concepts of how Mobile IP works

5 Global System For Mobile Communications (GSM)

Learn the basic concepts of Cellular Networks
Describe in brief GSM Architecture

6 Short Message Service (SMS)

Describe SMS Architecture
Learn value Added Services through SMS

7 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)

Understand the GPRS Architecture and various elements of GPRS network
Discuss the difference between GSM and GPRS
Discuss the Limitations and Application of GPRS

8 Wireless Application Protocol (WAP)

Discuss the WAP and MMS technology
Describe WAP stack and WAP application environment
Know WML , WML script and Wireless Telephony Application Interface
Study WAP Push Architecture and MMS Architecture
Know the features of WTP, WTLS, WDP
Understand the need for SMIL
Learn GPRS Application

9 CDMA and 3G
Discuss spread spectrum technology
Compare CDMA Vs GSM
Learn the organisation of CDMA Protocol Stack
Comprehend Third generation Networks
Learn 3G applications

10 Wireless LAN
Learn the advantages and applications of WLAN
Understand Mobile Ad Hoc Networks and Sensor Networks
Learn Wireless LAN Security
Discuss Wireless Local Loop Architecture
Understand the concept of Hiper LAN
Compare WiFi Vs 3G

11 Intelligent Networks and Interworking

Understand the concept of Intelligent Networks
Know the standards of IN

12 Next Generation Networks

Learn how technologies of the past and future converge to NGN
 Govt. of Karnataka, Department of Technical Education
Diploma in Computer Science & Engineering
Sixth Semester
Subject: Mobile Computing

Max. Marks: 100 Max. Time: 3 Hours

Model Question Paper

Note: 1. Section –I is compulsory.

2. Answer any TWO questions from each remaining Sections.

Section - I
1 a. Fill in the blanks 5x1=5
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v
b. Write a short note on IPTC and WiBro 5

Section – II
2. a) List the characteristic of a mobile computing environment 5
b) Discuss Wireless networks and Adhoc Networks 5
c) How would you broadly classify mobile computing applications 5
3 a) What are the different tiers in the 3 –tier architecture? Describe the functions 10
of these tiers.
b) Discuss mobile computing through internet 5
4 a) List the applications of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and SDMA 5
 b) What is WiMax? How is it different from WiFi 5
c) What is active and passive RFID? 5

Section-III
5 a) Explain GSM Architecture 10
b) List the strengths of SMS 5
6 a) Explain SM MO. 5
b) What is the difference between GSM and GPRS ? What are the network 10
elements in GPRS that are different from GSM
7. a) Discuss with respect to WAP i) WTP ii) WDP iii) WTLS 10
b) Describe MMS Architecture 5

Section -IV
8. a) What is Spread technology? 5
b) Difference between GSM and 3G 5
c) List the applications of 3G 5
9. a) What are the advantages and disadvantages of WLAN? 5
b) List WLAN applications 5
c) List types of Wireless LAN Architecture 5
10. a) Explain WLL Architecture 5
b) List the requirements of IN service 5
c) Explain All IP network characteristics 5
 Equipments for Computer Science Labs to Implement I & II Sem CS
for an Intake of 60 Students
Computer Lab
SN Equipment Nos
1 Computer Server with minimum 16 GB RAM 2
(Linux and Windows domains)
2 Thin clients (VXL, Enjay, HCL, any other) 40
3 P4 systems with latest configurations with speakers 20
4 Laser Printers 6
5 Type of Networking (Structured) with cat 6e / wireless
6 24 Port switches / Wireless Router 3
7 I/o Boxes for networking As required
8 Broad Band Connection (on Servers) 1

Note : Student : Computer ratio in labs should be strictly 1:1

Softwares : Linux, Windows Server (latest edition), Open office/Star office/MS-office, Flash, Photoshop, Adobe

Equipments for Information Science Labs to Implement I & II Sem IS

for an Intake of 60 Students
Computer Lab
SN Equipment Nos
1 Computer Server with minimum 16 GB RAM 2
(Linux and Windows domains)
2 Thin clients (VXL, Enjay, HCL, any other) or 40
3 P4 systems with latest configurations with speakers 20
4 Laser Printers 6
5 Type of Networking (Structured) with cat 6e / wireless
6 24 Port switches / Wireless Router 3
7 I/o Boxes for networking As required
8 Broad Band Connection (on Servers) 1

Note : Student : Computer ratio in labs should be strictly 1:1

Softwares : Linux, Windows Server (latest edition), Open office/Star office/MS-office, Flash, Photoshop, Adobe
ffice, Flash, Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator, Turbo C++/Dev C++

ffice, Flash, Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator, Turbo C++/Dev C++

 Government of Karnataka
Department of Technical Education
Diploma Course in Computer Science & Engg
List of Equipments / Softwares Required for III and IV Semester Labs

Equipments / Softwares required for a batch size of 20 (2 students per System) for each
of the labs listed below .

1. Data Structures lab

2. Web Design Lab
3. GUI Lab
4. C++ Lab
5. DBMS Lab
6. Linux Lab

Sl No Name of the Equipment / Software Quantity

1 Computers with Latest Configuration 10

2 SQL / MySQL / Oracle and SQL developer 1 + 10 users

 7. Equipments required for “PC Hardware and Networking Lab”

(batch size : 20) 5 Groups of 4 students each

Sl No Name of the Equipment / Software Quantity

PC’s (Athlon, AMD, Intel)
1 20

2 Digital multimeter 05

External HDD and DVD

3 05
10
4 Wrist band
5 Printer, Scanner, Web camera 02 each
10
6 Crimping tool
10
7 Punching tool for I/O boxes
05
8 LAN tester
as required
9 RJ45 connectors
10 Cat 6 cable bundle as required
02
11 Switches (8/16/32 port)
10
12 Network Interface card (RJ 45)
10
13 Network Interface card (Wireless)
14 Wireless router 01
15 MS-Windows OS (Client and Server)
16 Linux